JP6643570B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  There are gaming machines that perform game effects in connection with the progress of a variable display game.

JP 2015-104618 A

However, most of the time during the game is monotonous for the player, and the player has to wait for an occasional high expectation effect.
In one aspect, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving the interest in a game.

In order to achieve the above object, the following gaming machines are provided. The gaming machine includes a display device and a control unit. The display device includes a first display area for displaying a variable display game, and a second display area for displaying a first video independent of the progress of the variable display game. The control unit controls display of the display device. The second display area includes a frame-shaped frame display area, and a video display area that is surrounded by the frame display area and displays the first video. A control unit configured to switch the first video displayed in the video display area in association with the progress of the variable display game to the second video, and to notify the progress of the variable display game; And a second notification control unit that changes the display mode of the frame display area in accordance with the progress of and displays the expectation for the result of the variable display game.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, the control unit changes the display mode of the video display area when switching the first video displayed on the second display area to the second video.

  According to the first aspect, in the gaming machine, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

It is a perspective view showing an example of a game machine of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of a game board of a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control system of a game machine of a first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of the composition of the production control device of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a collective display of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of a main process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of a main process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a checksum calculation process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of an initial value random number update process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of an input process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a switch reading process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of an output process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a random number update process 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a random number update process 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the fraud & winning monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of winning number counter updating processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the game machine state check processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the payment busy signal check processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure game processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the starting opening switch monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a hard random number acquisition process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure starting port switch common processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure reservation information judging processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special winning opening switch monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure usual processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure usual processing shift setting processing 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure 1 change start processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure 2 change start processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a big hit flag 1 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a big hit flag 2 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a big hit determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure information setting processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a variation pattern setting process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the change start information setting processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) of the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a special figure changing process shift setting process (special figure 2) of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing during special figure change of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a special figure display process transition setting process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure display of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of a special figure displaying process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a high probability change frequency update process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the production mode information check processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a fanfare / interval processing transition setting process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing change setting processing 1 during small hit fanfare of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of processing during a fanfare / interval according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing change setting processing during opening of a special winning a prize mouth of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a flow chart of processing during opening of a special winning opening of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the big hit end processing shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of big hit end processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of big hit end setting processing 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of big hit end setting processing 2 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure usual processing shift setting processing 2 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing during a small hit fanfare of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a flow chart of processing change setting processing during small hits of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing during small hits of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of small hit operation change setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a timing chart of a small hit operation of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit remaining sphere process shift setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing a flow chart of small hit residual ball processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of small hit end processing shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of small hit end processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure usual processing shift setting processing 3 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the production command setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the symbol variation control processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a blink control timer initial value table of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the distribution processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a 2-byte distribution process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the general-purpose game process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a gate switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the regular electricity winning switch monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the usual figure usual processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a general-purpose everyday process shift setting process 1 of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing change setting processing during normal figure change of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the processing during normal figure change of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing shift setting processing during normal display in the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a process during normal-drawing display according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the process change setting processing during normal time per figure of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during a regular drawing hit of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the electric power operation shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a general electricity operation timing chart of a normal fluctuation winning device of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the electric power remaining sphere processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a per-figure end processing transition setting process of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of end processing per day figure of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the usual figure shift processing setting processing 2 of the 1st embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a segment LED editing process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the magnet fraud monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a board radio wave fraud monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of an external information editing process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the main prize ball signal editing processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a transmission timing chart of a main prize ball signal of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a start-up port signal editing process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display during change of special figure 1 in state 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display during the change of the general figure in the state 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparative example of the display during a change of the special figure 1 and the display during a change of a general figure in the state 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display during change of special figure 1 in state 2 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display during a change of a general figure in state 2 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparative example of the display during a change (modification) of the special figure 1 of 1st Embodiment, and the display during a change (modification) of a general figure. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a function distribution of the collective display device according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a collective display of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display during change of special figure 1 of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a change display of special figure 2 of a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a collective display device according to a first modification of the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display during a change of the special figure 1 of the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment, and the display during a change of the special figure 2. It is a figure showing an example of a change display of special figure 1 of modification 2 of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display during a change of special figure 1 of modification 3 of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of arrangement of a luminescence part in a game machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of arrangement of a light emitting part in an option setting part of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the luminescence color in a luminescence part of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a rainbow display effect in the 1st arc light emission group of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display color change timing of a rainbow display effect in the 1st arc light emission group of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state notification in the rainbow color display effect in the 1st arc light emission group of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display color switching timing of the clockwise rainbow color display and the display color switching of the counterclockwise rainbow color display in the 1st arc light emission group of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state notification in the rainbow color display effect in the 2nd arc light emission group of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state notification in the rainbow color display effect in the 3rd arc-shaped light emission group of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the main processing in the production control device of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the reception command check processing in the production control device of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the reception command analysis processing in the production control device of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the decoration control processing in the production control device of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the decoration setting process in the effect control device of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in a fanfare in the effect control device of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the event decoration setting process in the effect control device of the modification 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a light emission color in a light emitting unit according to a second modification of the third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a screen during change display in a display of modification 3 of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state notification in the rainbow color display effect in the linear light emission group of the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state notification in the rainbow color display effect in the block light emission group of the modification 5 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of alert display and arrangement of a light emitting part in a game machine of a fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display content of the alerting display of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the movement display effect which starts a warning display of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode switching timing of the moving display effect in the 1st arc-shaped light emission group and the 2nd arc-shaped light emission group of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the move display production which makes the alert display of a 4th embodiment an end point. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in fanfare in the effect control device of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the movement display effect which makes the alert display of the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment a start point and an end point. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode switching timing of the movement display effect in the 1st arc light emission group and the 2nd arc light emission group of the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of arrangement of the alert display of modification 2 of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the movement display effect which makes the alert display of the modification 2 of 4th Embodiment a start point or an end point. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in fanfare in the effect control device of the modification 2 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of composition and a lighting mode of a decoration part in a game machine of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the correspondence of the progress of the special figure game of 5th Embodiment, and a game effect. It is a figure showing an example of a timing chart which shows the correspondence of a synchronous game production and an asynchronous game production in the big hit game state of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process during a round in the effect control device of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a composition of a decoration part and a light emission mode in a game machine of modification 1 of a fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the decoration setting processing in the production control device of the modification 1 of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the power-on decoration setting processing in the production control device of the modification 1 of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the power failure restoration decoration setting processing in the production control device of the modification 1 of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the composition of the decoration part of the game machine of a 6th embodiment, and the light emission mode at the time of normal (there is no abnormalities and abnormalities). It is a figure showing the composition of the decoration part of the game machine of a 6th embodiment, and an example of the light emission mode at the time of a big hit (there is no abnormalities and abnormalities). It is a figure showing an example of a luminescence mode according to a game state of a main part frame luminescence part and a game board luminescence part of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the decoration setting during the change in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process during a round in the effect control device of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure showing the composition of the decoration part of the game machine of a 6th embodiment, and an example of the light emission mode at the time of abnormalities (normal state and big hit state). It is a figure which shows an example of the light emission mode according to the game state of the outer edge light emission group, the push button light emission part, the handle light emission part, and the inner edge light emission group of the modification 1 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a game machine classification light emission mode of a main part frame light emission part and a game board light emission part of modification 2 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in a round in the effect control device of the modification 2 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a decoration part and a light emission mode in a game machine of a 7th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a timing chart showing a display state before and after a power failure of the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emission mode classified by game state of the specific light-emitting part and non-specific light-emitting part of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure showing a flowchart of a power failure restoration decoration setting process in the effect control device of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the initialization operation of the board production device in the game board of the modification 1 of a 7th embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows an example of the initialization operation | movement of the board effect device in the game board of the modification 1 of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the display in which the board production device in the game board of modification 1 of a 7th embodiment is performing initialization operation. It is a figure showing an example of a timing chart which shows a display state after restoration from a power failure of a gaming machine of a modification 1 of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the power failure restoration decoration setting processing in the production control device of the modification 1 of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a decoration part and a light emission mode in a game machine of an 8th embodiment. FIG. 19 is a view illustrating an example of a timing chart showing a display state of a gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 of the eighth embodiment during normal power support. It is a figure showing an example of a composition and a light emission mode of a decoration part in a game machine of a ninth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing an opening mode of a special winning opening during a big hit of the gaming machine of the ninth embodiment and a light emitting mode of a special winning opening light emitting unit. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the decoration setting process in the round in the production control device of the ninth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing an open state of a special winning opening during a big hit and a light emitting mode of a special winning opening light emitting section of a gaming machine of a modification 1 of the ninth embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the decoration setting processing in fanfare in the production control device of the modification 1 of the ninth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a timing chart which shows the opening state of the special winning opening during the big hit of the gaming machine of the second modification of the ninth embodiment and the light emission mode of the special winning opening light emitting unit. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the decoration setting process in the round in the production control device of the modification 2 of the ninth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an opening mode of the big winning a prize mouth according to the big hit type of the game machine of modification 3 of the ninth embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of the game board of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the big winning a prize mouth information which becomes an opening object in a game board of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the big winning prize mouth information which becomes an opening object in a game board of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a timing chart which shows a board production device operation state during a big hit of the gaming machine of the tenth embodiment and a big winning opening light emission state. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the board production apparatus operation state during the big hit of the gaming machine of the modification 1 of 10th Embodiment, and the big winning opening light emission state. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the board | substrate production | presentation apparatus operating state during the big hit of the gaming machine of the modification 2 of 10th Embodiment, and a big winning opening light emission state. It is a front view showing an example of the game board of modification 3 of a 10th embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of a game board of an eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a situation of POP photography in a game machine of an eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of POP of an 11th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of POP display in a display of an 11th embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the POP setting condition monitoring processing in the effect control device of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the POP setting process in the effect control device of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the POP setting information detection processing in the production control device of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of setting information acquired from a two-dimensional barcode of an eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the POP display processing in the effect control device of an 11th embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the POP display cancel processing in the effect control device of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of change of a display mode of POP display in a display of an 11th embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of a POP according to a modification 1 of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a situation of POP photography in a game machine of modification 2 of an 11th embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the fraud situation recording processing in the production control device of the modification 3 of the 11th embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of connection of the production control device of a 12th embodiment, and a push button. It is a figure showing an example of arrangement of a push button LED and a touch sensor in a push button of a 12th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an effect display in a change display game using a push button of a twelfth embodiment of a twelfth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of feedback of a result of a roulette display effect from a push button to a display device of a twelfth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the stage composition in the special figure game of a 13th embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen display on the stage 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a screen display in stage 2 and stage 3 of a 13th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the setting item table of a 13th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a screen display which a display device displays at the time of a setting change operation of a 13th embodiment. It is a customer waiting state table (the 1) which shows an example of the timing which the gaming machine of a 13th embodiment can accept the setting change of a setting item. It is a customer waiting state table (the 2) which shows an example of the timing which the gaming machine of a 13th embodiment can receive the setting change of a setting item. It is a figure showing an example of setting state transition accompanying a setting change operation of a 13th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the reservation base pattern setting change display of a 13th embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the setting change display setting process in the effect control device of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a screen display of a 14th embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of an independent video pattern table according to the fourteenth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an independent picture change effect display of a 14th embodiment, and an expectation degree notice picture display. It is a figure showing an example of the independent picture change effect pattern table of a 14th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the expectation information video pattern table of a 14th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the timing chart which shows the change timing of the picture displayed on the independent picture display area of a 14th embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the independent picture reproduction processing in the production control device of a 14th embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the independent picture suspension processing in the production control device of a 14th embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating switching timing of an image displayed in an independent image display area according to a first modification of the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen display of Modification 2 of the fourteenth embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the independent picture reproduction position setting processing in the production control device of the modification 3 of the fourteenth embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the sound mode switching processing in the production control device of the modification 4 of the fourteenth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the independent video change effect display of the modification 5 of the 14th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the production flow of a 15th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a screen which a display of a 15th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen which a display of a 15th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 3) of a screen which a display of a 15th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 4) of a screen which a display of a 15th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example of the production flow of the 16th embodiment. It is a figure showing the example (the 1) of the screen which the display of a 16th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen which a display of a 16th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing the example (the 3) of the screen which the display of a 16th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example of the Hit number table of a 16th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the production flow of the 17th embodiment. It is a figure showing the example (the 1) of the screen which the display of a 17th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing the example (the 2) of the screen which the display of a 17th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing the example (the 3) of the screen which the display of a 17th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example of the production flow of the 18th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a screen which a display of an 18th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen which a display of an 18th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 3) of a screen which a display of an 18th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example of the production flow of the 19th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a screen which a display of a 19th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen which a display of a 19th embodiment displays. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by the display device according to the embodiment of the nineteenth modified example 1. It is a figure showing an example of the production flow of the 20th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a screen which a display of a 20th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen which a display of a 20th embodiment displays. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by the display device of the twenty-first embodiment. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating an example of a stage configuration table and a stage configuration according to a twenty-second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the timing chart which shows the change timing of the symbol of a 22nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the production flow of the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an example (2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the twenty-third embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating an example of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

  The gaming machine (pachinko machine) 10 according to the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage section (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate (transparent member) holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12.

  On the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, lamps and LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) are incorporated to decorate and produce effects, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally activated). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing) in a notification color (for example, red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12. When an abnormality occurs, the details of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for payment abnormality notification in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15. FIG.

  An upper plate (reserving plate) 21 for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launching device, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are provided below the front frame 12. An outlet 22 for the upper plate ball that flows out, a lower plate (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball firing device, and the like are provided. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, there is provided an option setting section 25 for the player to set various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a decision button switch 25b is provided at the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting an effect mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as a determination button switch for determining an effect mode. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  When the selection button switch 25a functions as a production button switch, the gaming machine 10 causes the player's operation to intervene based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b. Can be performed. For example, the effect in which the operation of the player is intervened includes an effect in a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2). The character displayed on the display 41 can be operated, or the identification information in the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

  On the right side of the option setting unit 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and is operated to discharge a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball firing device causes the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to play a game ball 32 in the front of the game board 30. (See FIG. 2). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b, the player can set, for example, the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and set the brightness of the game board 30. .

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30 respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is mounted in a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. In other words, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent game balls from jumping from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). A plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) and information relating to a game, such as a character that creates a special figure variation display game and a background image that enhances the rendering effect, are displayed in an area (display area) where an image on the display screen can be displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. Further, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating is provided on the left and right portions of the center case 40. The board presentation device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate (general symbol start gate) 34 for giving a start condition of the general symbol change display game. The game ball that has won the general-purpose starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, three general prize holes 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general prize hole is provided on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the general-purpose starting gate 34. The mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure variable display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Immediately below the start winning opening 36, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special figure variable display game.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction of falling toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The movable member 37b is always A closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in is maintained. Then, when the result of the normal-floating fluctuation display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the opening of the game ball is easy to flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (an advantageous state for the player). The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize port or the like.
Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and to the right of the starting winning opening 36, special fluctuations that can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is provided.

  The special fluctuation prize winning device 38 has an attacker type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward, and depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game. The large winning opening is converted from a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous for the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening and closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state or a small hitting game. During the state, the large winning opening is changed from a closed state to an open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, and providing a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. Has become. The game balls that have won the special variable winning device 38 are detected by the special winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

  In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the left area of the center case 40 is defined as a left gaming area in the gaming area 32 in which gaming balls flow, and the right area of the center case 40 is defined as a right gaming area. It has been. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), thereby aiming at winning in the starting winning opening 36, and firing a game ball to the right game area (so-called). By right-handing), it is possible to aim for a prize to the ordinary figure starting gate 34, the normal variable prize winning device 37 and the special variable prize winning device 38.

  Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, at a position corresponding to the right game area, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is provided, and the flow path forming member 42 is moved to the right game area. Is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. In addition, since the material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. .

  In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game, which constitute the special figure change display game, and the general figure start gate 34 are provided. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a game-changing display game triggered by winning, and displaying various information.

  The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of an LED or the like, a special figure 1 reservation display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a general symbol display unit. 55, a general-purpose hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57.

Next, a control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the control system of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. It comprises a data bus 140 and the like.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a clock signal is provided. A predetermined level DC voltage such as DC (Direct Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100. It is made operational.

  The power supply device 400 includes an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC or 5 V DC from the 32 V DC voltage. A power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to a RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the game microcomputer 111 when a power failure occurs, and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal for notifying the occurrence and recovery of the error.

  In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, May be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the first embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal By providing the generation unit 430, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the exchange target.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation section 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply section 410, for example, detects a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated. Based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a fluctuation pattern table for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game, the effect contents, the presence / absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the derived display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure change display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure change display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right change display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the condition of the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, at the time when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, a state in which the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the reach effects having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving the special result mode include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. Note that the expected value increases in the order of “no reach” <“normal reach” <“special 1 reach” <“special 2 reach” <“special 3 reach” <“premier reach”. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived (a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for solenoids and display devices to output the game machine 10 Performs overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure change display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a change pattern (various types) in the special figure change display game. A random number generating circuit for generating a random number of a fluctuation pattern for determining a reach or a variable display without a reach (including an execution time of a variable display game), a hit random number for determining a hit of a universal map variable display game, and the like. And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms (ms)) for the CPU 111A and a clock for giving an update timing of the random number generation circuit to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Have.

  Further, in the process related to the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines whether the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state of the special figure change display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state). State), the operating state (time saving operation state) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of stored memories, and the like, and selects one of the fluctuation pattern tables from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. To get. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A forms a change distribution information obtaining unit that obtains one of the plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. Control for paying out the. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball rental.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10, a starting port 1 switch 36 a in the starting winning port 36, and a starting port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variable winning device 37. The gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 in the normal figure starting gate 34 are connected to each other, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a negative logic signal and converts the signal to a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so that the lead wires of the sensor and the proximity switch are short-circuited incorrectly, the sensor and the switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wire is cut off and floated. It is configured to detect an abnormal state as described above and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, when the detection signal of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the winning port switch 38a, and the abnormality of the sensor and the switch are detected from the output of the proximity I / F 121. Is output to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a fraudulent detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test shooting test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start-up port 1 switch 36a and the start-up port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the second input port 123 and the gaming microcomputer 111.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 asserts the enable signal CE (Chip Enable) 2 (changes to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding an address assigned to the second input port 123. By doing so, it can be read. The same applies to the third input port 124 and a first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not 200 is ready to accept a command), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating lack of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided for taking in a signal based on the input signal and supplying the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function of removing noise from a signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Also, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the trial test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the trial test apparatus. It is configured to be. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but the data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the trial shooting test device of the notifying agency (not shown), a signal indicating a jackpot probability state, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the control cannot be performed is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus. I have.

  The output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140 and has a special winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 and a universal electric solenoid 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting opening / closing data is provided. The output unit 130 further includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal plate 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade, for example. Can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a firing permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to an opening / closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the ordinary solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 is provided to the output unit 130. , A second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a current for the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so as to drive a solenoid operated at 32V. In addition, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by applying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting the current from the cathode terminal via the digit line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in the above, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data is transmitted and received using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided. Not provided.

Next, a configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of the effect control device according to the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output for reproducing various melodies, sound effects, and the like from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 includes a PROM (programmable read only memory) PROM 321 storing a program to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and can retain stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A ferroelectric RAM (FeRAM) 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as a clock unit for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, and the like) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the production, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decoration lamp, And processing such as drive control of the solenoid and management of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (Video RAM) used to develop and process image data of characters and the like read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) system. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address bus / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier or the like that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The output sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are converted into the production control command signal (production command). ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having the provided LED (light emitting diode), a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable character or the like that enhances effect effects in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address bus / data bus 340. It should be noted that a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device) or the like on the glass frame 15 and a frame effect movable body control circuit for controlling the drive of the frame effect device may be provided. Good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and an enter button switch 25b of the option setting section 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect character switch 47 for detecting an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44 and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the (production motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 to detect the main control microcomputer A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor and a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and to electronic components controlled by the same. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, it is supplied to the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 and the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like, in a form output from the main control microcomputer 311. And reset them. Further, the cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for judging the hit of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34, and reads the ROM 111B. Is compared with the judgment value stored in the game, and a process of judging a hit or miss of the ordinary figure change display game is performed. After the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed on the general symbol display unit 55 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a general symbol variance display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of the normal symbol change display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first stop symbol to the third stop symbol is displayed on the general symbol display unit 55, and the general electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated to open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control executing unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (the movable member 37b). In the case where the result of the ordinary figure change display game is out of place, control is performed to display the outcoming result mode on the ordinary figure display section 55.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on the starting memory, the first special figure fluctuation display game is started. The random number value for jackpot determination is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to perform a process of determining a hit or miss in the first special figure variation display game. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to perform a process of determining the hit or miss of the second special figure variation display game.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 for a predetermined time, a process for displaying a special figure variation display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a game control means for controlling the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 into the start winning region (start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). .

  Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on a control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of setting an effect state, outputting sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms an effect control unit that controls an effect related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, when the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and processing for generating a special game state or a small hitting game state (that is, processing for executing a special game or a small hitting game) is performed. In the process of generating the special game state and the small hitting game state, the CPU 111A opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b, for example, so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening. Is performed. Then, a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls is won in the special winning opening, or until a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the special winning opening, a special winning opening is achieved. Is defined as one round, and the control (cycle game) of continuing (repeating) this for a predetermined number of rounds is performed. That is, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that performs control to open and close the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out of control on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of a winning result in the special figure change display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of which of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game results in the high probability state, the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game do not change. Both variable display games are in the high probability state.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (a specific game state, a normal figure high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure change display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of being a winning result of the general-floor variation display game (general-figure probability) is set to a high probability (general-figure high-probability state) higher than 0 which is a normal probability (general-figure low-probability state). Is possible. Thereby, the opening time of the normal fluctuation prize device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than the case where the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is in the low probability state in the ordinary figure. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the general probability is set to “0” so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the time reduction state, the execution time of the general-floor display game (normal-figure fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, the general-figure stop time for displaying the result of the general-figure fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec, When the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time of the first stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms × 1 time), The opening time of the second hit stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 msec × 2 times), the opening time of the third hit stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 3 times).

  It should be noted that the execution time of the general-float display game, the general-figure stop time, the number of times of the general-figure release, and the general-figure release time are set appropriately so as to control the general-figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 to be in the time-saving operation state. For example, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described general-purpose variable display game (normal-purpose variable time) to be a second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (Eg, 10,000 ms equals 1000 ms). In the time reduction state, it is possible to control the general stop time for displaying the result of the general change display game to be a second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is set to be shorter than the first stop time). 704 ms). Further, in the time-saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is released as a result of the general fluctuation display game being hit, the release time (normal power release time) is changed to the second state in the normal state (low normal probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening the ordinary electric power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) for one hit result of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game. The number of times (for example, four times) can be set to the second number of times of opening. Further, in the time reduction state, the probability of being a hit result of the general-figure variation display game (normal-figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal-figure low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. It is possible to set a probability (normally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the time-saving state, the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state by changing one or more of the ordinary figure fluctuation time, the ordinary figure stop time, the number of ordinary electricity open times, the ordinary time open time, and the ordinary probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states different from each other. Further, when a hit occurs, one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

  Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the collective display device according to the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31. The collective display device 50 performs various status displays according to the lighting modes of the LED_00 to the LED_31.

  The collective display device 50 sorts the various status display functions from LED_00 to LED_31, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 , A general symbol display unit 55, a general symbol hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57. The round display section 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game by the lighting mode of four LEDs from LED_00 to LED_03. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_04 and LED_05. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of the eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of eight LEDs from LED_14 to LED_21. The general symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the general symbol game according to a lighting mode of four LEDs from LED_24 to LED_27. The general-purpose reservation display unit 56 displays the number of reservations in the general-purpose game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_28 and LED_29. The state display unit 57 displays the game state in the special figure game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_30 and LED_31. The special figure 2 reservation display section 58 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_22 and LED_23.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, a process of prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, a value of a register or the like is saved at the start address of an area for saving. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and an upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM 111C is from 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the high order. In step S4, 00h at the head of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

  Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the slave control unit (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up. Can be prevented from dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a target of validity determination) that is not a target of validity determination (calculation of a checksum) of data held in the RAM area. Accordingly, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to calculate the check data excluding a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 can be controlled. It can be detected reliably. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the elapse of the standby time, the RAM initialization switch 112 may be operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the RAM initialization switch may be operated until the elapse of the standby time from power-on. It is necessary to keep operating 112. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on even if such a troublesome operation is not performed, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on Can be prevented.

  Next, after performing a process of setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7), measuring a standby time and monitoring occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). Perform First, the number of times (for example, two times) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and whether the power failure monitoring signal is on is determined. A determination is made (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine 10 waits for the power to be shut off. . In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal has been continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure at power-on. be able to.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so that a backup process or the like is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM 111C, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by “−1” (step S11), and the timer value is set to “0”. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). When the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (Read Write Memory) such as the RAM 111C or EEPROM is permitted (step S12). S13), OFF data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111 in advance and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the first embodiment) is set (step S15). It is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 has been turned on based on the state of the first input port 122 previously read (step S16).

  If the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16). If it is normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process shifts to step S21 (FIG. 7) to perform the process when the power is restored normally from the power failure.

  Further, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7) to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make means of conversion.

  In step S21 (FIG. 7), an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure is saved in an area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. The state is undefined. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is changed to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, the area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether the special figure is in the high probability state (the probability state of the special figure change display game is the high probability state) (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), the process skips steps S23 and S24 and shifts to step S25. If the special map is in the high probability state (step S22; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23). For example, a high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the batch display device 50 is provided. Is turned on (lighting) data is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S25), and step S31 is performed. Proceed to. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S25, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer wait demonstration screen command if a customer waits, Otherwise, send a plurality of commands such as a command on the recovery screen). Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, effect number information and high probability number information are transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to zero (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in an area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, and A plurality of commands such as time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted by light and sound to notify RAM initialization. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, effect number information and high probability number information are transmitted.

  In step S31, a process of activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 by a frequency dividing circuit, and outputs a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. A CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for setting activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines By exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to set arbitrarily.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and various initial value random numbers corresponding thereto (in the case of the first embodiment, a special symbol hit symbol is determined). RWM as the initial value (start value) of the random numbers (big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers), the random numbers that determine the hits in the ordinary figure (hit random numbers), and the random numbers that determine the hit symbols in the ordinary figure (hit symbol random numbers) After saving in a predetermined area (step S33), an interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on. ), It is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to obtain an unauthorized random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use a random number generated by a random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. The big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as the processing unit. In addition, in the case of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is used in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes round. "Has been adopted. Each of the above random numbers may be a counter-type update by “+1” or “−1”, or may be a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step S35, the number of times (for example, two times) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure monitoring is performed. It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number updating process (step S35), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is executed. Is kept waiting by the initial value random number update process, thereby avoiding pressure on the interrupt process.

  Note that the initial value random number update processing in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update processing also in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and when such a method is adopted, both methods are performed. In order to avoid the execution of the initial value random number updating process, when performing the initial value random number updating process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. In the case where the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing as in the embodiment and is performed only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update processing, This has the advantage that the main processing is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily prohibiting the interruption (step S39) is performed. A process of outputting the off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Then, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off (step S43) and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S44), access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the slave control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Etc.), the main control means, when the power is turned on, delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device (game control means). Device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time.

  In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an operation of the initialization operation unit. And an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the information, so that the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits the access to the RAM 111C after the elapse of the standby time.
[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the checksum calculation process according to the first embodiment. This checksum calculation process is the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RAM is set as the start value of the calculation address (step S101), and the number of repetitions is set (step S102). Here, the number of repetitions is the number of bytes of the RAM used. Next, “0” is set as the calculated value (step S103).

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S104), the calculated address is updated by "+1" (step S105), and the number of repetitions is updated by "-1" (step S106). ), It is determined whether the calculation of the checksum is completed (step S107). If the calculation is not completed (step S107; N), the process returns to step S104 and repeats the above processing. If the calculation has been completed (step S107; Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the initial value random number update processing according to the first embodiment. This initial value random number updating process is the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the above-described main process. In this initial value random number updating process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by “+1” (step S111), the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by “+1” (step S112), and the hit initial value random number is updated by “+1”. Is updated (step S113), and the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S114), and the initial value random number updating process ends. Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that determines the small hit stop symbol of the special figure. Is a random number that is the initial value of. In addition, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines a hit in the ordinary figure changing game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” is an initial value of a random number that determines a winning symbol in the ordinary figure changing game. It is a random number that becomes It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not exist in a model having no small hit, and the hit symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, a timer interrupt process in the above-described main process will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs in the above-described main process from when an interrupt is issued to when the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39). The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When the timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S121). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step S123) for inputting signals from various sensors and switches and capturing signals, that is, reading the state of each input port, is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S124) for performing drive control and the like of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general-purpose solenoid 37c) is performed. When a signal for stopping firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting firing is output by performing this output process, and a state is set such that the firing permission signal can be set to a permitted state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At this time, no signal processing or the like is performed. The firing permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the game control device 100, and is a second signal (a firing permission signal) indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the payout control device 200. Are also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the firing control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (Step S125) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (Step S126), and a random number update process 2 (Step S127) are performed. Thereafter, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the special winning port switch 38a shown in FIG. A winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S128) for performing whether the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is open or the like is performed. In addition, a special figure game process (step S129) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game, and a general figure game process (step S130) for performing a process related to the general figure variation display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S131) for driving the segment LEDs provided on the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure change display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, and the magnetic sensor 61. The illegality monitoring process for checking the detection signal from the controller for determining whether there is any abnormality (step S132), and the unauthorized detection of the electromagnetic wave for checking the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality. A monitoring process (step S133) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S134) for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt. It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step S123) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the input processing according to the first embodiment.

  In this input processing, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the state of the read input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S142). S143). Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the address of the second input port 123 is prepared (step S144), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S145), and unused bit data is prepared (step S145). S146). Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. Next, bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S147), and a switch reading process (step S148) is performed. Here, in the first embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the address of the third input port 124 is prepared (step S149), the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S150), and unused bit data is prepared (step S150). In step S151, bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S152). Then, a switch reading process (step S153) is performed, and the input process ends.

  As switches to be monitored at the first input port 122, as shown in FIG. 3, a glass frame opening detection switch 63, a body frame opening detection switch 64, a RAM initialization switch 112 (unused in this processing), There are a power failure monitoring signal (unused in this process) generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400, a dispensing abnormality status signal, a shot ball out switch signal, an overflow switch signal, and a touch switch. The switches to be monitored at the second input port 123 include a start-up port 1 switch 36a (“start-up port 1 winning signal”) and a start-up port 2 switch 37a (“start-up port 2 win signal” due to pattern branching, “normal electric accessory 1”). Winning signal 1 is also output), winning opening switch 35a ("normal winning opening winning signal"), large winning opening switch 38a ("special electric accessory 1 winning signal") and gate switch 34a ("normal pattern 1 related to" Gate passing signal 1 "). The switches monitored by the third input port 124 include a panel radio wave sensor 62, a switch abnormality detection signal, a magnetic sensor 61, a frame radio wave illegal signal, and a payout busy signal.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S148 and S153) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the switch reading process according to the first embodiment. In this switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S161). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (step S162), and the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S163), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is set. Is saved (step S164). After that, it waits for a delay time (about 100 μs) to elapse before the second reading (step S165).

  After the elapse of the delay time (about 100 μs), the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read for the second time (step S166). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (step S167), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S168), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Is saved (step S169). After that, in the first and second readings, a fixed bit pattern is created in which the same bit in the state is set to 1 and the different bit is set to 0 (step S170). The determined bit is set (step S171).

  Next, in the first and second readings, an undefined bit pattern in which the same bit is set to 0 and the different bit is set to 1 is created (step S172), and the logic between the undefined bit pattern and the determined state at the time of the previous interrupt is created. The product is taken and set as a previously held bit (step S173). This makes it possible to obtain the state of the signal from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined, saved as the currently determined state (step S174), exclusive ORed between the previous and current determined states, and saved as a rising edge (step S175). The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once each time the interrupt is processed, and the signal is changed by comparing with the result of the previous read. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been performed. However, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, a correct determination may not be performed. On the other hand, as described in the first embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem. Become.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S124) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the output processing according to the first embodiment. In this output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the third output port 135 (see FIG. 3) for outputting segment data of the batch display device 50 (step S181). Next, the data output to the second output port 134 for outputting the data of the general-purpose solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b is combined and output (step S182).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device 50 is updated by "+1" in the range of "0" to "3" (step S183), and the digit of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated. The output data of the line is obtained (step S184). Here, as an example of dynamically lighting the LED_00 to LED_31 of the collective display device 50, a round display, a special figure 1 hold display, a special figure 1 symbol display, a special figure 2 symbol display, an ordinary symbol display, an ordinary figure hold display, and There is a state display (game state display such as a time saving state or a high probability state).

  Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S185), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output and the fifth output port 137 for output of external information (step S186). The external information synthesized in step S185 is “door / frame open” and “security signal”.

  Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S187), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (step S188).

  Subsequently, various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S189). The external information to be synthesized here is “big hit signal 1”, “big hit signal 2”, “big hit signal 3”, “big hit signal 4”, “symbol confirmation frequency signal”, “start opening signal”, “main prize ball”. Signal "and the like. Next, the combined data and the emission permission output data are combined (step S190), and the combined data is output to the fifth output port 137 for external information output and emission permission signal output (step S191).

  Next, data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S192). Then, the data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S193).

  Next, data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S194). Further, the data to be output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S195). Then, data to be output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S196), and the output processing ends.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the payout command transmission processing of the first embodiment. In this figure, the left column is a process of updating (increase) the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal, and the right column is a process of transmitting a payout command.

  In the payout command transmission processing, first, out of a plurality of winning number counter areas provided according to the number of winning balls (for example, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and fourteen winning balls), each of the plurality of winning number counter areas is checked. It is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the number-of-wins counter area 2 that stores up to 255 wins (step S201). If there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and whether or not the checking of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. Is determined (step S203).

  When it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (updated by "-1") (step S204), and the winning number counter area 2 is deleted. The number of payouts corresponding to the address is obtained (step S205). Next, the value of the prize ball remaining area is added to the payout number (step S206), the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S209). If it is determined in step S209 that the subtraction result is equal to or greater than "0" (step S209; Y), the main award ball signal output count is updated to "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the remaining award ball area. (Step S211). Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) every ten payout schedules, and ten pulses are paid out from the payout substrate (payout control device 200). One pulse is output every time.

  Next, in the determination of step S203, it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in the determination of step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not greater than or equal to “0” (step S209; N). In this case, if the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated by "-1" (step S212). If the payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the initial value set in the last step S221 of the payout command transmission process is not set, so the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0”. , No subtraction is performed. As described above, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed. Also, the transmission of the payout command is a condition that the payout control board side is in a state where the prize ball can be paid out.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S213). If it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S213; Y), It is determined whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the condition for payout busy signal is turned on (busy), "during dispensing operation", "neutrophils rental operation", "shoot balls out in error", "in an overflow error", "frame Telecommunications fraud "Medium", "Abnormality of the payout ball detection switch (switch for monitoring the paid out ball)", "During insufficient payout error", "During excessive payout error", "Award to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of acquired game balls remaining) (when it is not 0) "and the like.

  Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215). If there is no count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215) N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the checking of all areas has not been completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

  In step S215, when there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by "-1" (step S218), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 is updated. The command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written into the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

  When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S213; N), when it is determined in step S214 that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y). If it is determined in step S217 that the check of all areas has been completed (step S217; Y), or if the processing of step S221 has been completed, the payout command transmission processing ends.

[Random number update processing 1]
Next, a random number update process 1 (step S126) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the random number update process 1 according to the first embodiment. The random number updating process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which are the targets of the initial value random number updating process.

  In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number of the ordinary figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S231). If the big hit symbol random number in the ordinary figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234). If the jackpot symbol random number of the ordinary figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S232), and the next time of the loaded jackpot symbol random number of the ordinary figure is executed. Is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S233). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; N), it is determined whether the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237). If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; Y), the small hit symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S235), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. Is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S236). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237).

  If the winning random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; N), it is determined whether the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240). If the hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; Y), the hit initial random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S238), and the next initial value of the loaded hit random number is assigned to the corresponding random number counter (step S238). It is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number area (step S239). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240).

  If the winning symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; N), the random number updating process 1 ends. If the winning symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; Y), the winning symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S241), and the next initial value of the loaded winning symbol random number corresponds. The start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set in a register (start value setting register) (step S242), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update processing 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S127) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the random number update processing 2 of the first embodiment. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and a 2-byte random number (variable pattern random number 1) as the variable pattern random numbers. Is set as an update target, and each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for the upper byte and the lower byte at different interrupts. In other words, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (the random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to:

  In the random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which random number of a plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is set to a value from “0” to “3”. The range is updated (step S251). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S252). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is obtained from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S253). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether the random number has completed one cycle.

  Subsequently, for example, a random number such as a counter (hereinafter, referred to as an M1 counter) used for refreshing a DRAM provided in the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer 111 in the first embodiment. The value of the counter to which the appropriate value is set is loaded (step S254). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to random numbers. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S255). The mask value is different from the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 are updated. Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. When updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although four bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is merely an example and is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the random number area to be updated (random number counter) is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; Y), the value of the M1 counter remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as an added value (hereinafter, this is referred to as a mask) The value is set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the masked value, and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S257), and the process proceeds to step S259. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as an addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step S258). ), And proceed to step S259. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may become “0”, and if “0” is added later, the value does not change from the value before the addition. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S259), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step S259; Y), a value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set ( (Step S260), and the process proceeds to step S262. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S259; N), “0” is set as the upper one byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower one byte of the random number value Is set (Step S261), and the routine goes to Step S262.

  In step S262, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S257 or S258 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether the new random number value is greater than the upper limit determination value obtained in step S253. (Step S263). If the new random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; N), the new random number is saved in a random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S265). If the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S264), and this value is set to 1 byte. The random number or a 2-byte random number is saved in a lower random number area (step S265).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S266). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S266; N), the random number updating process 2 ends. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S266; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, its value) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step S267). Then, the random number update processing 2 ends.

  As described above, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the startup winning opening 36 or the startup area of the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for the purpose.

[Winning port switch / status monitoring processing]
Next, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table (for example, a port to which a detection signal from a count switch is input) corresponding to the winning opening switch 38a in the winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38). , And data indicating the bit position of the signal in the port, etc.) are prepared (step S271). Next, even if the special winning opening is not open, it monitors whether there is any fraud (illegal winning) winning in the special winning opening and executes a fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (step S272). .

  Thereafter, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored for an illegal winning and a normal winning is performed. The detected fraud & winning monitoring process (step S274) is executed. Then, a winning port monitoring table of the winning port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the public telephone is prepared (step S275), and an unauthorized / winning monitoring process for monitoring for an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning (step S275). Step S276) is executed.

  Next, a winning port monitoring table for winning port switches (here, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the winning port switch 35a for the general winning port 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S277), and the winning number is updated. A number counter update process (step S278) is performed.

  Next, the value of the state scan counter for sequentially specifying which one of the plurality of switches and signals for monitoring the error state of the gaming machine 10 to be monitored this time is set to “0”. Is updated in the range from to (3) (step S279). After that, according to the value of the state scan counter, any one of a switch abnormality 1 error output due to the occurrence of disconnection of a switch connector or the like, an out-of-shot shot error from the dispensing control device 200, an overflow error from the overflow switch, and an abnormal dispensing error. A gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting an error monitoring based on a crab as a target is prepared (step S280). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether or not an error has occurred (step S281) is performed.

  Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting monitoring of an error based on any of the glass frame opening, the body frame opening, the frame radio irregularity, and the touch switch is prepared. (Step S282). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether or not an error has occurred (step S283) is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S284). If the value of the state scan counter is not "0" (step S284; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring is performed. The process ends. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the gaming machine state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the gaming machine state based on the switch abnormality 2 error output due to the disconnection of the switch connector or the like according to the value of the state scan counter. A gaming machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the game machine as a target is prepared (step S285). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether or not an error has occurred (step S286) is performed, a payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process ends. Note that the payout busy signal check processing is not performed every time, but is performed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring is performed at a period of 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning surveillance processing]
Next, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (steps S272, S274, S276) in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (see FIG. 17) will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fraudulent and winning monitoring processing of the first embodiment. Each winning port monitoring table prepared in the winning port switch / error monitoring process includes “data for determining whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)”, “lower address of fraud monitoring information”, “illegal winning”. "Lower address of number area", "illegal winning error notification command", "illegal winning number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination)", "winning port switch table address", and "notification timer update information (permission / update)" It is assumed that information is defined.

  This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the large winning port switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 and the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. As for the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) and the ordinary electric power (normal fluctuation winning device 37), it is easy to forcibly open the opening / closing member, insert a game ball, and pay out a prize ball. In addition to monitoring for fraud.

  In this fraudulent & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch of the gaming machine state monitoring target is checked (step S291), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S292). The irregularity monitoring period is a period other than the special gaming state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning port switch of the gaming machine state monitoring target is the large winning port switch 38a. When the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than a state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the hit of the ordinary drawing.

  If it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S292; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S293). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302). If there is an input at the target winning opening switch (step S293; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by "+1" (step S294), and the added illegal winning number after addition is the monitoring target fraud occurrence determination number (step S294). It is determined whether the number is equal to or more than 5 (step S295).

  The reason why the number of determinations is set to five is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the game ball is in the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent a case where a prize is passed after passing through or a noise is put on a signal from being immediately determined to be illegal. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is not necessarily illegal to easily determine that the information is illegal.

  If the number is not equal to or larger than the determined number (step S295; N), a winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300). If the number is equal to or greater than the determined number (step S295; Y), the number of unauthorized winnings is kept at the determined number of occurrences of fraud (step S296), and the initial value is saved in the target unauthorized winning notification timer area (step S297). Next, a target fraud command is prepared (step S298), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S299), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S292; N), a winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300), and a winning number counter updating process for setting a winning ball is performed (step S301). Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302), and it is determined whether the update of the notification timer is permitted (step S303). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S303; N), the fraudulent and winning monitoring process ends. The information for which the update of the notification timer is not permitted includes the special winning opening switch 38a. This is because one large winning opening is monitored with two switches. When the timer is updated by monitoring both switches, the timer is updated at double speed, and as a result, the illegal timer times out in half the specified time. In order to avoid such a timer update, the update at the timing of the special winning opening switch which performs the monitoring process first is prohibited. When the update of the notification timer is permitted as in the case of the big winning port switch and the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37 for which the monitoring process is performed later (step S303; Y), the target notification timer is “0”. If not, "-1" is updated (step S304). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to “0”.

  Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch of the gaming machine state monitoring target is one of the large winning port switches 38a, and when the winning port switch of the gaming machine state monitoring target is the other large winning port switch 38a. Is not allowed. This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice as frequently with respect to the fraudulent notification for the special variable prize device 38, thereby preventing the time-up from occurring in half the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). In addition, when the winning port switch of the gaming machine state monitoring target is the big winning port switch 38a or the starting port 2 switch 37a, the updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is "0" (step S305). If the value is not "0" (step S305; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud and winning monitoring is performed. The process ends. If the value is "0" (step S305; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, a target fraud release command is prepared (step S306), and the fraud prize release flag is set as a fraud flag. Is prepared (step S307). Then, the CPU 111A determines whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes “0” (step S308).

  When the value of the notification timer is “0” (step S308; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer is “0” in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the number of the target illegal winnings is Cleared (step S309), the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310). When the value of the notification timer is not the moment when the value of the notification timer has become “0” (step S308; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer has become “0” in the previous fraud and winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag Is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310).

  Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S310; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S311), and effect command setting processing is performed (step S311). Step S312), and terminates the fraud & winning monitoring process. By the above processing, an injustice notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in accordance with the occurrence of the injustice, and an infraction winning illegality release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in accordance with the injustice release. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (steps S278 and S301) in the winning port switch / status monitoring process and the fraud & winning monitoring process will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning number counter updating process of the first embodiment. The winning table of the winning port monitoring table prepared in the winning port switch / state monitoring process includes information on “number of repetitions” and “data for determining whether there is an input defined for each switch”. (Monitoring switch bit) "," lower address of winning number counter area 1 ", and" lower address of winning number counter area 2 ".

  In the winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step S321), and whether or not the target winning opening switch has an input (exactly, an input change). Is determined (step S322).

  If there is no input (step S322; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S331). If there is an input (step S322; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S323), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S324), and it is determined whether or not overflow occurs. (Step S325). If no overflow has occurred (step S325; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S326). As a result, the winning counter for the prize ball (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size at this time is 2 bytes, and is updated in the range from “0” to “65535”. If an overflow has occurred (step S325; Y), the process of step S326 is bypassed.

  Next, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S327), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S328), and it is determined whether or not an overflow occurs (step S329). If no overflow has occurred (step S329; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S330). Thereby, the winning number counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size at this time is 1 byte, and is updated in a range from “0” to “255”. If an overflow has occurred (step S329; Y), the processing of step S330 is passed.

  When the table address is updated to the address of the next record in step S331, it is determined whether or not monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S332). If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step S332; N), the process returns to the process (step S322) of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch. Also, if the monitoring of all the switch is completed (step S332; Y), the winning number counter updating processing is terminated. Through the above processing, a prize ball corresponding to the winning is set.

[Game machine status check processing]
Next, the gaming machine state check processing (step S286) in the above described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the gaming machine state check processing of the first embodiment. Each gaming machine status monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process includes “lower address of the head address of the status monitoring region”, “port of the switch control region in which the target signal information is stored”. "Lower address of input state area", "Mask data for extracting only bits of target signal", "Signal on determination data", "State off command (in the case of error, meaning of error notification end command)", Information of a “state on command (meaning an error notification start command in the case of an error system)”, a “state off monitoring timer comparison value”, and a “state on monitoring timer comparison value” are defined.

  In this gaming machine state check processing, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step S341), and it is determined whether or not the signal to be monitored is ON, that is, whether or not the signal indicates an error. A determination is made (step S342). Note that the case where the signal to be monitored is not ON means a normal state where there is no error for an error system, and a state where the touch switch is not touched. Also, the case where the signal to be monitored is ON means an error (abnormal or illegal) state for an error system, and a touch state for a touch switch.

  If the signal is not on in step S342 (step S342; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S343), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S344). Then, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S345), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

  On the other hand, when the signal is ON (step S342; Y), a state ON flag is prepared as a state flag (step S346), and a target state ON command is acquired and prepared (step S347). Then, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S348), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step S349; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352). It is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S349; N), that is, if the signal state has changed, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area. (Step S350). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S351), the target status monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value. (Step S353).

  If the value of the target status monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; N), this gaming machine status check processing ends. When the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by “−1” and kept at the value of “comparison value −1” (step S354). ), And compares the prepared status flag with the value of the target status flag area (step S355).

  Then, when the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S355; Y), this gaming machine state check processing ends. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S355; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S356), and the prepared state flag is turned off. An effect command setting process of transmitting either the command or the status ON command is performed (step S357), and the gaming machine status check process ends.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) in the winning port switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the payout busy signal check process according to the first embodiment.

  In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S361). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S361; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S361). Step S362), and sets the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (step S363). The OFF determination monitoring timer comparison value set here is set to, for example, 32 ms.

  If the payout busy signal is on in step S361 (step S361; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S364), and an on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S365). As the ON determination monitoring timer comparison value set here, for example, 32 ms is set.

  Next, the value of the busy signal state area is compared with the state of the current signal (step S366). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S366; Y), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by “+1” (step S369), It is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). When the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S366; N), that is, when the state of the signal changes, the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area ( Step S367). Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to zero (step S368), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369), and it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). ).

  When the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the timer comparison value (step S370; N), the payout busy signal check process ends. When the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by “−1” and kept at the value of “comparison value−1” (step S371). Then, the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S372), and the payout busy signal check processing ends.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S129) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special figure game process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure game process, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the input of the starting port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure changing display game is controlled, and the setting of the special figure display is performed. In the special figure game process, first, a start-up switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a. In the start-up switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of a game ball in the starting winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, extraction of various random numbers (big hit random number or the like) is performed. The game result preliminary determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance at the stage before the start of the special figure change display game based on the winning.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a (the special winning opening switch 1 and the special winning opening switch 2) provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is “0” (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number is obtained using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

  In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is “0”, the start of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure fluctuation A special map ordinary process (step A8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is "1" in step A7, the special figure changing process is performed to set the stop display time of the special figure and to set information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process. (Step A9) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the big winning port of each big hit A special figure display process (step A10) for setting a fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is “3” in step A7, the opening time of the special winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, and information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing is set. Processing during the fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "4", an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round, or a special winning opening remains A special winning opening processing (step A12) for performing processing for setting information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is set, and if it is the final round, A special winning port remaining ball process (step A13) for setting a time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning port and setting information necessary for performing the jackpot ending process is performed.

If the special figure game processing number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary processing is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to perform the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hitting A small-hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is “8” in step A7, the small hit operation transition processing, the setting of the command for the small hit end screen, the setting of information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like are performed. The small hitting process (step A16) is performed.

If the special figure game processing number is "9" in step A7, a small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the small hit end processing is performed.
If the special figure game processing number is "10" in step A7, a small hit end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary processing is performed.

  Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 (step A19), a symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A21), a symbol variation control process (step A22) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special figure game process is performed. To end. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not “0” (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do it.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and the special This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operation device is activated). The condition device not operating means that the above-described flag is not set, for example, in a case where the small hit lottery is won. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. It is used as a term having various meanings.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the start-up switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the start-up switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment.

  In the starting port switch monitoring process, first, a starting port 1 (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to determine whether there is a winning in the starting port 1. It is determined whether or not it is (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the starting port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the starting opening 1 (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special figure working hours (general power support) (step A104). . Note that the determination in step A104 is to determine whether or not the gaming state is under normal power support, and does not include the level of the probability state in the determination target.

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is not working (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the special figure is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. . That is, in the time saving state, a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure change display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the winning opening 1 (start winning opening 36) does not win unless the player has left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not win unless the player has right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than a left-handed game. However, when the starting port 1 receives a prize during the time-saving state (ie, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-turn instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and to cause the effect control device 300 to issue a notification (warning) for instructing right-hand operation.

  Next, after preparing a table for setting information of suspension by the starting port 1 (start winning port 36) (step A107), a common process for a special figure starting port switch (step A108) is performed.

  Next, a winning monitoring table is prepared for the starting port 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the starting port 2. (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the start-up opening 2 (step A111; N), the start-up switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize in the starting opening 2 (step A111; Y), the normal electric winning combination (normal fluctuation prize device 37) is in operation, that is, the normal fluctuation prize. It is determined whether or not the device 37 is operated to be in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step A112). If it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), step A114 is performed. The processing shifts to the processing of (1) and the subsequent processing is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the illegal operation of the ordinary electric power is occurring (step A113).

  In the determination as to whether or not a fraudulent fraud has occurred, it is determined that a fraud has occurred if the number of fraudulent winnings in the ordinary variable prize device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in a closed state, and a game ball can be won only in an open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. If the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  In step A113, if it is determined that the unauthorized fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), a table for setting information of suspension by the starting port 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). The start port switch common processing (step A115) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring processing is ended. If it is determined in step A113 that irregularities in the ordinary telephone are occurring (step A113; Y), the start-up switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start-up switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process according to the first embodiment.

  In the hard random number acquisition processing, first, non-winning information is set for the monitoring opening of the starting opening 1 (start winning opening 36) and the starting opening 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A121). It is determined whether there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the mouth 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the starting port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition processing ends. On the other hand, if there is an input to the start switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step A123). A124).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (step A125). Then, among the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) and the starting opening 2 (ordinary fluctuation winning device 37), the information on the winning opening of the monitoring opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process ends. .

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure startup port switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described startup port switch monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure starting port switch common processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure starting port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.
In the special figure starting port switch common process, first, information on the number of winnings to the starting port switch to be monitored, out of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, is transmitted to a management device external to the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the output count, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135 by passing step A134. In the first embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output count area. When the loaded value is "255", when the value is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored, among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, is less than the upper limit value ( Step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 reservations or the number of special figure 2 reservations) is updated by “+1” ( (Step A136), and saves the starting port winning flag to be monitored (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A125). Step A139). Next, a jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning opening 1 has not been won (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the winning is to the starting opening 1 (step A142; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the small hit symbol random number of the RWM is prepared. The data is saved in the storage area (step A144).

  Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination processing (step A146) is performed.

  Next, a start command switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), and effect command setting processing (step A148) is performed to execute the special figure start port switch common processing. finish.

  Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and executes the special figure variable display game. And a starting winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a starting memory which is an execution right. Also, start winning storage means (RAM 111 c), the various random number based extracted to the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 1 (start winning opening 36) is stored as the first start-up stored in the upper limit a predetermined number, starting Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) are stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination processing (step A146) in the above-described start port switch common processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure suspension information determination process of the first embodiment.

  The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  In the special figure reservation information determination processing, first, the starting opening winning flag saved in step A137 is checked to determine whether or not the winning is to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A151).

When it is determined in step A151 that the winning opening 1 has not been won (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that the winning opening 1 has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure time reduction is in progress (step A152).

In step A152, when it is determined that the special figure is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is not being reduced (step A152; N), it is determined whether a large hit or a small hit is being performed (step A153).

If it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is being made (step A153; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the big hit is not being performed or the small hit is not being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. Big hit determination processing (step A154) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A155). If the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step A156), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 is corresponded. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164, where the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a jackpot (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the winning is to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
When it is determined in step A158 that the winning opening 1 has not been won (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164. Is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the winning is to the starting opening 1 (step A158; Y), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value to determine whether or not it is a small hit. Is performed (step A159).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A160). If the result of the determination is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information for the loss is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164 to perform the subsequent processes.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is set. After acquiring (step A162), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing (step A165) is performed. Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game (step A167). Perform

  Thereafter, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the production command setting process (step A168) A169), and the special figure suspension information determination processing ends. Note that the special figure information setting processing in step A166 and the fluctuation pattern setting processing in step A167 are the same as the processing executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary processing.

  By the above processing, a look-ahead design command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. Then, it is transmitted to effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (pre-read result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is rendered before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, to change the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, and to provide the player with the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure change display game. It becomes possible to inform.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) It forms a pre-judgment means. In addition, the timing at which the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning game in which the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the fluctuation display game based on the start memory is performed. good.

[Grand Winner Switch Monitoring]
Next, details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether or not it is in a special game state (step A201). If the special winning opening is being processed (Y in step A201), the process proceeds to step A205, and the subsequent processing is performed. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A202).

  If the special winning port remaining ball is being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the winning prize opening remaining ball is not being processed (step A202; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit is being processed (during the small hitting game state) (step A203).

  If the small hitting process is being performed (step A203; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If it is not during the small hit processing (step A203; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining sphere is being processed (step A204).

  If the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (step A204; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the small hit remaining sphere is being processed (Step A204; Y), the process proceeds to Step A205.

  Since the special figure game processing number does not shift until the special figure game processing timer becomes "0", the value of the special figure game processing number is checked to check the progress of the game. Can be checked. Therefore, to determine whether the special winning game is being opened, the special winning ball remaining ball is being processed, the small hit is being processed, or the small hit remaining ball is being processed, the value of the special figure game processing number is checked. Do it.

  Then, "0" is set to a winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the special winning opening added in the current special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A205), and is there an input to the special winning opening switch 1? Is determined (step A206).

  If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; N), the process proceeds to step A210, and the subsequent processes are performed. When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), an effect command setting process (step A208) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to " +1 "is updated (step A209).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210). If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), the process proceeds to step A214. The subsequent processing is performed. When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), an effect command setting process (step A212) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to " +1 "is updated (step A213).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214). If the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. finish. When the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A215), and if the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A215). In step A215; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends.

  If the large winning prize remaining ball is not being processed (step A215; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step A216). If the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step A216; In Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends.

  If the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter ("1" or "2") is added to the big winning opening count (step A217), and the big winning opening count is reduced. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round (9)) (step A218).

  If the special winning opening count is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step A218; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the special winning opening count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the information in the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to zero (step A220). ), It is determined whether or not the small hitting process is being performed (step A221).

  If the small hitting process is not being performed (step A221; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the small hitting process is being performed (step A221; Y), the value of the small hit opening operation end is saved in the special winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round is completed.

(Normal processing of special maps)
Next, the details of the special figure ordinary processing (step A8) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure ordinary processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figure 2 (the number of second start storages) is “0” (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is “0” (step A306). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figure 1 is “0” (step A306; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A311). (Step A311; N) sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A313), effect command setting processing (step A314) is performed, special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends. . On the other hand, if the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A311 (step A311; Y), special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.

  Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0” in step A301 (step A301; N), special figure 2 change start processing (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is performed. The number-of-suspension command is prepared (step A303), and effect command setting processing (step A304) is performed. Then, a special figure changing process transition setting processing (step A305) of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.

  If the number of special figure 1 reservations is not “0” in step A306 (step A306; N), special figure 1 change start processing (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations is performed. The number-of-reservation command is prepared (step A308), and effect command setting processing (step A309) is performed. Then, a special figure changing process transition setting processing (step A310) of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.

  As described above, the special figure 2 reservation number check is performed before the special figure 1 reservation number check, so that if the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0”, the special figure 2 change start process (step A302) Will be executed. That is, the second special figure change display game is executed prior to the first special figure change display game. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the game controller 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. The priority control means performs the priority control over the game.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 1]
Next, details of the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step A315) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1, first, "0", which is the processing number related to the special figure ordinary processing, is set as the processing number (step A321), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A321). A322).

  Then, the information in the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A323), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special figure ordinary processing transition setting processing 1 is ended. I do.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 change start processing (step A307) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 change start process according to the first embodiment.

  The special figure 1 change start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure change display game. In the special figure 1 change start process, first, a special figure 1 change flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the change symbol discrimination flag area (step A331), and the first special change A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the figure change display game is a big hit is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game are set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting fluctuation start information of the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 change start process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 change start processing (step A302) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 change start process according to the first embodiment.

  The special figure 2 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the second special figure change display game. The same processing as the special figure 1 change start processing shown in FIG. It is done as.

  In the special figure 2 change start process, first, a special figure 2 change flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the change symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the figure change display game is a big hit is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various kinds of information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game are set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (Step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting processing for setting fluctuation start information of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (Step A347), and the special figure 2 change start process ends.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the big hit flag 1 setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A351), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A352). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) of the RWM and prepared (step A353), and information of the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is stored. "0" is cleared (step A354). The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A355) is performed to determine whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. determines whether (step SA356).

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step A355) is a jackpot (step A356; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A352 (step A357). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value indicates whether or not the big hit is a small hit. Is determined (step A358), and it is determined whether or not the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step SA359).

  If the result of the small hit determination processing (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area in which the loss information was saved in step A351. (Step A360), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination processing (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting processing is performed while the loss information is saved in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the first special figure change display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-described special figure 2 change start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the big hit flag 2 setting process of the first embodiment.

  In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the RWM and prepared (step A372), and the information of the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is stored. "0" is cleared (step A373). Note that the reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the special figure 2 is the earliest). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed to determine whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is (step SA375).

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is a jackpot (step A375; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is not a jackpot (step A375; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends while saving the deviation information to the jackpot flag 2. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is one of “big hit” and “missing”.

[Big hit determination process]
Next, details of the above-described special figure suspension information determination processing, the big hit flag 1 setting processing, and the big hit determination processing (steps A154, A355, A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the big hit determination process according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A387), and the big hit judgment processing ends. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), it is out of place. Therefore, "other than a big hit (outlier)" is set as the determination result (step A387).

  If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the game is in a high probability state (the probability state of the special figure change display game is a high probability state) (step A383). .

  If the high probability is high (step A383; Y), an upper limit determination value during the high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A384). Step A386). If the state is not the high-probability state (step A383; N), an upper-limit determination value during low-probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big-hit random number is larger than the upper-limit determination value (step A385). A386).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A387), and the big hit judgment processing ends. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), Since it is a hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), it is out of order. Then, "other than the big hit (outlier)" is set as the determination result (step A387).

  If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A388), and the big hit judgment processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
Next, details of the above described special figure suspension information determination processing and the small hit determination processing (steps A159 and A358) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hit determination process according to the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the small hit determination processing, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). In addition, the small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. That is, a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or larger than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or smaller than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit has occurred. Of course, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value are set so as not to be covered.

  If the value of the big hit random number is smaller than the small hit lower limit judgment value (Step A391; Y), that is, if the big hit is a miss, a miss is set as the judgment result (Step A393), and the small hit judgment processing ends.

  If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), a small hit upper limit judgment value is set, and it is determined whether or not the target big hit random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value. A determination is made (step A392).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (Step A392; Y), that is, when the big hit is judged to be a miss, a miss is set as the judgment result (Step A393), and the small hit judgment processing ends.

  If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N), that is, if the big hit is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A394), and the small hit judgment processing ends. I do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (step A333) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of reservations) First, the big random number of the big hit symbol is loaded (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this processing, the type of the special result is selected.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 and a stop symbol in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction determination is performed. It is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. In the case of the first embodiment, the effect mode shifts at the timing of a hit, and the shift destination of the effect mode to shift to after the end of the hit changes according to the type of the hit symbol (the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit). In addition, when a specific big hit symbol (for example, a 4R surely changing design) among the big hits in the special map 1 is used, the production mode of the transition destination is determined to be a certain change depending on whether or not the game state is being changed. It is determined whether or not to enter the effect mode, or to shift to the effect mode in which it is difficult to discriminate whether the change is a positive change or not. Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410). The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A411). Next, a special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stopped symbol number area (step A413).

  Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of a loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern area. Save (step A417), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A419), and effect command setting processing (step A420) is performed. The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the information of the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to "0" (step A422). Then, the information of the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to "0" (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step A343) in the above-described special figure 2 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area ( The jackpot symbol random numbers are loaded from (for the number of holds 1) (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol number area (step A434). By this processing, the type of the special result is selected.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 and a stop symbol in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction determination is performed. It is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, the effect mode of the transition destination is a special effect mode in which the change in the certainty is determined regardless of the big hit symbol. Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A443), and effect command setting processing (step A444) is performed. The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the information in the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to "0" (step A446). ), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process ends.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the start port 1 (start winning port 36), and executes the first variable display game at the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). A variable display game executing means for executing the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball. In addition, the game control device 100 forms a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure information setting processing (steps A166, A334, and A344) in the special figure suspension information determination processing, the special figure 1 change start processing, and the special figure 2 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure information setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In the case of the first embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not affect the distribution of the fluctuation, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of the fluctuation. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure change display game, and the like.

  In the special figure information setting process, first, a first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and a first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).

  Then, by setting the first half fluctuation group selection offset table (step A453), acquires the offset data corresponding to JP-view number of holding the stop symbols pattern (step A454).

  Next, the first-half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of the stopped symbol, the number of suspensions, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, depending on the specifications of the model, the fluctuation time is shortened only when it is out of range when the number of reservations is large, so in other cases, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. Note that a fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

  Next, a second half variable group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and a second half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).

  Next, a second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and offset data corresponding to the target number of reserved special figures and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).

  Next, the second-half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process ends. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of the stopped symbol, the number of suspensions, and the effect mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (the type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, only in the case of a miss, the occurrence rate of reach changes according to the number of holdings (the occurrence rate of reach decreases when the number of holdings is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting processing]
Next, details of the above-described special figure suspension information determination processing, special figure 1 change start processing, and change pattern setting processing (steps A167, A336, A346) in the special figure 2 change start will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the variation pattern setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  The change pattern is a first half change pattern that is a change mode from the start of the special figure change display game to the reach state, and a second half change pattern that is a change mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure change display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  In variation pattern setting process, first, set the change group address table (step A471), it acquires the address of the second half Change Group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2, to prepare (step A472), the subject variation pattern The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (step A473). In the first embodiment, the structure of the second-half change group table is different between a hit and a non-hit. Specifically, the size for hitting is 1 byte size, and the size for hitting is 2 byte size. The rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of losing, and even one byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the size of the hit is one byte. Therefore, at the time of hit, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the occurrence rate of outliers is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size of outliers is 2 bytes.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure change display game is a miss (step A474). If the result is a miss (step A474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) is performed. The process shifts to A477 and performs the subsequent processes. If it is not a loss (step A474; N), a distribution process (step A476) is performed, the process proceeds to step A477, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  Then, an address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1), Prepare (step A478). Then, a distribution process (step A479) is performed, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, and saved in the second half variation number area (step A480). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared. (Step A484). After that, a distribution process (step A485) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, saved in the first variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process ends. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from a plurality of variations.

[Change start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting processing (steps A337 and A347) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the change start information setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the change start information setting process, first, information on the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, a first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and a first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, a second half variation time value table is set (step A494), and a second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is obtained (step A495).

  Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A498), and a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A499), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A500). ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by “−1” (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the information on the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the change start information setting processing ends.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a determination unit that determines various random numbers stored in the start storage unit (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure change display game. Set the details of the effect in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure change display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information regarding the number of storages to be started (the number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information regarding a stop symbol, and a change in the special figure change display game. A fluctuation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are given, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Transition setting during special figure fluctuation (Special figure 1)]
Next, details of the special figure change processing transition setting processing (special figure 1) (step A310) in the special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure changing process shift setting processing (special figure 1) of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure change processing transition setting processing (special figure 1), first, the processing number relating to the special figure change processing is set to “1” as the processing number (step A511), and the processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. The number is saved (step A512).

  Then, the information in the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). The signal related to the start of the change of the special figure 1 is a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 changing signal. Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the flash control timer (the timer of the flash cycle of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) is stored in the special figure 1 flash control timer area. (For example, 100 ms) is saved (set) (step A516), and the transition setting processing during special figure change (special figure 1) ends.

[Transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special figure change processing transition setting processing (special figure 2) (step A305) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting processing (special figure 2) of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure change processing transition setting processing (special figure 2), first, the processing number “1” relating to the special figure change processing is set as the processing number (step A521), and the processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. The number is saved (step A522).

  Then, the information in the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A523), and a signal relating to the start of change of the special figure 2 (the special symbol 2 changing signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), and the initial value of the flashing control timer (the timer of the flash cycle of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) is stored in the special figure 2 flashing control timer area. Is saved (set) (step A526), and the special figure changing process transition setting processing (special figure 2) ends.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure changing process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure changing process, first, a display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). In the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms. When the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms. If the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. In the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the stop symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set.

  Next, the special figure displaying process shift setting process (step A603) is performed, and the special figure displaying process ends. That is, the game control device 100 forms a stop time setting unit that sets a stop time for displaying a stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Transition setting processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process shift setting process (step A603) in the above described special figure changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure display process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure display processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number “2” related to the special figure displaying processing is set as the processing number (step A611), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area ( Step A612).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 1 change is saved in the test signal output data area (step A613), and a signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 change is saved in the test signal output data area (step A614). The signal relating to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal. The signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal.

  Then, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for output in the external information terminal (step A615). After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, a stop flag relating to the change stop in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area ( Step A616) As a control information of the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, a stop flag relating to the stop of the variation in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area. Then (step A617), the process shift setting process during special figure display is terminated.

[Processing during special map display]
Next, details of the special figure display processing (step A10) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 45 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure displaying process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure displaying process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step A701), and the information of the small hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step A701). Step A702).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process are loaded. (Step A703), the information of the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is determined that it is a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit of the second special figure variable display game (the special figure 2) A signal relating to the start of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and a round number upper limit value table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit is a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the condition device, a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a signal that turns on the signal that turns on the special symbol 2 Including.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2 (step A705; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706). (Step A706; Y), the test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure change display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (Step A707), A number upper limit value table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit is a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the condition device, a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a signal that turns on the signal per special symbol. Including.

  Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained, The data is saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command relating to information for setting the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the production command setting processing is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A716). A717) is performed.

  Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on when a big hit with a payout (a big win opening information other than the big win opening information 1) is turned on, and a big hit without a payout (a so-called sudden big hit, etc., big win opening). When the information is the special winning opening information 1), it is turned on when a big hit occurs during the time saving state, and turned off otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is turned on when there is a big hit with a payout, and turned off when the big hit has no payout.

  After that, the special winning opening opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the normal figure change display game and the special figure change display game are set. (Step A719), the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (Step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special map when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, information of the special winning opening illegal winning number area of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the special winning opening information is cleared (step A722), and the special winning opening corresponding to the special winning opening information is cleared. The flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, a fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the processing for displaying a special figure is completed.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).

  If it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the high-probability variation count updating process (step A726), the effect mode information check process regarding the effect mode setting (step A727) ) To determine whether or not the special figure high probability is in progress (the probability state of the special figure change display game is a high probability state) (step A728).

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure high probability is not present (step A728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure command area (step A729), and the production command setting processing is performed. performing (step a 730). Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, the process proceeds to step A733, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure high probability is present (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733, and the subsequent processes are performed. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure change display game is the high probability state, the small winning occurrence opens the large winning prize, but the small winning occurrence occurs. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order not to make the player aware of.

  Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Then, the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high-probability variation count updating process (step A735), the effect mode information check process regarding the effect mode setting (step A735) A736), the remaining number of rotations for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the remaining number of rotations for effect and the remaining rotation for switching preparation match (step A738). It should be noted that the switching preparation remaining rotation speed is a different value (rotation speed: for example, four times in mode A, three times in mode B, eight times in mode C, etc.) in all of the plurality of effect modes. May be the same value (the number of rotations) in any one of the plurality of effect modes, or may be the same value (the number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes. ).

  If it is determined in step A738 that the effect remaining rotation speed does not match the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A738; N), the special figure ordinary process shift setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure display is performed. The middle processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A738 that the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the production command setting is performed. After performing the processing (step A740), the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure displaying process ends. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing a prefetch effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is effected across modes. Can be avoided.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update processing]
Next, details of the high-probability-variation-number updating process (steps A726 and A735) in the special figure displaying process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the high-probability-change-times updating process according to the first embodiment.

  In the high probability change frequency update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability is being performed (step A751). If the special figure high probability is not being performed (step A751; N), the high probability change frequency update process is performed. To end.

  If the special figure high probability is in progress (step A751; Y), the high probability change count for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game in the high probability state is updated by “−1” (step A752), It is determined whether the probability change frequency is “0” (step A753).

  If the number of times of high probability change is not “0” (step A753; N), the process of updating the number of times of high probability change is ended. If the number of high-probability changes is "0" (step A753; Y), the information in the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and a signal relating to the end of high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A754). Step A755). Note that the signal regarding the high probability end is a signal for turning off the two big hit signals.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & time saving (no high probability & time saving or high probability & time saving) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A756). The signal relating to the end of the high probability & shortening of time is a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal. , A signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and a signal for turning off the ordinary symbol 1 high probability state signal. In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes in the ordinary figure, the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A757), and the ordinary figure low probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A758).
Then, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A759), and the signal related to the left-hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). The signal related to the left-handing instruction is a signal for turning off the firing position designation signal 1. Then, in order to turn off the display LED during the right-handed operation, the number during the left-handed operation is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A761), and the high-probability change frequency update process ends.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check processing (steps A727 and A736) in the special figure displaying processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the effect mode information check processing of the first embodiment.

  In the effect mode information check processing, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a code without update (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a code without update (step A771; Y), The effect mode information check processing ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed in accordance with the number of executed special figure change display games, and, for example, an effect mode that continues to the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. It is.

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A771; N), the effect remaining rotation speed, which is the number of executable times of the special figure change display game until the effect mode is changed, is updated by "-1" (step A772). ), It is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotation speed is “0” (step A773). The process of step A772 is a counting unit that counts the number of executions of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game.

  If the effect remaining rotation speed is not “0” (step A773; N), the effect mode information check processing ends. If the effect remaining rotation speed is "0" (step A773; Y), that is, if the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, an effect mode information address table is set (step A774). The address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is obtained (step A775).

  The effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted is obtained and saved in the effect mode number area (step A776), and the remaining effect speed of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the remaining effect speed area (step A777). The effect mode to be shifted to (the effect mode at the shift destination) can be known from the next mode shift information already saved before step A776. Next mode transition information on the next production mode after the transition production mode is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A778). Note that the processing in step A776 is effect mode execution control means for performing execution control of one of a plurality of effect modes (game modes) in response to the counting result by the counting means (step A772). (Game mode execution control means).

  A probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A776 is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area, that is, if the probability state does not change (Step A780; Y), the effect mode is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 without transmitting the command. The information check processing ends. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A781), and the production command setting is performed. The processing (step A782) is performed.

  Then, an effect rotational speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotational speed acquired in step A777 is prepared (step A783), and effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed. Then, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A785), and effect command setting processing (step A786) is performed to determine whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A787).

  If the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check processing ends. If the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), effect command setting processing (step A789) is performed, and effect mode information check is performed. The process ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) in the above-described special figure display processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A792).

  Next, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A793). The signal related to the start of the big hit includes, for example, a signal that turns on one signal of the big hit (outputs with a big hit + a small hit) and a signal that turns on four signals of the big hit (outputs with a big hit).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). The signal relating to the end of the high probability & shortening of time is, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal. , A signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and a signal for turning off the ordinary symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  After that, the information of the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the general-purpose game mode flag is set. The low probability flag is saved in the area (step A797).

  Then, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the information in the high probability notification flag area is cleared to turn off the game state display LED related to the display of the high probability state (step A799). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area for saving a command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step A801), and the special figure variation that can be executed in the high probability state The information of the high-probability variation count area for managing the number of display games is cleared (step A802). Thereby, the high probability state and the time saving state are completed, and the state becomes the normal probability state and the normal state.

  Thereafter, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), and since the game control device 100 manages the effect mode, the information of the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804). The non-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, a signal relating to the right-handing instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handing is performed in the gaming state display number 2 area in order to light the display LED during right-handing. The number in the state is saved (step A807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 ends. As a result, the information of the effect mode is temporarily cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1 (step A734) in the above-described special figure display processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit fanfare mid-process shift setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

  In the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1, first, a processing number relating to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as a processing number (step A811), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A812). Then, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A814). The signal related to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal that turns on one signal of the big hit (outputs a big hit + a small hit).

  Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815). The signal relating to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

  Then, the information of the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A816), and the illegal monitoring outside period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A817). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818). The signal related to the right strike instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the firing position designation signal 1.

  Then, in order to turn on the display LED for right-handed operation, the number for right-handed operation is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1 ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A11) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the processing of the fanfare / interval, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by "+1" (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A902). (Step A903) is performed.

  Thereafter, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is obtained (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is determined by the obtained opening switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).

  If the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the opening time of the special winning opening for short opening (0.2s in the first embodiment) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. The game is saved (step A907), a special winning opening opening process shift setting process (step A909) is performed to open the special winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing ends.

  If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the opening time of the long winning opening for long opening (29s in the first embodiment) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A908), a special winning opening opening process shift setting process (Step A909) is performed to open the special winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit patterns, (1) 4R, large winning opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, large winning opening information 2 (all long opening), ( 3) 16R, big winning opening information 3 (1-4R is long opening, 5-16R is short opening), (4) 4R, big winning opening information 4 (all long opening), (5) 16R, big winning Open mouth information 5 (all open long), (6) 16R, open winning opening information 6 (1-8R open long, 9-16R open short), (7) 16R, open winning opening information 7 (1) 4R is set to long open, and 5-16R is set to short open).

  Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, the special winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, the special winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are stored in the special winning opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the winning opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, and the winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are. The special winning opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the special winning opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4”. When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, the opening operation is performed such that the opening operation is long, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, the opening operation is short opening.

(Grand prize opening opening process transition setting process)
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process (step A909) in the above-described fanfare / interval process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special winning opening processing shift setting processing, first, the processing number “4” related to the special winning opening processing is set as the processing number (step A911), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A912). Thereafter, a signal related to the start of opening of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913). The signal relating to the start of opening of the special winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning on the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal.

  Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening is cleared (step A914). Then, the ON data of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the processing setting setting for opening the special winning opening is ended.

(Processing while opening the big winning opening)
Next, the details of the special winning opening processing (step A12) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the processing during opening of the special winning opening according to the first embodiment.

  In the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM to determine whether or not the current round is the last round. Is determined (step A1001).

  If it is the last round (step A1001; Y), the final ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and an ending command is prepared (step A1008). A1009), the process shifts to the process of step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If it is not the last round (step A1001; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the number of rounds is reduced. It is determined whether the value exceeds the open switching determination value (A1004).

  When the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005). Then, an interval command is prepared (step A1007), and the process proceeds to step A1010 to perform the subsequent processes.

  If the number of rounds does not exceed the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1006). Then, an interval command is prepared (step A1007), and the process proceeds to step A1010 to perform the subsequent processes.

Thereafter, the effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and the special winning opening processing is ended.
(Grand prize mouth remaining ball processing transition setting processing)
Next, details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) in the above-described special winning opening processing during opening will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special winning port remaining sphere processing shift setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special winning port remaining ball processing shift setting processing, first, the processing number relating to the special winning port remaining ball processing, “5” is set as the processing number (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, the OFF data of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the special winning opening remaining sphere processing transition setting processing ends.

(Grand Winner Remaining Ball Processing)
Next, details of the special winning port remaining ball processing (step A13) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening remaining ball processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special winning port remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the last round. Is determined (step A1101).

  If it is the last round (step A1101; Y), a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1111), and the loaded flag, the special winning opening opening information, and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern ( For example, 1.9 s) is set (step A1112). Then, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1113), the big hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1114) is performed, and the special winning port remaining ball processing ends.

  If it is not the final round (step A1101; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is obtained (step A1103). Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 s) is set (step A1104), and it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105). In this case (step A1105; Y), the processing shifts to the processing of step A1109, and the subsequent processing is performed.

  If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening information is a value of a rank down staging system (step A1106). If it is not the value of the rank down effect system (Step A1106; N), the process proceeds to Step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If the special winning opening opening information is a value of a rank down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is a value of a special effect round (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) ( In step A1107), if the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), an interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3.6 s) is set (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. And the subsequent processing.

  Then, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval processing shift setting processing 2 (step A1110) in the above described special winning port remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 of the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1122). Then, a signal regarding the end of opening of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123). The signal relating to the end of the opening of the special winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal.

Then, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 is terminated.
[Big hit end process shift setting process]
Next, details of the big hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1114) in the above-mentioned big winning opening residual ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the big hit end processing shift setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit end process shift setting process, first, the process number “6” relating to the big hit end process is set as the process number (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132).

  Then, a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133). The signal relating to the end of the opening of the special winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal.

  Next, information in the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and information in the round number area storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1135). . Then, the information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1136), and the information of the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is cleared. to clear (step A1137). Then, the information of the special winning opening information area storing the special winning opening information determination flag is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end transition setting process ends.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the big hit end processing (step A14) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the big hit end processing of the first embodiment.

  In the big hit end processing, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination data is time reduction operation data (step A1201). If it is not the time saving operation data (step A1201; N), the big hit end setting process 1 (step A1202) is performed, and if it is the time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1203) is performed. .

  Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the time of the change start (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).

  Next, as processing for saving information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is obtained and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is obtained. The transfer information is acquired and saved in the next mode transfer information area (step A1208).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1210), and effect command setting processing (step A1211) is performed.

  In addition, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that further include information on the effect mode in either “high probability / without time saving” or “no high probability / without time saving”. In the case of the first embodiment, when the big hit ends, the state always changes to a probable change state (a so-called ST state). Therefore, as the probability information command, “high probability / time reduction / effect mode A”, “high probability / time reduction / effect” There are "Mode B", "High-probability, no time-saving, effect mode C", and "High-probability, no time-saving, effect mode A", which are not used in this processing. , "Low probability, no time saving, effect mode B" and "Low probability, no time saving, effect mode C".

Next, an effect rotational speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotational speed is prepared (step A1212), and effect command setting processing (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high-probability-change-number command corresponding to the high-probability-change number is prepared (step A1214), and effect command setting processing (step A1215) is performed to determine whether or not a time-saving state occurs after the end of the big hit (step A1215). A1216).

If the time-saving state occurs after the end of the big hit (step A1216; Y), the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the big hit end processing ends.
If the time-saving state does not occur after the end of the big hit (Step A1216; N), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (Step A1217), and after effect command setting processing (Step A1218) is performed, the special figure normal processing shifts. The setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the big hit end process ends.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, details of the big hit end setting processing 1 (step A1202) in the above big hit end processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the big hit end setting processing 1 of the first embodiment.

  In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal regarding the absence of a time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221). The signal relating to the absence of the time saving state is, for example, a signal for turning off the two big hit signals.

  Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the absence of the time saving state are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222). The signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the absence of the time reduction state is, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time. The signal includes a signal for turning off the shortened state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal for turning off the ordinary symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  Next, the number of no time saving state is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A1223), the ordinary figure low probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A1224), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & no time saving flag is saved (step A1225). Thereafter, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability variation count area (step A1226), and the signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227). The signal related to the left-handing instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the firing position designation signal 1.

Next, in order to extinguish the display LED during right strike, the number in left strike state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the big hit end setting processing 1 ends.
[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the big hit end setting processing 2 (step A1203) in the above big hit end processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

  In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). The signal related to the start of the time-saving state is, for example, a signal that turns on two jackpot signals. The signal related to the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner since it is output from the big hit.

  Next, signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232). Signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state include, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal. , A signal for turning on the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and a signal for turning on the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  Next, the number of the time reduction state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), the universal figure high probability flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability variation count area (step A1236), and the big hit end setting process 2 ends. In the case of the first embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time-saving state. However, since the right-handed mode is set during the big hit, the setting for the right-handed is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Tokuzu ordinary processing shift setting processing 2]
Next, details of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above-described big hit end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2, first, “0”, which is the processing number related to the special figure ordinary processing, is set as the processing number (step A1241), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A124). A1242).

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The signal regarding the end of the big hit includes, for example, a signal for turning off one big hit, a signal for turning off three big hits, and a signal for turning off four big hits.

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). The signal relating to the end of the big hit includes a signal for turning off the signal during the operation of the condition device, a signal for turning off the signal for operating the continuous actor, a signal for turning off the signal per special symbol, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 2. Includes signals that turn off signals.

  Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag retreat area is cleared (step A1248), and the flag during the irregularity monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening irregularity monitoring period flag area (step A1249). To end.

[Treatment during small hit fanfare]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a view illustrating a flowchart of processing during the small hit fanfare of the first embodiment.

In the small hit fanfare middle process, the small hit middle process shift setting process (step A1301) is performed, and the small hit fanfare middle process ends.
[Small hit middle processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit mid-flight processing shift setting processing (step A1301) in the small hit fan-fare midway processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit processing shift setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hitting middle processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number “8” related to the small hitting middle processing is set as the processing number (step A1311), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1312). ).

  Then, the small hit opening time (for example, 0.2 s) is set in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314). Signal on starting Koatari operation, for example, a signal to turn on the special electric won game 1 during operation signal.

  Then, the ON data of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315), and the information of the special winning opening count number area for storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. Clear (step A1316).

Then, the small hit operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hit control pointer area (step A1317), and the small hit middle processing transition setting processing ends.
[Small hit processing]
Next, details of the small hitting medium processing (step A16) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hitting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hitting small process, first, the small hitting middle control pointer is loaded from the small hitting middle control pointer area (step A1401), and the value of the loaded small hitting middle control pointer is set to the small hitting operation end value (for example, "6"). It is determined whether or not the above is true (step A1402).

  If the value of the loaded small hit control pointer is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the value of the small hit middle control pointer in the small hit middle control pointer area is updated by "+1" (step A1403). ), The small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the small hit mid-process is terminated. If the loaded small hit control pointer value is equal to or larger than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is It is determined whether or not the figure is high (step A1406). Note that the determination in step A1406 determines a probability state as a determination target and does not determine a time reduction state.

  If the loaded flag is in the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the process proceeds to step A1409, and the subsequent processes are performed. If the loaded flag is not in the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), a command for a small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and effect command setting processing (step A1408) is performed. Then, the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step 1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing is terminated.

[Small hit operation shift setting process]
Next, details of the small hit operation transition setting processing (step A1404) in the small hit middle processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the small hit operation shift setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit operation transition setting processing, first, the value of the small hit control pointer loaded in step A1401 is determined (step A1411). If the value of the small hit control pointer loaded in step A1401 is “0”, “2”, or “4” (step A1411; pointer = 0, 2, 4), the value of the small hit control pointer is changed to The corresponding wait time (1500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412). Then, the OFF data of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hit operation shift setting processing ends.

  If the value of the small hit control pointer loaded in step A1401 is "1", "3", or "5" (step A1411; pointer = 1, 3, 5), the value of the small hit control pointer is changed to The opening time (200 ms) of the corresponding special winning opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1414). Then, the ON data of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small hit operation shift setting process ends.

  Here, the small hit operation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the small hit operation of the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointer.

  The small hit operation includes a small hit fanfare time (300 ms), a subsequent big winning opening opening time (200 ms), a subsequent waiting time (1500 ms), a subsequent big winning opening opening time (200 ms), and a subsequent waiting time. Time (1500 ms), a subsequent special winning opening time (200 ms), a subsequent waiting time (1500 ms), a subsequent special winning opening time (200 ms), and a remaining ball processing time (1900 ms). This is a series of operations for a total of 7600 ms including the small hit ending time (100 ms).

  In the case of the small hit operation, the value of the control pointer becomes “0” after the first winning opening time of the special winning opening, and the respective processes corresponding to the values of the control pointer from “0” to “5” are performed. The value of the control pointer becomes “6”. In this manner, in the case of the small hit operation, the small hit remaining ball processing is performed after the opening operation of the special variable winning device 38 four times. In the small hitting operation, the small hitting ending time is set after the remaining ball processing time, and the apparent ending time of 2000 ms, which is the controllable small hitting ending time of 100 ms plus the remaining ball processing time of 1900 ms, is set.

  In addition, during the small hit fan fare time, the wait time, the remaining ball processing time, and the small hit ending time, the special variable winning device 38 is closed by the off control of the large winning opening solenoid 38b. Further, during the special winning opening open time, special variation winning device 38 is opened by ON control of the special winning hole solenoid 38b.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining sphere processing shift setting processing (step A1409) in the small hit medium processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing, first, the processing number relating to the small hit remaining ball processing, “9”, is set as the processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1421). Step A1422).

  Then, the small hitting remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), and the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is turned off in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. The data is saved (step A1424), and the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing ends.

[Small hit ball processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the small hit remaining ball processing according to the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining sphere processing, the small hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1501) is performed, and the small hit remaining sphere processing ends.
[Small hit end processing shift setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit end processing transition setting processing (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the small hit end processing shift setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In the small hit end process shift setting process, first, the process number “10” related to the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1512). ).

  Then, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514). The signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal for turning off the special electric accessory 1 operating signal.

  Then, the information in the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1515), the information in the small hit control pointer area is cleared to zero (step A1516), and the small hit end transition setting processing is performed. To end.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end processing (step A18) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the small hit end processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit end processing, first, a flag relating to the probability state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1601). A1602). If the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1602; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If the flag loaded in step A1601 is not in the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect set at the start of the change (when the stop symbol is set). The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is obtained (step A1604).

  Then, the effect mode number is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1605), the remaining effect rotational speed is acquired and saved in the remaining effect rotational speed area (step A1606), and the next mode transition information is acquired. The data is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1607).

  Then, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609). .

  If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619, and the subsequent processing is performed. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609; N), the probability information command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1610), and the production command setting processing (step A1610) A1611).

  Then, an effect rotational speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotational speed acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1612), and effect command setting processing (step A1613) is performed. Further, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1614), and effect command setting processing (step A1615) is performed to determine whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A1616).

  If the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and effect command setting processing (step A1618) is performed.

  Then, a flag relating to the time saving state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1619), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1619 is during special figure time reduction (step A1620). If the flag loaded in step A1619 is during special figure time reduction (step A1620; Y), special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end processing ends.

  If the flag loaded in step A1619 is not during special figure time reduction (step A1620; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621). The signal related to the left-handing instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the firing position designation signal 1.

  Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the left-handed state number is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1622), and the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed. The hit end processing ends.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above small hit end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3 of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 3, first, "0" which is a processing number related to the special figure ordinary processing is set as a processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A163). A1632).

  Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634). The signal related to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off one signal of the big hit. The signal relating to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

  Then, the information in the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag retreat area is cleared (step A1637), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure ordinary processing transition setting processing 3 is executed. finish.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in the above-described special figure game process subroutine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the effect command setting process of the first embodiment.

  In the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1701), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702; Y), the process returns to step A1701. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1702; N), command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1703).

  Thereby, the effect command (MODE) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. In the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a two-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION", like an effect command, but may be configured in a larger byte configuration. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a multiple-byte configuration may be used.

Then, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1704), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705; Y), the process returns to step A1704. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1705; N), the command data (ACTION) is written into the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1706), and the effect command setting process ends.

  By writing the command data (ACTION) into the effect serial transmission buffer, the effect command (ACTION) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. Will be done.

  In this way, the effect command (MODE) and the effect command (ACTION) are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. The effect control device 300 receives these commands and performs effect control on the screen of the display device 41 or the like. Since serial communication is performed using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

[Symbol variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control process (step A22) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the symbol variation control process of the first embodiment.

  In the symbol change control process, first, a target change control flag is set and it is checked whether the symbol is changing (step A1801), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether the symbol is changing (step A1802). .

  If it is changing (step A1802; Y), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1803). Then, the blink control timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the target symbol is updated by "-1" (step A1804), and it is determined whether or not the blink control timer is "0" (step A1805).

  If the blinking control timer is “0” (step A1805; Y), a blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target symbol and state is obtained (step A1806), and the blinking control timer initial value is set to the target symbol. The data is saved in the blink control timer area (step A1807). The blink control timer initial value will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the variable symbol number of the target symbol is updated by "+1" (step A1808), and the flow shifts to the process of step A1809. If the blink control timer is not “0” (step A1805; N), the process moves to step A1809.

  Then, display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1809), and the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process ends. I do.

  If it is not fluctuating in step A1802 (step A1802; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the target symbol is obtained (step A1810). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the target symbol is obtained (step A1811), and the obtained display data is saved in the target symbol segment area (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process ends. I do.

  In addition, on the fluctuation control table prepared in the special figure game process, information on the lower address of the fluctuation control area, the address of the display table 2 (for stopping), and the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined. I have.

[Flashing control timer initial value table]
Next, the details of the blink control timer initial value (step A1806) acquired in the above-described symbol variation control processing will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is an example of the blink control timer initial value table of the first embodiment. FIG.

The initial value of the blink control timer is set for each target symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) and its state (state 1, state 2).
The initial value of the blink control timer is 80 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 1 and is 60 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 2. Further, the initial value of the blink control timer is 80 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 1 and is 60 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 2. In addition, the initial value of the blink control timer is 160 ms when the general figure is in the state 1 and is 120 ms when the general figure is in the state 2.

  Note that the initial value of the blink control timer is smaller than the value of the state 1 in the state 2 but is not limited thereto. The initial value of the blinking control timer may be larger than the value of the state 1 in the state 2. For example, the initial value of the blink control timer is 60 ms when Toku-zu 1 is in State 1, 80 ms when Toku-zu 1 is in State 2 and 60 ms when Toku-zu 2 is in State 1. The time may be 80 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 2, 120 ms when the special figure is in the state 1, and 160 ms when the general figure is in the state 2.

  In addition, the state 2 is a gaming state advantageous to the player as compared with the state 1, and a specific gaming state can be set for each gaming machine. For example, in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not in the probability fluctuation state, it corresponds to the state 1, and when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is in the probability fluctuation state, the state 2 is set. Equivalent to.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 uses the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, and the general symbol display section 55 in addition to the state display section 57 in the collective display device 50 to play the game of the gaming machine 10. The status can be displayed.

  In the collective display device 50, instead of the status display unit 57, the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is displayed by a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a general symbol display unit 55. Can also be displayed. For example, the gaming machine 10 performs the first state display on the state display unit 57 in the first period, performs the second state display on the state display unit 57 in the second period thereafter, and displays the special figure 1 symbol display. The first state display can be performed by the unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 notifies the game state transition (trigger notification) on the state display unit 57 at the time of the game state transition from the normal state to the probability fluctuation state or the like. In addition, when the gaming state such as the normal state or the probability variation state is the steady state, the gaming machine 10 displays the gaming state in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, and the general symbol display section 55. Is in a steady state (steady state notification). Note that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily need to notify the gaming state using the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55. The gaming machine 10 may notify the gaming state using one or two of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55. Further, the gaming machine 10 may notify a more complicated game state by a combination of the display modes of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, and the general symbol display section 55. . Further, the gaming machine 10 notifies a more complicated game state by a combination of the display modes of the state display section 57, the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, and the general symbol display section 55. It may be. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can notify a game progress that is easy for the player to understand.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the distribution processing according to the first embodiment.

  The distribution process selects the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1 or the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 Processing for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game and selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 It is.

  In the distribution process, first, the prepared first-half variation group table (selection table), the second-half variation selection table (selection table), and the first data of the first-half variation selection table (selection table) have a code without distribution (that is, “0”). ) Is checked (step A1901), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the leading data is a code without distribution (step A1902). Here, the second-half variation group table, the second-half variation selection table, and the first-half variation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second-half variation pattern group, the second-half variation pattern, and the first-half variation pattern. In the case of a selection table that does not need to be assigned, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

  If the first data of the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step A1902; Y), the code is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A1902; Y). (Step A1907), the distribution processing ends. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without sorting (step A1902; N), the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table acquires one sorting value is first established (step A1903).

  Subsequently, the allocation values obtained in step A1903 from fluctuation pattern setting process in step A473, A478, loaded random value at A484 (a value of the variation pattern random numbers 1 or fluctuation pattern random 2 or fluctuation pattern random number 3) After calculating a new random value by subtraction (step A1904), it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A1905). If the new random number is not smaller than “0” (step A1905; N), the address of the next distribution value is updated (step A1906), and the process returns to step A1903.

  That is, in step A1903, after the distribution values specified next in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are acquired, the random number value determined in step A1905 is used as a new random number value. The distribution value is subtracted, and a new random value is calculated (step A1904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A1905). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A1905 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A1905; Y). As a result, at least one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern, and the first half variation pattern defined in the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table, Select a variation number or first half variation number. If it is determined in step A1905 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A1907), and the distribution process ends. I do.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (step A475) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the 2-byte distribution processing of the first embodiment.

  The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a second-half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second-half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1. As shown in FIG. 76, in the two-byte distribution processing, first, is the first data of the second half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting processing a code without distribution (that is, “0”)? checks (step A2001), determines whether the check result, if the head of the data is encoded without sorting (step A2002). Here, the second half variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half variation pattern group, but defines the second half variation pattern group in which the second half variation pattern is “no reach”. In a fluctuation group table (for example, some fluctuation group tables in a case where the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, and therefore, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top. .

  If the first data in the second half fluctuation group table is a code without allocation (step A2002; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the allocation result (step A2007), and the 2-byte allocation processing ends. I do. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the second half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step A2002; N), one distribution value specified first in the second half variable group table is acquired (step A2003).

  Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2003 from the random number value (the value of the variation pattern random number 1) loaded in step A473 of the variation pattern setting process (step A2004). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2005). If the new random number is not smaller than “0” (step A2005; N), the address of the next distribution value is updated (step A2006), and the process returns to step A2003. That is, in step A2003, after obtaining the distribution value specified next in the fluctuation group selection table, the distribution value is subtracted as the new random value using the determined random number in step A2005, and a new random value is obtained. A numerical value is calculated (step A2004). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2005).

  The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2005 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2005; Y). As a result, one of the second-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one second-half variation selection table defined in the second-half variation group table. If it is determined in step A2005 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2005; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the allocation result (step A2007), and the 2-byte allocation process is performed. To end.

[Public figure game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step S130) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 77 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the general-purpose game process of the first embodiment. In the general-figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire processing related to the general-figure change display game is controlled, and the setting of the general-figure display is performed.

  In the general game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general winning switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B2). Perform Next, if the ordinary game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become “0” (step B4).

  If the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time is up or the time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to a process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number. A process (step B5) of setting a general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to in a register is performed, and a process (step B6) of acquiring a branch destination address of a process corresponding to the general-purpose game process number using the table is performed. . Then, a subroutine call (step B7) based on the game processing number is performed.

  In step B7, when the game processing number is "0", the start of the change of the ordinary figure change display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the ordinary figure change display game, the setting of the effect, and the processing during the change of the ordinary figure change game are performed. A general process (step B8) for setting information necessary for the operation is performed. Further, at step B7, if the game process number is "1", performed Hiroshi view change processing for setting of information necessary for performing Hiroshizu display processing (steps B9).

  In step B7, if the game processing number is “2”, if the result of the normal figure change display game is a hit, setting of a general power release time according to whether or not the time saving state The general-drawing display process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the per-drawing middle process is performed. Further, at step B7, if the game process number is "3", continuing in per Hiroshizu process, or Hiroshi electrostatic remaining spheres process Hiroshi in per view process for setting of information necessary for performing (step B11) is performed.

  If the game processing number is "4" in step B7, a general electric remaining sphere processing (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing a general drawing end processing is performed. If the game processing number is "5" in step B7, a general figure end processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the general figure ordinary processing (step B8) is performed.

  Thereafter, a general symbol variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display is prepared (step B14), and a symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol indicator (step B15). Is performed, and the ordinary figure game process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In this gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (step B102). Here, the game state of right-handing is during a big hit, during a small hit, or during special figure time reduction (general power support). In the case of the game state of right-handing (step B102; Y), the processing shifts to step B105. When the game state is not the right-handed game state (step B102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), an effect command setting process (step B104) is performed, the number of ordinary figure reservations is acquired, and the number of ordinary figure reservations is acquired. Is smaller than the upper limit (for example, “4”) (step B105).

  If Hiroshizu holding number is smaller than the upper limit value (step B 105; Y), the Hiroshizu holding number "+1" updated (step B 106), the address of per random number storage area corresponding to Hiroshi Figure number pending the updated It is calculated (step B107). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is ended.

  Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of ordinary drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (step B105; N). Then, the gate switch monitoring process ends.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the ordinary winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 79 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the normal winning switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In this general-purpose winning switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal-variation winning display device is in the hit state and the normal-variation winning device 37 is performing a predetermined number of opening operations. Is determined (step B111). Then, when the vehicle is in the normal position (step B111; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B112), and if there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B112; Y). If it is determined, the count value of the ordinary power counter is updated by "+1" (step B113).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated ordinary telephone counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, “6”) (step B114), and when the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B114; Y). When it is determined, based on the fact that the count value of the ordinary power counter has reached the upper limit, the value of the operation end (for example, “4”) is saved as a process for closing the ordinary power in the normal pointer per hit control pointer area ( (Step B115), the general-purpose game processing timer is cleared to zero (step B116), and the general-purpose winning switch monitoring process ends. In other words, if there is a general prize winning equal to or greater than the upper limit during the hit state of the general figure, the value of the hit end is saved in the normal figure hitting processing control pointer area at that time, and To end.

  Also, when it is determined in step B111 that the vehicle is not in the ordinary drawing mode (step B111; N), when it is determined in step B112 that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B112; N) or step B114 When it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B114; N), the normal power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

(Normal map everyday processing)
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing (step B8) in the aforementioned ordinary figure game processing will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the ordinary processing in the first embodiment. In this ordinary drawing ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary drawing reservations is “0” (step B121), and if the number of ordinary drawing reservations is “0” (step B121; Y), The figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step B141) is performed, and the ordinary figure ordinary processing ends. If the number of reserved symbols is not "0" (step B121; N), the random number is loaded from the winning random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) (step B122). Then, the hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) are cleared to zero (step B123).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability of a winning result in the general-floor variation display game is higher than the normal probability, ie, whether the game is in a time-saving state (step B124). If it is not during the general figure high probability (step B124; N), a low probability lower limit determination value is set (step B125). If it is during the general figure high probability (step B124; Y), the high probability lower limit determination value is set. It is set (step B126). The low probability upper limit determination value and the high probability upper limit determination value are common values (for example, “251”). The low-probability lower-limit determination value and the high-probability-lower-limit determination value are different values (for example, the low-probability-lower-limit determination value is “251” and the high-probability-lower-limit determination value is “1”). The high-probability lower-limit judgment value is a small value in comparison. As a result, the hit probability increases at high probabilities as compared to low probabilities, for example, 0/251 for low probabilities and 250/251 for high probabilities.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127). If the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; N), whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value is determined. Is determined (step B128). In step B127, if the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; Y), or in steps B127 and B128, if the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B127; N, step B128; Y), In the case of a loss, the loss information is saved in the hit flag area (step B129), the loss stop symbol number is set (step B130), and the loss symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B131). Also, in steps B127 and B128, when the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value and equal to or larger than the lower limit judgment value, that is, in the case of a hit (step B127; N, step B128; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area ( (Step B132), a hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (step B133), and stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in a general symbol stop symbol information area (step B134). In the first embodiment, there are three types of winning symbols.

  Next, the stop symbol number is saved in the ordinary symbol stop symbol area (step B135), and the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B136). Thereafter, the random number storage area per ordinary figure is shifted (step B137), the empty area after the shift is cleared to zero (step B138), and the reserved number of ordinary figures is updated by "-1" (step B139). In other words, with the execution of the general-figure variation display game relating to the oldest general-family reservation number 1, the ranks of the general-family reservation numbers “2” to “4” that are on hold after the general-family reservation number “1” Are carried out one by one. By this processing, the value for the number of ordinary figure reservations 2 to the number of ordinary figure reservations 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is moved from the number 1 for ordinary figure retention to the number 3 for ordinary figure retention in the random number storage area per ordinary figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved ordinary figure 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the reserved number of ordinary figure is decremented by “1”.

Then, a normal-figure-change processing transition setting processing (step B140) is performed, and the normal-figure normal processing ends.
[Normal figure normal processing shift setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step B141) in the ordinary figure ordinary processing described above will be described. FIG. 81 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the general-purpose ordinary process shift setting process 1 of the first embodiment. In the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1, first, "0" is set as the processing number for shifting to the ordinary figure ordinary processing (step B151), and the processing number is saved in the ordinary figure game processing number area (step B151). B152). After that, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the ordinary telephone irregularity monitoring period flag area (step B153), and the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 ends.

[Process shift setting process during normal fluctuation]
Next, the details of the normal-figure-change processing transition setting processing (step B140) in the normal-figure normal processing described above will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process of setting transition to processing during normal-figure fluctuation according to the first embodiment. In the normal figure change processing transition setting processing, first, "1" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal figure change processing (step B161), and the processing number is saved in the general figure game processing number area ( (Step B162), the normal figure fluctuation time (common to the low probability and the high probability (for example, 500 ms)) is saved in the general figure game processing timer area (step B163). After that, a signal related to the start of the normal figure fluctuation display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B164). Note that the signal related to the start of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a signal for turning on the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal.

  Next, a fluctuating flag indicating that the general-figure fluctuation display game is fluctuating is saved in the general-figure fluctuation control flag area (step B165). Then, the initial value of the blink control timer (for example, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the blink period timer of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blink control timer area (step B166), and the ordinary figure change process transition setting processing is performed. finish.

[Processing during normal map fluctuation]
Next, the general figure changing process (step B9) in the general figure game processing will be described. FIG. 83 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the processing during the ordinary figure fluctuation of the first embodiment. In the normal figure changing process, a normal figure displaying process shift setting process (step B171) is performed, and the normal figure changing process ends.

[Transfer setting process during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-figure display processing transition setting processing (step B171) in the above-described general-figure fluctuation processing will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process-setting-for-process-in-general-drawing-mode process setting process according to the first embodiment. In the normal figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the normal diagram display process (step B181), and the process number is set in the general figure game process number area. Save (step B182). After that, the general-purpose display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B183). Further, a signal relating to the end of the change in the ordinary figure is saved in the test signal output data area (step B184). The signal related to the end of the change of the ordinary figure is a signal for turning off the signal during the normal change of the symbol 1.

Next, a stop flag indicating that the general-figure change display game is stopped is saved in the general-figure change control flag area (step B185), and the normal-figure display process shift setting processing ends.
[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process of displaying a general figure (step B10) in the above-described general figure game process will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process during normal-drawing display according to the first embodiment. In the normal figure displaying process, first, the hit flag (hit information or out-of-position information) set in the normal figure normal processing is loaded (step B191), and the information of the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step B192). ), It is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B193).

  If the hit flag is not the hit information (step B193; N), the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step B198) for shifting to the ordinary figure ordinary processing is performed, and the ordinary figure displaying processing ends. The normal-drawing-normal-process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B193; Y), a hitting process setting table is set (step B194).

  Then, a hit start pointer value (one of the control pointers “0”, “2”, and “4”) corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol information is obtained, and saved in the normal pointer hit symbol control pointer area (step B195). The general-purpose release time (500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the general-purpose stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B196). Thus, the opening mode of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 during the time saving state is set, and for example, the opening can be performed four times. After that, a normal-drawing-per-middle-process-in-migration setting process (step B197) is performed, and the normal-drawing-middle-display-in-progress process ends.

[Middle-time process shift setting process]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the normal-per-figure process (step B197) in the above-described general-floor display process will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process-setting-for-medium-time-period transition setting process of the first embodiment. In this process, the process number is set to "3" (step B201), and the process number is saved in the general game process number area. (Step B202). After that, a signal related to the start of the normal figure change display game (a signal related to the normal figure change display game) and a signal related to the start of the normal power operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B203). Note that the signal related to the start of the normal figure variation display game is a signal for turning on the normal signal per symbol design, and the signal related to the start of the general power operation is a signal for turning on the normal electric accessory 1 active signal. It is.

Next, ON data is saved in a general-purpose solenoid output data area to output a signal for driving (turning on) the general-purpose solenoid (step B204).
Further, the information in the general telephone count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable prize device 37 is cleared (step B205), and the general illegal winning device for storing the number of prizes to the normal variable prize device 37 during the general illegal unauthorized monitoring period. The information of the winning number area is cleared (step B206). Then, a flag defining the outside of the irregularity monitoring period of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary telephone irregularity monitoring period flag area (step B207), and the process for setting the normal-principle-per-middle processing transition is ended.

[Medium processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the mid-summer-time hitting process (step B11) in the above-described normal time game process will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process during the ordinary hitting operation in the first embodiment. In this routine processing, the control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B211), and the value of the loaded control pointer is set to the value of the control pointer upper limit area in the routine control. It is determined whether or not (the value of the hit end) has been reached (step B212).

  If the value of the control pointer during normal operation does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit area during normal operation (step B212; N), the control pointer during normal operation is updated by "+1" (step B213). Then, the normal power operation shift setting process (step B214) is performed, and the normal time hitting process ends. When the value of the control pointer during the ordinary figure reaches the value of the upper limit value area of the control pointer during the ordinary figure (the value of the hit end) (step B212; Y), the control passes the step B213 and sets the transition to the ordinary power operation. The processing (step B214) is performed, and the processing during the ordinary drawing ends.

(Privilege operation transition setting process)
Next, the details of the ordinary power operation shift setting process (step B214) in the above-described ordinary diagram hitting process will be described. FIG. 88 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the ordinary power operation shift setting process of the first embodiment. The normal power operation shift setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer. In the normal power operation shift setting process, first, a branch process according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B221).

  When the value of the control pointer is either “0” or “2”, the process proceeds to Step B222. That is, in order to control the closing of the ordinary variable prize device 37, the wait time (for example, 200 ms) after the closing of the ordinary variable prize device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B222). The off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c (step B223), and the general-purpose operation shift setting process ends.

  If the value of the control pointer is one of "1" and "3", the flow shifts to step B224. That is, in order to control the opening of the normal variable prize device 37, the normal power open time (for example, 1700 ms), which is the open time of the normal variable prize device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, is saved in the general game processing timer area (step B224) The ON data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area to turn on the general power solenoid 37c (step B225), and the general power operation shift setting process ends.

  If the value of the control pointer is "4", the flow shifts to step B226. In other words, end the opening control of the common variations winning device 37 in order to perform Hiroshi electrostatic remaining spheres process (step B12), and sets "4" as a process number (step B226). Then, this processing number is saved in the general-purpose game processing number area (step B227), and the general electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B228). After that, the off data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area to turn off the general power solenoid 37c (step B229), and the general power operation shift setting process ends.

  Next, the ordinary power operation in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a view showing a general power operation timing chart of the ordinary variable prize device of the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointer.

  The normal power operation in the case of the winning symbol 1 in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is a total of 1200 ms including a normal symbol display time (600 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (500 ms), and a remaining ball processing time (600 ms). Is a series of operations. In the case of the hit symbol 1, the value of the control pointer becomes “4” after the elapse of the ordinary power release time, and the ordinary power winning sphere device 37 performs the ordinary power remaining sphere processing after one opening operation.

  In addition, the normal power operation in the case of the hit symbol 2 in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is performed in a normal symbol display time (600 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), and a subsequent wait time (200 ms). This is a series of operations for a total of 4800 ms, including the normal power release time (1700 ms) and the remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the hit symbol 2, the value of the control pointer becomes “2” after the first ordinary power release time has elapsed, and the control pointer value goes through the respective processes corresponding to “2” and “3”. The value of the pointer becomes “4”. In this manner, in the case of the hit symbol 2, the normal-power remaining sphere process is performed after the two-time opening operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37.

  In addition, the normal power operation in the case of the hit symbol 3 in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is performed by a normal symbol display time (600 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), and a subsequent wait time (200 ms). This is a series of operations of a total of 6700 ms including a normal power release time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), and a remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the hit symbol 3, the value of the control pointer becomes “0” after the elapse of the first ordinary power release time, and the values of the control pointer correspond to “0”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. Through the respective processes, the value of the control pointer becomes “4”. In this way, in the case of the hit symbol 3, the ordinary-power remaining sphere processing is performed after the opening operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 three times.

  During the normal figure display time, the wait time, and the remaining ball processing time, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is closed by the off control of the normal electric solenoid 37c. In addition, during the normal power release time, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by the ON control of the general power solenoid 37c.

(Puden residual sphere treatment)
Next, the ordinary power remaining sphere process (step B12) in the above ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 90 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the ordinary electric remaining sphere processing of the first embodiment. In the ordinary power remaining sphere processing, the ordinary figure end processing shift setting processing (step B231) is performed, and the ordinary power remaining sphere processing is ended.

[Private figure end processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing shift setting processing (step B231) in the above-described general electric remaining sphere processing will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the per-figure end processing transition setting processing according to the first embodiment. In the general figure end processing transition setting processing, first, a processing number “5” relating to the general figure end processing is set (step B241), and the processing number is saved in the general figure game processing number area (step B242). ).

  Thereafter, the general-purpose ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B243), and a signal relating to the end of the operation of the normal variable prize device 37 is saved in the test signal output data area (step B244). The signal related to the end of the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is a signal for turning off the normal electric auditors product 1 operating signal.

  Next, the information in the ordinary telephone count number area for counting the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B245). Then, the value of the control pointer area during the per-chart is cleared (step B246), and the per-chart end processing transition setting process ends.

[End processing per map]
Next, an explanation will be given of the end process (step B13) in the above-described general map game process. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the per-figure end processing according to the first embodiment. In the per-figure-per-draw end processing, the per-figure per-day processing transition setting processing 2 (step B251) is performed, and the per-figure per perigraph end processing is terminated.

[Normal figure normal processing shift setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2 (step B251) in the above ordinary figure end processing will be described. FIG. 93 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2 of the first embodiment. In the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2, first, a processing number “0” relating to the ordinary figure ordinary processing is set (step B261), and the processing number is saved in the ordinary figure game processing number area (step B262). .

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the hit in the normal figure changing game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B263). Note that the signal relating to the end of the hit in the normal figure fluctuation game is a signal for turning off the signal during the normal fluctuation of the symbol 1.

  After that, a flag (flag during the fraud monitoring period) defining the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is saved in the flag area for fraud monitoring during the fraudulent operation (step B264), and the process for setting the normal processing to normal processing transition 2 ends. .

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S131) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the segment LED editing process according to the first embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, settings related to the driving of the LEDs constituting the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 reservation display unit 52, the general view reservation display unit 56, and the status display unit 57 provided in the collective display device 50 are performed. Perform

In the segment LED editing process, first, “1” is added to the blinking control timer to update it (step C11). The blink control timer is, for example, an 8-bit counter timer.
Next, the output on-timing of the general-purpose pending display is determined (step C12), and if it is the output-on timing (step C12; Y), the general-purpose pending number display table 1 is set (step C13), and the output on-timing is set. If it is not (step C12; N), the ordinary figure reservation number display table 2 is set (step C14). The determination of the output on-timing of the general-purpose hold display can be made by referring to a specific bit of the timer. For example, a blinking cycle of 128 ms can be set by referring to the fifth bit of the timer that is incremented by one every 4 ms.

  After that, the display data corresponding to the number of ordinary figure reservations is acquired from the set ordinary figure reservation number display table 1 or the ordinary figure reservation number display table 2, and saved in the segment area (step C15). The segment area is a storage area for storing display data of LED_00 to LED_31.

  For example, the number-of-regular-pending-number display table 1 and the number-of-regular-pending-number display table 2 have the same value for the number of ordinary figure-reserved numbers “0” to “2” and different values for the number of reserved general-purpose numbers “3” and “4” It is. As a result, the corresponding LED is turned off with the number of reserved general figures “0”, the corresponding LED is lit with the number of reserved general figures “1” and “2”, and the number of reserved general figures “3” is displayed on the general figure reservation display unit 56. , "4" realizes blinking of the corresponding LED.

  Next, the output ON timing of the special figure 1 hold display is determined (step C16), and if it is the output ON timing (step C16; Y), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step C17), and the output is performed. If it is not the ON timing (step C16; N), the special figure 1 reserved number display table 2 is set (step C18). The determination of the output on-timing of the special figure 1 hold display can be performed in the same manner as the determination of the output on-timing of the general figure hold display. At this time, for example, by changing the reference bit of the timer that is incremented by one every 4 ms from the general-purpose display, a blinking cycle different from that of the general-purpose display can be set.

  Thereafter, acquires display data corresponding the special symbol 1 number of holding display table 1 or special symbol 1 number of holding the display table 2 was set to special symbol 1 holding number, save in the segment area (step C19). In addition, the lighting mode of the LED is also realized in the special figure 1 display section 52 in the same manner as in the general figure display section 56.

  Next, the output ON timing of the special figure 2 suspension display is determined (step C20), and if it is the output ON timing (step C20; Y), the special figure 2 suspension number display table 1 is set (step C21), and the output is performed. If it is not the ON timing (step C20; N), the special figure 2 reserved number display table 2 is set (step C22). Note that the determination of the output on-timing of the special figure 2 hold display can be performed in the same manner as the determination of the output on-timing of the general figure hold display. At this time, for example, by changing the reference bit of the timer that is incremented by one every 4 ms from the general-purpose display, a blinking cycle different from that of the general-purpose display can be set.

  Thereafter, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension number is acquired from the set special figure 2 suspension number display table 1 or the special figure 2 suspension number display table 2, and saved in the segment area (step C23). It should be noted that the lighting state of the LED is also realized in the special figure 2 holding display section 58 in the same manner as in the general figure holding display section 56.

  Further, a round display LED display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 51 is defined is set (step C24), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step C25). .

Next, the game status display table 1 is set (step C26), display data corresponding to the game status display number 1 is obtained, and saved in the segment area (step C27).
The gaming state display table 1 indicates whether the gaming state of the special figure game is during the time saving period (during regular power support), in other words, whether or not it is one of the gaming states advantageous to the player. A display mode for notification by the display unit 57 is defined. For example, when the LED_29 of the status display unit 57 is turned off, “normal” is notified, and when the LED_29 is turned on, “special figure time reduction (general power support)” is notified.

  Thereafter, the game status display table 2 is set (step C28), the display data corresponding to the game status display number 2 is obtained, saved in the segment area (step C29), and the segment LED editing process ends.

  The game state display table 2 indicates whether or not the game state of the special figure game is a right-handed game state, in other words, whether or not it is another game state advantageous to the player. Defines the display mode for notification. For example, when the LED_30 of the status display unit 57 is turned off, “normal hit (left-handed)” is notified, and when LED_30 is turned on, “right-handed” is notified. It should be noted that the period of notifying “right-handed” includes a period corresponding to a gaming state such as a big hit, a small hit, and a general power support.

  Thus, the segment LED editing process can notify the player of the progress of the game according to the set display mode. Therefore, the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 reservation display unit 52, the special figure 2 reservation display unit 58, the general figure reservation display unit 56, the state display unit 57 has a function as a game progress notification unit.

  Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process and a board radio fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraudulent activities will be described. A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player according to the result of the game may be fraudulently attempted to illegally obtain the game value. Among such fraudulent acts, a gaming machine provided with a mechanism for detecting a fraudulent act using a magnet has been conventionally known. There are various types of fraudulent activities, and detection methods and conditions corresponding to each type are required. However, the occurrence of an abnormal state could not be accurately detected.

  In particular, erroneously determining that an abnormal state has occurred even though an abnormal state leading to wrongdoing has not occurred, and performing a notification or the like causes a player's distrust and a repelling factor of the game in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is important to prevent erroneous detection of such an abnormal state.

  Accordingly, the gaming machine 10 accurately detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection results of the magnetic detector for detecting abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector for detecting abnormal radio waves, and the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector. For example, in order to prevent erroneous detection of an abnormal state, the following illegal magnet monitoring process and illegal panel radio wave monitoring process are performed.

[Magnet fraud monitoring processing]
First, the magnet illegal monitoring process (step S132) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In the magnet unauthorized monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 61 serving as a magnetic detector for detecting an abnormal magnetism, and the start and end of fraud notification are set. Since the magnetic detector functions as a magnet detector that detects the approach of a magnet, the magnetic sensor can be rephrased as a magnet sensor.

  In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, based on the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), whether the magnetic sensor is on, that is, whether abnormal magnetism is detected. It is determined whether or not it is (Step C31). If the magnetic sensor is ON (step C31; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, “1” is added to the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the period of detecting abnormal magnetism and updated (step C32). ), It is determined whether or not the timer for monitoring unauthorized access to the magnet has expired (step C33).

  If the magnet irregularity monitoring timer times out (step C33; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period (for example, 32 ms), abnormality is determined. When abnormality is determined, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C34), and the magnet fraud reporting timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud reporting timer area (step C35). Then, a command for magnet impropriety notification is prepared (step C36), a magnet improper occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet improper flag (step C37), and it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet improper flag matches the value of the magnet improper flag area. A determination is made (step C43).

  That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control unit that detects an abnormal state based on the detection result of the magnetic sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred when the magnetic sensor continuously detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period.

  On the other hand, if the magnetic sensor is not turned on (step C31; N), that is, if abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C38), and the magnet fraud notification that defines the magnet fraud notification time period. If the timer is not "0", "1" is subtracted from the magnet improper notification timer and updated (step C39). Note that the minimum value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is “0” (Step C40). When the timer for monitoring unauthorized access to the magnet has not expired (step C33; N), the process also proceeds to step C39.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not “0” (step C40; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. When the value of the magnet fraudulent notification timer is “0” (Step C40; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired and the period of the fraudulent notification has ended, or In the case where the fraudulent notification has not been performed from step (1), a command to end magnet fraudulent notification is prepared (step C41). Further, a magnet invalid flag is prepared as a magnet invalid flag (step C42), and it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet invalid flag matches the value of the magnet invalid flag area (step C43).

  When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C43; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C43; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step C44), effect command setting processing is performed (step C45), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing ends. I do.

(Panel radio fraud monitoring processing)
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring processing, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 serving as a radio wave detector for detecting an abnormal radio wave, and the start and end of fraudulent notification are set.

  In the panel radio wave monitoring process, first, the panel radio sensor is turned on based on the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, That is, it is determined whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step C51). If the panel radio wave sensor is on (step C51; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step C52).

  Then, a command for informing the radio wave fraudulent information is prepared (step C53), and a fraudulent radio wave occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent radio wave flag (step C54). It is determined whether they match (step C59). That is, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when abnormal radio waves are detected, unlike the case of magnetic fraud.

  That is, the game control device 100 has a function as abnormal state detection control means for detecting occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the panel radio wave sensor. Then, the game control device 100 is configured to determine that an abnormal state has occurred only by detecting the abnormal radio wave once by the board radio wave sensor.

  On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor is not turned on (step C51; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that specifies the radio wave fraud notification time is not "0" unless the radio wave fraud notification is performed. "1" is subtracted from the timer and updated (step C55). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is “0” (step C56).

  If the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is not "0" (step C56; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the panel radio frequency irregularity monitoring process ends. When the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step C56; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired and the period of the fraud notification has ended, or If no illegal notification has been issued from step (1), a command for ending the radio wave fraudulent notification is prepared (step C57), and a fraudulent radio wave release flag is prepared as a fraudulent radio wave flag (step C58). It is determined whether or not the flag matches the value of the board radio wave illegal flag area (step C59).

  If the prepared panel radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the panel radio wave fraud flag area (step C59; Y), the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C59; N), the prepared panel radio wave illegal flag is saved in the panel radio illegal flag area (step C60), and a production command setting process is performed (step C61). The process ends.

  By performing the above-described magnet fraud monitoring processing and panel radio wave fraud monitoring processing, the occurrence of an abnormal state can be accurately detected. That is, although a gaming machine is provided with a component that generates magnetism such as a solenoid, when the magnetism is detected continuously for a predetermined period, it is determined that the state is abnormal, so that the magnetism generated by the solenoid or the like is determined. The occurrence can be prevented from being erroneously detected as an abnormal state. On the other hand, since the gaming machine is not provided with a component that emits a radio wave, it is possible to minimize damage by immediately determining an abnormal state when detecting an abnormal radio wave.

  In the first embodiment, the detection of the abnormal magnetism is simply a state in which the magnetism is detected. However, the detection of the abnormal magnetism may be a state in which the magnetism is stronger than the magnetic state in the non-abnormal state. The state where the magnetism is detected may be regarded as abnormal. Further, in the first embodiment, the detection of the abnormal radio wave is merely a state in which the radio wave is received. However, the detection of the radio wave of an intensity that is not received in the non-abnormal state or the reception of the radio wave in the non-abnormal state is not performed. It may be in a state of receiving radio waves with no frequency. Further, a state where a radio wave whose intensity is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value or a radio wave of a specific frequency is detected may be regarded as abnormal. When the threshold is set based on the strength of the magnetic field, the strength of the radio wave, and the frequency, a signal may be output when the magnetic sensor 61 or the panel radio wave sensor 62 exceeds the threshold, or the threshold may be set on the control device side. You may monitor whether it exceeded.

  From the above, the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor 61) for detecting abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector (panel radio wave sensor 62) for detecting abnormal radio waves, and the detection results of the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector And an abnormal state detection control means (game control device 100) for detecting occurrence of an abnormal state. In the case of a magnetic detector, the abnormal state detection control means continuously detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. In the case of a radio wave detector, however, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred only by detecting an abnormal radio wave once.

[External information editing processing]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 98 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment.

  In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S125), the winning port switch / state monitoring process (step S128), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132), and the panel radio fraud monitoring process (step S133) On the basis of this, a process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

  In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to an error state or a security state, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame is set. The ON data of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the body frame opening error are output as external information and a test signal.

  On the other hand, if neither the glass frame opening error nor the body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C71). C75), OFF data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

  Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not “0”, the security signal control timer is updated to “−1”. (Step C77). Note that the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (Step C78).

  If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the security data ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step C78; Y), that is, when the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information until the security signal control timer times out.

  Magnet fraud (step C80; Y), panel radio fraud (step C81; Y), frame radio fraud (step C82; Y), ordinary fraud (step C83; Y), or grand prize When the illegal operation is occurring (Step C84; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (Step C85), and the gaming machine error state signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86).

  On the other hand, if none of the illegal magnets, illegal radio waves in the board, illegal radio waves in the frame, illegal in the ordinary telephone, or illegal in the special winning opening (steps C80 to C84; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is tested. The data is saved in the signal output data area (step C87).

  Next, in the external information editing process, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a starting port signal editing process for editing a winning signal of the starting port (step C89). Perform Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of executions of the special figure change display game is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step C90). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is “0” (step C91).

  When the value of the symbol determination number control timer is "0" (step C91; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination number signal is stored in the external information output data area. Save (step C92) and end the external information editing process. If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step C91; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C91). C93), the external information editing process ends.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the main prize ball signal editing process according to the first embodiment. The main prize ball signal editing process is a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number, planned game medium payout number) generated by winning in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). Is output to an external device.

  In the main award ball signal editing process, first, if the main award ball signal output control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize balls signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is “0” (step C102). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step C102; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is “0” (step C103).

  If the main award ball signal output count is not "0" (step C103; N), the main award ball signal output count is updated to "-1" (step C104), and the main award ball signal output control timer area is set to the main award ball signal output control timer area. The initial value of the award ball signal output control timer is saved (step C105). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the ON state (eg, high level) time (eg, 128 ms) and the OFF state (eg, low level) time (eg, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. Time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process ends. Further, when the main prize balls signal output count is 0 (step C103; Y) is to save the off data to the main prize balls signals for external devices in the off state to the external information output data area of the RWM (step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; N), it is determined whether or not the main award ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C106). Here, that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step C106; Y), the process proceeds to step C107. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step C106; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

  Through the above processing, information on the planned number of game medium payouts is transmitted to the outside. After the payout condition based on the winning of the game ball is satisfied, it is faster to generate and transmit the main prize ball signal than to complete the payout of the game ball by operating the payout device. From the establishment of the payout condition to the payout of the number of game media to be paid out, information on the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, is output to the outside.

  That is, the game control device 100 can output information on the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, after the payout condition is satisfied and before the payout of the number of game media to be paid out. External output means.

  However, if the number of generated prize balls is small and this value is less than a predetermined number (for example, 10) even if it is added to the value of the remaining number of prize balls area, after the actual payout is completed, information on the scheduled number of game medium payouts May be output. By reducing the unit of the number of game medium payouts corresponding to one main prize ball signal (for example, to “1”), the payout condition is always satisfied and the payout number of game media is paid out. In the meantime, it is possible to output information on the number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, to the outside.

  In view of the above, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media and a control means (game control) for controlling the payout device to pay out a predetermined number of game media based on establishment of a predetermined payout condition. In the gaming machine including the device 100 and the payout control device 200), the control means is the number of game media to be paid out after the payout condition is satisfied and before the payout number of game media is paid out. An external output unit (game control device 100) capable of outputting information on the number of scheduled game medium payouts to the outside is provided. Note that it is also possible to apply this configuration to a slot machine by using a game medium as a medal.

  The external output means (game control device 100) includes a storage means (game control device 100) having a game medium storage area for storing the number of planned game medium payouts which have not been output to the outside, based on establishment of a payout condition. An adding means (game control device 100) for adding the planned game medium payout number corresponding to the established payout condition to the game medium storage area, and the planned game medium payout number stored in the game medium storage area reaches a predetermined number. Based on this, the transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting the predetermined number of planned game medium payouts to the outside, and subtracting the predetermined number of planned game medium payouts transmitted by the transmission means from the game medium storage area. Subtraction means (game control device 100).

Here, the transmission timing of the main prize ball signal will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of the first embodiment.
For example, the game control device 100 outputs one pulse (main prize ball signal) every time a predetermined unit number (for example, 10) of game media is to be paid out. The output signal of the main prize ball signal rises from “OFF” to “ON” when the value of the output control timer is “48”, and “ON” to “OFF” when the value of the output control timer is “16”. And keeps “OFF” until the value of the output control timer becomes “0”. That is, the output signal of the main prize ball signal is a pulse signal of 192 ms including an “ON” time of 128 ms and an “OFF” time of 64 ms.

  The payout control device 200, unlike the game control device 100, outputs one pulse (prize ball signal) every time a predetermined number of game media (for example, 10) are paid out. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the external device confirm the match between the game medium payout schedule and the game medium payout result, and can deal with the illegal payout.

  In addition, in the prize during the jackpot period, when the payout of the game medium is delayed due to lack of ball, etc., and the game medium is paid out after the end of the big hit, the external device, only the prize ball signal output by the payout control device 200, It was not possible to determine whether or not the payout was based on winnings during the jackpot period. However, the game control device 100 outputs an main prize ball signal so that an external device (for example, a hall computer) can accurately collect (determine) information.

(Start port signal editing process)
Next, details of the opening signal editing process (step C89) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the start-up port signal editing processing according to the first embodiment. The starting port signal editing process is a process that is performed in common for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  In the opening signal editing process, first, if the starting signal output control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step C111). Note that the minimum value of the starting port signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the starting port signal output control timer is “0” (Step C112). When the value of the starting port signal output control timer is “0” (Step C112; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of starting port signal outputs is “0” (Step C113).

  If the number of times of starting port signal output is not "0" (step C113; N), the number of times of starting port signal output is updated to "-1" (step C114), and the starting port signal output control timer area outputs the starting port signal output. The control timer initial value is saved (step C115). The initial value of the starting port signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the ON state (eg, high level) and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the OFF state (eg, low level) of the starting port signal (eg, 64 ms). For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the start-up port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the start-up port signal editing process ends. If the start port signal output count is “0” (step C113; Y), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C113). C118), the start-up signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting port signal output control timer is not “0” (Step C112; N), it is determined whether or not the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON section (Step C116). The starting port signal output control timer being in the output ON period means that the value of the starting port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step C116; Y), the process proceeds to step C117. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step C116; N), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step C118), end the start-up signal editing process.

  Next, a variation display mode between the special figure 1 and the ordinary figure will be described with reference to FIGS. As described with reference to FIG. 5, the collective display device 50 has 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31, and configures the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 with eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The general symbol display unit 55 is composed of four LEDs from LED_24 to LED_27. Therefore, the number of LEDs of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is in a relation larger than the number of LEDs of the ordinary symbol display section 55.

  Here, a display mode of the special figure 1 displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display during a change of the special figure 1 in the state 1 of the first embodiment.

  The special figure 1 includes a lighting pattern and a stop pattern. The lighting pattern is a changing display mode of the special figure 1, and is represented by the lighting modes of eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting patterns of the special figure 1 in the state 1 include the lighting patterns 1 to 8. The stop pattern is a display mode of the fluctuation result of the special figure 1 and is plural (up to 256 patterns).

  The changing display mode of the special figure 1 is as follows: the lighting pattern 1 to the lighting pattern 2, the lighting pattern 3, the lighting pattern 4, the lighting pattern 5, the lighting pattern 6, the lighting pattern 7, and the lighting pattern 8 in the order of the update interval every 80 ms. Transition with. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of the special figure 1 in the state 1 is 640 ms (= 80 ms × 8).

  The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 1 is “OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 2 is “OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 3 are “OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 4 are “ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 5 is the same as the lighting pattern 3. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 6 is the same as that of the lighting pattern 2. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 7 is the same as that of the lighting pattern 1. In the lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 8, all of the LED_06 to the LED_13 are “OFF”.

  That is, the changing display mode of the special figure 1 has a lighting mode in which some of the changing displays overlap with other changing displays. For example, the lighting pattern 1 and the lighting pattern 7, the lighting pattern 2 and the lighting pattern 6, and the lighting pattern 3 and the lighting pattern 5 have overlapping lighting modes. On the other hand, the changing display mode of the special figure 1 has a different lighting mode in the changing display that is continuous in time series. For example, the lighting pattern 2 has a different lighting mode from the immediately preceding lighting pattern 1, and the lighting pattern 3 also has a different lighting mode from the immediately following lighting pattern 3.

  In such a display mode of the special figure 1 during the change, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are changed from the right to the left in the lighting pattern 1 to the lighting pattern 4 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing. . In addition, in the display mode of the special figure 1 during the change, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are changed from the left to the right in the lighting pattern 4 to the lighting pattern 7 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing. In the display mode of the special figure 1 during the change, the LED_10 to the LED_13 are changed from the left to the right in the lighting pattern 1 to the light pattern 4 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing. In addition, in the display mode of the special figure 1 during the change, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are changed from the right to the left in the lighting pattern 4 to the lighting pattern 7 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 to the player. For example, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the stop pattern of the special figure 1 for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 from the stop pattern. However, since the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the area of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 to the player in the changing display mode of the special figure 1 as described above, the player may change the display of the special figure 1 during the change. By observing the mode, it is easy to grasp the stop pattern in the area of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53.

  Next, a display mode of a general symbol displayed on the general symbol display unit 55 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display during the change of the general figure in the state 1 of the first embodiment.

  Usually, a lighting pattern and a stop pattern are provided. The lighting pattern is a display mode during a change in ordinary drawing, and is represented by the lighting modes of four LEDs from LED_24 to LED_27. There are lighting patterns from lighting pattern 1 to lighting pattern 4. The stop pattern is a display mode of the fluctuation result of the ordinary figure, and there are a plurality of stop patterns (up to 16 patterns).

  The display mode during the change of the ordinary figure changes from the lighting pattern 1 to the lighting pattern 2, the lighting pattern 3, and the lighting pattern 4 in the order of the update interval of 160 ms. That is, one cycle of the ordinary lighting pattern is 640 ms (= 160 ms × 4).

  The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 1 is “OFF, OFF, OFF, ON” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 2 is “OFF, OFF, ON, OFF” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 3 is “OFF, ON, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 4 is “ON, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27.

  That is, the display mode during the change of the ordinary figure has a lighting mode in which some of the display during the change does not overlap with the other display during the change. Naturally, the changing display mode of the ordinary figure has a different lighting mode in the continuous changing display in time series. For example, the lighting pattern 2 has a different lighting mode from the immediately preceding lighting pattern 1, and the lighting pattern 3 also has a different lighting mode from the immediately following lighting pattern 3.

  In such a display mode in which the general figure is changing, the LED_24 to LED_27 in the lighting pattern 1 to the lighting pattern 4 indicate that the lit LED moves from right to left to indicate that the general figure is changing.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the ordinary symbol display section 55 to the player. For example, the ordinary symbol display unit 55 displays the ordinary symbol stop pattern for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the ordinary symbol display unit 55 from the stop pattern. However, since the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the area of the general symbol display section 55 to the player by the display mode during the change of the general figure as described above, the player observes the display mode during the change of the general figure. By doing so, it is easy to grasp the stop pattern in the area of the ordinary symbol display unit 55.

  Next, the coincidence points and differences between the changing display of the special figure 1 in state 1 and the changing display of the ordinary figure will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram illustrating a comparative example of the changing display of the special figure 1 and the changing display of the ordinary figure in state 1 of the first embodiment.

  In the comparative example of the changing display of the special figure 1 and the changing display of the ordinary figure, the LED_06 to the LED_13 and the LED_24 to the LED_27 are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the lighting mode of each of the changing LEDs is arranged in the time series in the vertical direction. .

  According to this, the changing display of the special figure 1 can be divided into the first half of LED_06 to LED_09, the second half of LED_06 to LED_09, the first half of LED_10 to LED_13, and the second half of LED_10 to LED_13. These divided special figure 1 changing displays are shown in four ranges surrounded by a chain line. Among them, the first half of LED_06 to LED_09 is a special figure 1 changing display (part) which can be compared with the changing display of the ordinary figure.

  In addition, the changing display of the ordinary figure is different from the changing display of the special figure 1 in update timing, but the changing display of the LED_24 and the LED_27 is the same as the first half of the LED_06 to the LED_09. The display during normal movement is shown in one range surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

  In other words, the normal-floating display and the special figure 1 fluctuating display (part) have a common fluctuating display (specific fluctuating display). In other words, in other words, the changing display of the ordinary figure is entirely constituted by the specific changing display, and the changing display of the special figure 1 is partially constituted by the specific changing display. With such a configuration, it is easy for the player to compare and contrast the display while the ordinary figure is changing and the display while the special figure 1 is changing (partly).

  At this time, since the update timing of the special figure 1 is different from that of the ordinary figure (80 ms for the special figure 1 and 160 ms for the ordinary figure), the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate to the player that the symbols are different symbols. Further, since the update cycle of Toku-zu 1 matches the update cycle of Toku-zu (both 640 ms), the gaming machine 10 sets the range of one cycle of the lighting pattern of Toku-zu to the range of 1 cycle of lighting pattern of Toku-zu 1 Can be clearly indicated to the player. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can realize the distinction between the special figure 1 and the general figure by changing the number of LEDs and the update interval between the special figure 1 and the general figure.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 can not only help the player understand the progress of the game by clearly indicating the special figure 1 and the ordinary figure, but also improve the visibility when the player confirms the progress of the game. improves. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the display mode of the batch display device 50 that tends to be cluttered orderly, and can improve the aesthetic appearance and design of the gaming machine 10. Further, the gaming machine 10 makes the display mode of the collective display device 50 orderly, and thus reduces the fatigue when the player checks the progress of the game.

Next, the changing display of the special figure 1 in the state 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display during the change of the special figure 1 in the state 2 of the first embodiment.
The lighting patterns of the special figure 1 in the state 2 include a lighting pattern 11 to a lighting pattern 18. There are multiple (up to 256) stop patterns.

  The changing display mode of the special figure 1 is as follows: the lighting pattern 11 to the lighting pattern 12, the lighting pattern 13, the lighting pattern 14, the lighting pattern 15, the lighting pattern 16, the lighting pattern 17, and the lighting pattern 18 in the order of the update interval every 60 ms. Transition with. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of the special figure 1 in the state 2 is 480 ms (= 60 ms × 8).

  The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 11 is “ON, ON, ON, OFF, OFF, ON, ON, ON” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 12 are “ON, ON, OFF, ON, ON, OFF, ON, ON” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. Then, LED lighting mode in the lighting pattern 13 is a "ON, OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON, OFF, ON" from LED_06 in order of LED_13. The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 14 is “OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 15 is the same as the lighting pattern 13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 16 is the same as the lighting pattern 12. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 17 is the same as the lighting pattern 11. In the lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 18, all of the LEDs_06 to LED_13 are "ON".

  That is, the changing display mode of the special figure 1 in the state 2 differs from the changing display mode of the special figure 1 in the state 1 in the lighting mode of the LED and the update timing of the lighting pattern. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can display the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 on the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 instead of or in addition to the state display section 57.

  In such a changing display mode of the special figure 2, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are changed from the right to the left in the lighting pattern 11 to the lighting pattern 14 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing. . Further, in the display mode of the special figure 1 during the change, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are changed from the left to the right in the lighting pattern 14 to the lighting pattern 17 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing. In the display mode of the special figure 1 during the change, the LED_10 to the LED_13 are changed from the left to the right in the lighting pattern 11 to the lighting pattern 14 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing. In addition, in the display mode of the special figure 1 during the change, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are changed from the right to the left in the lighting pattern 14 to the lighting pattern 17 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 to the player even in the state 2. For example, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the stop pattern of the special figure 1 for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 from the stop pattern. However, since the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the area of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 to the player in the changing display mode of the special figure 1 as described above, the player may change the display of the special figure 1 during the change. By observing the mode, it is easy to grasp the stop pattern in the area of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53.

  In the first embodiment, the lighting mode of the changing LED in the special figure 1 and the update timing of the lighting pattern are different so that the state 1 and the state 2 are clearly distinguishable from each other. The state 1 and the state 2 may be clearly distinguishable by one of the lighting mode of the middle LED and the update timing of the lighting pattern.

  Next, a display mode of a general symbol in a state 2 displayed on the general symbol display unit 55 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display during the change of the general figure in the state 2 of the first embodiment.

The lighting patterns of the ordinary figure in the state 2 include the lighting patterns 11 to 14. There are a plurality of stop patterns (up to 16 patterns).
The display mode during the change of the general figure in the state 2 changes from the lighting pattern 11 to the lighting pattern 12, the lighting pattern 13, and the lighting pattern 14 in the order of the update interval of 120 ms. That is, one cycle of the ordinary lighting pattern is 480 ms (= 120 ms × 4).

  The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 11 is “ON, ON, ON, OFF” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 12 is “ON, ON, OFF, ON” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 13 is “ON, OFF, ON, ON” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 14 is “OFF, ON, ON, ON” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27.

  That is, the display mode of the general figure in the state 2 during the change is different from the display mode of the general figure in the state 1 during the change in the lighting mode of the LED and the update timing of the lighting pattern. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can display the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 on the general symbol display section 55 instead of or in addition to the state display section 57.

  In such a display mode during the change of the general figure, the LED_24 to LED_27 in the lighting pattern 11 to the lighting pattern 14 indicate that the LED to be turned off moves from right to left to notify that the general figure is changing.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the ordinary symbol display section 55 to the player. For example, the ordinary symbol display unit 55 displays the ordinary symbol stop pattern for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the ordinary symbol display unit 55 from the stop pattern. However, since the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the area of the general symbol display section 55 to the player by the display mode during the change of the general figure as described above, the player observes the display mode during the change of the general figure. By doing so, it is easy to grasp the stop pattern in the area of the ordinary symbol display unit 55.

  Note that, in the first embodiment, the lighting mode of the LED and the lighting pattern update timing during the fluctuation of the general figure are different so that the state 1 and the state 2 are clearly distinguishable. The state 1 and the state 2 may be clearly distinguishable from each other by one of the lighting mode of the LED and the update timing of the lighting pattern.

[Modification of First Embodiment]
Next, the points of coincidence and difference between the changing display of the special figure 1 and the changing display of the ordinary figure in the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a diagram illustrating a comparative example of the display during change (variation example) of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment and the display during change (modification example) of the ordinary figure.

  The collective display device 50 of the modification of the first embodiment is different from the collective display device 50 of the first embodiment in that the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is configured by two LEDs, LED_06 and LED_07, The single symbol display unit 55 is constituted by one LED. Therefore, also in the modification of the first embodiment, the number of LEDs in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is in a relation larger than the number of LEDs in the ordinary symbol display section 55.

  In the comparative example of the changing display (modification) of the special figure 1 and the changing display (modification) of the ordinary figure, LED_06, LED_07, and LED_24 are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the lighting mode of each changing LED is time-series. Are arranged vertically.

  According to this, the changing display (variation example) of the special figure 1 can be divided into a changing display of LED_06 and a changing display of LED_07. These divided special figure 1 changing displays are shown in two ranges surrounded by a dashed line. Of these, the changing display of LED_06 is the special figure 1 changing display (part) that can be compared with the changing display of the ordinary figure.

  Further, the display during the change of LED_24 is the same as the display during the change of LED_06, and the update timing of the display during the change is the same (for example, the display during the change is updated every 128 ms). The display during normal movement is shown in one range surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

  In other words, the normal-floating display and the special figure 1 fluctuating display (part) have a common fluctuating display (specific fluctuating display). In other words, in other words, the changing display of the ordinary figure is entirely constituted by the specific changing display, and the changing display of the special figure 1 is partially constituted by the specific changing display. With such a configuration, it is easy for the player to compare and contrast the display while the ordinary figure is changing and the display while the special figure 1 is changing (partly). As described above, even when the number of the LEDs in the special figure 1 is two and the number of the LEDs in the general figure is one, the display during the change of the general figure and the display during the change of the special figure 1 (partly) Can be used to set a common variable display.

  It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 improves the visibility of the player when confirming the progress of the game by setting the common changing display of the special figure 1 and the ordinary figure. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the display mode of the batch display device 50 that tends to be cluttered orderly, and can improve the aesthetic appearance and design of the gaming machine 10. Further, the gaming machine 10 makes the display mode of the collective display device 50 orderly, and thus reduces the fatigue when the player checks the progress of the game.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a batch display device 50 on the front side. The collective display device 50 includes a special figure 1 symbol display section 53 (first variable display game display section) and a general symbol display section 55 (second variable display game display section). The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays eight lighting patterns (displaying the result being derived) and stop patterns (displaying the result) of the first special figure variable display game (first variable display game) (first number). ) LED (indicating light). In addition, the general symbol display unit 55 displays the display during the derivation of the result of the general symbol change display game (the second change display game) and the result display, the lighting pattern display (the result derivation display) and the stop pattern display (the result display). Are displayed by four (second number) LEDs (indicating lights).

  Note that the combination of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is not limited to the first special figure variable display game and the general figure variable display game. For example, the combination of the first variable display game and the second variable display game may be a first special figure variable display game and a second special figure variable display game, a second special figure variable display game and a general figure variable display game, or other combinations. A combination of variable display games may be used.

  (2) The first variable display game display unit updates the display mode of the display during the derivation of the result of the first variable display game (display during change) at the first update interval (for example, 80 ms), and performs the second variable display. The game display unit updates the display mode of the display during derivation of the result of the second variable display game at a second update interval (for example, 160 ms) different from the first update interval.

  (3) The first variable display game display unit sequentially updates the display of the first variable display game during the derivation of the result by a third number (for example, 8 patterns), and the second variable display game display unit The display mode during the result derivation of the second variable display game is sequentially updated with a fourth number (for example, four patterns) different from the third number.

(4) One cycle of updating the display mode of the first variable display game is the same as one cycle of updating the display mode of the second variable display game.
(5) The display during deriving the result of the first variable display game and the display during deriving the result of the second variable display game include a common variable display.

(6) The display during the derivation of the result of the first variable display game and the display during the derivation of the result of the second variable display game are in such a relationship that any one of the display during the change includes the other display during the change.
[Second embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the function distribution of the collective display device 50.

First, the function distribution of the batch display device 50 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating an example of a functional distribution of the collective display device according to the first embodiment.
In the first embodiment, the collective display device 50 distributes the notification function of the LEDs_00 to LED_31 according to the function distribution pattern 1. In the second embodiment, the collective display device 50 distributes the notification functions of the LED_00 to the LED_31 according to the function distribution pattern 2. For example, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment is a model “AAA”, and the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is a model “BBB”. In this way, the collective display device 50 is used in common by a plurality of models, and the notification function of LED_00 to LED_31 is assigned to each model.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is a model having a so-called one type + two types of game characteristics, and has one type of game characteristics according to FIG. 1 and two types of game characteristics according to FIG. Have. In such a gaming machine 10, the special map 2 generally does not have a hold storage of the variable display game.

The batch display device 50 according to the function distribution pattern 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating an example of the collective display device according to the second embodiment.
The collective display device 50 includes 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31. The collective display device 50 performs various status displays according to the lighting modes of the LED_00 to the LED_31.

  The collective display device 50 distributes various status display functions from LED_00 to LED_31 to thereby provide a round display section 51, a special figure 1 hold display section 52, a special figure 1 symbol display section 53, and a special figure 2 symbol display section 54a. , A general symbol display section 55a, a general symbol hold display section 56a, and a state display section 57a. The round display section 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game by the lighting mode of four LEDs from LED_00 to LED_03. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_04 and LED_05. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of the eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of ten LEDs from LED_14 to LED_23. The general symbol display unit 55a displays a symbol in the general symbol game according to a lighting mode of three LEDs from LED_24 to LED_26. The general-purpose reservation display section 56a displays the number of reservations in the general-purpose game by the lighting mode of the two LEDs LED_27 and LED_28. The state display unit 57a displays the game state in the special figure game by the lighting mode of three LEDs from LED_29 to LED_31.

  Next, a display mode of the special figure 1 and a display mode of the special figure 2 displayed by the collective display device 50 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As described with reference to FIG. 109, the collective display device 50 has 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31, and configures the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 with eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The special figure 2 symbol display section 54a is configured by ten LEDs from LED_14 to LED_23. Therefore, the number of LEDs of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is smaller than the number of LEDs of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a. In other words, the special figure 2 without the reserved memory notifies the lighting pattern and the stop pattern using more LEDs than the special figure 1 with the reserved memory.

First, a display mode of the special figure 1 displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display during a change of the special figure 1 according to the second embodiment.
The special figure 1 includes a lighting pattern and a stop pattern. The lighting pattern is a changing display mode of the special figure 1, and is represented by the lighting modes of eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting patterns of the special figure 1 include a lighting pattern 21 to a lighting pattern 28. There are multiple (up to 256) stop patterns.

  The display mode during the change of the special figure 1 is as follows: the lighting pattern 21 to the lighting pattern 22, the lighting pattern 23, the lighting pattern 24, the lighting pattern 25, the lighting pattern 26, the lighting pattern 27, the lighting pattern 27, and the updating pattern every 80 ms in this order. Transition with. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of Toku-zu 1 is 640 ms (= 80 ms × 8).

  The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 21 is “OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 22 are “OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 23 are “OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 24 are “OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 25 is “OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 26 are “OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 27 is “OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 28 are “ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13.

That is, the changing display mode of the special figure 1 has a lighting mode that does not overlap with other changing displays in all the changing displays.
In such a changing display mode of the special figure 1, the LED_06 to the LED_13 are changed from the right to the left in the lighting patterns 1 to 8 in the lighting pattern 1 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing. . In such a variation mode, all the LEDs are turned on and off at least once in one cycle (from the lighting pattern 21 to the lighting pattern 28). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect a failure or a defect of the LED in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53.

  Further, the lighting patterns 21 to 28 have a relationship in which one LED is turned on and seven LEDs are turned off, and the ratio is constant during the variable display. Therefore, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 clearly indicates that the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the special figure 1 by the lighting ratio of the LED during the variable display.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 to the player. For example, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the stop pattern of the special figure 1 for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 from the stop pattern. However, since the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the area of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 to the player in the changing display mode of the special figure 1 as described above, the player may change the display of the special figure 1 during the change. By observing the mode, it is easy to grasp the stop pattern in the area of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53.

Next, a display mode of the special figure 2 displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display during a change of the special figure 2 according to the second embodiment.
FIG. 2 includes a lighting pattern and a stop pattern. The lighting pattern is a changing display mode of the special figure 2, and is represented by a lighting mode of four LEDs from LED_14 to LED_23. The lighting patterns include a lighting pattern 21 to a lighting pattern 24. There are multiple (1024 maximum) stop patterns.

  In the changing display mode of the special figure 2, the lighting pattern 21 and the lighting pattern 22 are alternately changed at an update interval of 160 ms. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of Toku-zu 2 is 320 ms (= 160 ms × 2).

  The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 21 is “OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON” in the order of LED_14 to LED_23. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 22 are “ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27.

  The lighting pattern 21 and the lighting pattern 22 have a relationship of five LEDs to be lit and five LEDs to be turned off, and the ratio is constant during the variable display. Therefore, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a clearly indicates that the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a displays the special figure 2 by the lighting ratio of the LED during the variable display.

  That is, the changing display mode of the special figure 2 has a lighting mode in which some of the changing displays do not overlap with the other changing displays. Naturally, the changing display mode of the special figure 2 has a different lighting mode in the continuous changing display in time series. Further, the changing display mode of the special figure 2 is such that the LED_14 to the LED_23 are alternately turned on in the lighting pattern 21 and the lighting pattern 22.

In such a display mode of the special figure 2 during the change, the LED_14 to the LED_23 repeat the lighting pattern 21 and the lighting pattern 22 to notify that the special figure 2 is changing.
In addition, the special figure 2 has a larger number of LEDs used for notification as compared with the special figure 1, so that a large number of lighting patterns are prepared in accordance with the number of LEDs (for example, an LED that lights as in the special figure 1). (A lighting pattern that makes one cycle), one cycle becomes excessively long. Excessive cycles make it difficult to achieve both rapid game progress and notification to the player. Therefore, the special figure 2 shortens one cycle with a smaller number of lighting patterns as compared with the special figure 1 and increases the update interval of the lighting pattern as compared with the special figure 1 so that the game progresses rapidly and the We are aiming for compatibility with notification. In addition, the special figure 2 can have a larger number of stop patterns than the special figure 1 (the maximum number of the special figure 1 is 256, and the maximum number of the special figure 2 is 1024). The game result can be presented to the player to improve the interest. Further, from another viewpoint, since the gaming machine 10 presents various game results to the player, it is difficult to aim the game result by unfair means, and an opportunity to obtain a game value for a good player. Can be equalized.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the special figure 2 symbol display section 54a to the player. For example, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a displays the stop pattern of the special figure 2 for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a from the stop pattern. However, since the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the area of the special figure 2 symbol display section 54a to the player in the changing display mode of the special figure 2 as described above, the player may change the display of the special figure 2 during the change. By observing the mode, it is easy to grasp the stop pattern in the area of the special figure 2 symbol display section 54a.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described second embodiment has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a batch display device 50 on the front side. The collective display device 50 includes a special figure 1 symbol display section 53 (first variable display game display section) and a special figure 2 symbol display section 54a (second variable display game display section). The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays eight lighting patterns (displaying the result being derived) and stop patterns (displaying the result) of the first special figure variable display game (first variable display game) (first number). ) LED (indicating light). In addition, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a displays a result during display of the result of the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) and the result display, a lighting pattern display (display during result derivation), and a stop pattern display (result). ) Are displayed by ten (second number) LEDs (indicating lights).

  The combination of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is not limited to the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game. For example, the combination of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is the first special figure variable display game and the general figure variable display game, the second special figure variable display game and the general figure variable display game, or other variable display. It may be a combination of games.

  (2) The first variable display game display unit updates the display mode of the display during the derivation of the result of the first variable display game (display during change) at the first update interval (for example, 80 ms), and performs the second variable display. The game display unit updates the display mode of the display during derivation of the result of the second variable display game at a second update interval (for example, 160 ms) different from the first update interval.

  (3) The first variable display game display unit sequentially updates the display of the first variable display game during the derivation of the result by a third number (for example, 8 patterns), and the second variable display game display unit The display mode during the derivation of the result of the second variable display game is sequentially updated with a fourth number (for example, two patterns) different from the third number.

(4) One cycle of updating the display mode of the first variable display game is different from one cycle of updating the display mode of the second variable display game.
(5) The first variable display game is a variable display game having a hold memory, and the second variable display game is a variable display game having no hold memory.

(6) The number of stop pattern displays (result displays) in the second variable display game is larger than that in the first variable display game.
(7) The second update interval is larger than the first update interval.

  (8) The first variable display game is a sequential lighting pattern display (display during result derivation) in which three or more lighting patterns are prepared, and the second variable display game is lighting by alternate switching in which two lighting patterns are prepared. This is a pattern display (display during result derivation).

  (9) In the display during the derivation of the result of the first variable display game and the display during the derivation of the result of the second variable display game, the ratio (lighting ratio) of the number of lighted LEDs and the number of unlit LEDs is constant, respectively. The lighting ratio in the display during derivation of the result is different from the lighting ratio in the display during derivation of the second variable display game.

[Modification 1 of Second Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the function distribution of the collective display device 50.

First, a collective display device 50 according to a first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example of a collective display device according to Modification Example 1 of the second embodiment.
The collective display device 50 includes 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31. The collective display device 50 performs various status displays according to the lighting modes of the LED_00 to the LED_31.

  The collective display device 50 includes a special figure 1 symbol display section 53b, a special figure 2 symbol display section 54b, and the display section by distributing various status display functions from LED_00 to LED_31. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game by the lighting modes of the eight LEDs, LED_02 to LED_04, LED_10 to LED_12, LED_20, and LED_21. Special symbol 2 symbol display section 54a includes a LED_09 from LED_07, and LED_19 from LED_17, and LED_27, the eight LED lighting mode between LED_28, displays a symbol in the special symbol 2 game.

  Next, the changing display of the special figure 1 and the changing display of the special figure 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display during a change of the special figure 1 and a display during a change of the special figure 2 according to the first modification of the second embodiment.

  The special figure 1 symbol display section 53b displays the changing display mode of the special figure 1. In the changing display mode of the special figure 1, the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B are alternately changed at an update interval of 80 ms. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of Toku-zu 1 is 160 ms (= 80 ms × 2).

  The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting mode A are “ON, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF” for LED_02 to LED_04, LED_10 to LED_12, LED_20, and LED_21, respectively. The lighting modes of the LEDs in lighting mode B are “OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, ON” for LED_02 to LED_04, LED_10 to LED_12, LED_20, and LED_21, respectively.

  As described above, the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53b are in a relation of three LEDs to be lit and five LEDs to be turned off, and the ratio is constant during the variable display. is there. Therefore, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b clearly indicates that the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b displays the special figure 1 by the lighting ratio of the LED during the variable display.

  In addition, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b displays the changing display mode of the special figure 1. In the changing display mode of the special figure 2, the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B are alternately changed at an update interval of 80 ms. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of Toku-zu 2 is 160 ms (= 80 ms × 2).

  The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting mode A is “OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF” for LED_07 to LED_09, LED_17 to LED_19, LED_27, and LED_28, respectively. The lighting modes of the LEDs in lighting mode B are “OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF” for LED_07 to LED_09, LED_17 to LED_19, LED_27, and LED_28, respectively.

As described above, the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B have a relationship of two LEDs to be lit and six LEDs to be turned off.
As described above, the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b are in a relation of two LEDs to be lit and six LEDs to be turned off, and the ratio is constant during the variable display. is there. Therefore, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b clearly indicates that the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b displays the special figure 2 by the lighting ratio of the LED during the variable display.

  The special figure 1 symbol display section 53b and the special figure 2 symbol display section 54b are alternately lit at the boundary between the special figure 1 symbol display section 53b and the special figure 2 symbol display section 54b, so that the boundary is formed. Specify. For example, LED_02, LED_10, and LED_20 are located in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53b and adjacent to the special figure 2 symbol display section 54b, and LED_09 and LED_19 are located in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54b. It is located at a position adjacent to the special figure 1 symbol display section 53b.

  Then, when LED_02, LED_10, and LED_20 are each turned “ON”, LED_09 and LED_19 are each turned “OFF” (lighting mode A). When LED_02, LED_10, and LED_20 are each turned “OFF”, LED_09 and LED_19 are each turned “ON” (lighting mode B). Thereby, the special figure 1 symbol display section 53b and the special figure 2 symbol display section 54b clearly indicate that the special figure 1 symbol display section 53b displays the special figure 1 by the lighting mode of the LED during the variable display. 2 clearly indicates that the symbol display unit 54b displays the special figure 2.

  In such a gaming machine 10, the display mode of the collective display device 50 which tends to be cluttered can be made orderly, and the aesthetic appearance and design of the gaming machine 10 can be improved. Further, the gaming machine 10 makes the display mode of the collective display device 50 orderly, and thus reduces the fatigue when the player checks the progress of the game.

The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the above-described second embodiment has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a batch display device 50 on the front side. The collective display device 50 includes a special figure 1 symbol display section 53b (first variable display game display section) and a special figure 2 symbol display section 54b (second variable display game display section). The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays eight lighting patterns (displaying the result being derived) and stop patterns (displaying the result) of the first special figure variable display game (first variable display game) (first number). ) LED (indicating light). In addition, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b displays the result deriving display and the result display of the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) as a lighting pattern display (a result deriving display) and a stop pattern display (a result). ) Are displayed by eight (second number) LEDs (indicating lights).

  The combination of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is not limited to the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game. For example, the combination of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is the first special figure variable display game and the general figure variable display game, the second special figure variable display game and the general figure variable display game, or other variable display. It may be a combination of games.

  (2) the first variable display game display unit, results derived during the display update interval (the display in variation) the first of the first variable display games (e.g., 80 ms) and updates the display mode, the second variable display The game display unit updates the display mode of the display during the derivation of the result of the second variable display game at the same update interval as the first update interval.

  (3) The first variable display game display unit sequentially updates the display during the derivation of the result of the first variable display game by a third number (for example, two patterns), and the second variable display game display unit The display mode during the derivation of the result of the second variable display game is sequentially updated by the third number.

(4) One cycle of updating the display mode of the first variable display game is the same as one cycle of updating the display mode of the second variable display game.
(5) In the display during the derivation of the result of the first variable display game and the display during the derivation of the result of the second variable display game, the ratio (lighting ratio) of the number of lighted LEDs and the number of unlit LEDs is constant, respectively. The lighting ratio in the display during derivation of the result is different from the lighting ratio in the display during derivation of the second variable display game.

  (6) The first variable display game display section and the second variable display game display section are adjacent to each other at their respective boundary areas, and the result-in-progress display and the second variable display game at the boundary area of the first variable display game are performed. The display during the derivation of the result is in a relation of alternately lighting.

[Modification 2 of Second Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a gaming machine 10 according to a modification 2 of the second embodiment. The gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the lighting pattern in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53. A display mode of the special figure 1 displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display during a change of the special figure 1 according to the second modification of the second embodiment.

  The special figure 1 includes a lighting pattern and a stop pattern. The lighting pattern is a changing display mode of the special figure 1, and is represented by the lighting modes of eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting patterns of the special figure 1 include a lighting pattern 31 to a lighting pattern 38. There are a plurality of stop patterns (up to 256 patterns), including one stop pattern (outside) and the remaining stop pattern (other than outside). The lighting mode of the stop pattern (out) is “OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13.

  The display mode of the special figure 1 during the change is that the lighting pattern 31 to the lighting pattern 32, the lighting pattern 33, the lighting pattern 34, the lighting pattern 35, the lighting pattern 36, the lighting pattern 37, and the lighting pattern 38 are updated in the order of 80 ms. Transition with. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of Toku-zu 1 is 640 ms (= 80 ms × 8).

  The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 31 is “OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 32 is “OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 33 are “OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 34 are “OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 35 are “OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 36 are “OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 37 is “OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The LED lighting modes in the lighting pattern 38 are “ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13.

  That is, the changing display mode of the special figure 1 has a lighting mode that does not overlap with other changing displays in all the changing displays. The lighting pattern 31 is a lighting mode at the start of the change in the sequential lighting pattern display, and is common to the lighting mode of the stop pattern (out).

  As described above, by setting the lighting pattern 31 that is common to the lighting pattern of the stop pattern (outlier) as the lighting mode at the start of the fluctuation, the gaming machine 10 is able to remove the continuity from the frequently occurring stop pattern (outlier). Variation display can be performed in a certain lighting mode. Further, the gaming machine 10 facilitates well-known to the player's stop pattern (off).

  In the sequential lighting pattern display, the lighting mode at the start of the change is the lighting mode that is used most frequently. In general, the lighting mode of the stop pattern (outlier) is also the lighting mode most frequently used among the stop patterns. Such a frequently used lighting mode can be expected to be a frequently failed lighting mode. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily find a failure or a defect of the LED that displays the stop pattern (out).

The gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the above-described second embodiment has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a batch display device 50 on the front side. The collective display device 50 includes a special figure 1 symbol display section 53 (variable display game display section). The special figure 1 symbol display section 53 displays a predetermined number of lighting pattern displays (displays during the derivation of results) of the first special figure variable display game (first variable display game) while sequentially updating them. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 sets the lighting mode at the start of fluctuation in the lighting pattern display to be the same lighting mode as the stop pattern display (result display) that is used most frequently.

[Modification 3 of Second Embodiment]
Next, a description is given of a gaming machine 10 according to a third modification of the second embodiment. The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the second embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in the lighting mode of the stop pattern (out). The display mode of the special figure 1 displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display during a change of the special figure 1 according to the third modification of the second embodiment.

  The special figure 1 includes a lighting pattern and a stop pattern. The lighting pattern is a changing display mode of the special figure 1, and is represented by the lighting modes of eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting patterns of the special figure 1 include a lighting pattern 41 to a lighting pattern 48. There are a plurality of stop patterns (up to 256 patterns), including one stop pattern (outside) and the remaining stop pattern (other than outside). The lighting mode of the stop pattern (out) is “ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13.

  The changing display mode of the special figure 1 is as follows: the lighting pattern 41 to the lighting pattern 42, the lighting pattern 43, the lighting pattern 44, the lighting pattern 45, the lighting pattern 46, the lighting pattern 47, and the lighting pattern 48 in the order of the lighting pattern 41 to the lighting pattern 42. Transition with. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of Toku-zu 1 is 640 ms (= 80 ms × 8).

  The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 41 are “OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 42 are “OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 43 are “OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 44 are “OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 45 are “OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 46 are “OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 47 is “OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 48 are “ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13.

  That is, the changing display mode of the special figure 1 has a lighting mode that does not overlap with other changing displays in all the changing displays. The lighting pattern 48 is a lighting mode at the start of the change in the sequential lighting pattern display, and is common to the lighting mode of the stop pattern (out).

  As described above, the lighting pattern 48 that is common to the lighting pattern of the stop pattern (outlier) is a lighting mode other than the start of the fluctuation, and is preferably a lighting mode that is updated at the farthest timing from the start of the fluctuation.

  The lighting mode at the start of the change in the sequential lighting pattern display is the lighting mode most frequently used during the change. In general, the lighting mode of the stop pattern (outlier) is the lighting mode that is most frequently used among the stop patterns. By changing the lighting mode most frequently used and the lighting mode most frequently used among the stop patterns during such fluctuations, the gaming machine 10 is overloaded with a specific LED and breaks down early. To prevent that.

The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the above-described second embodiment has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a batch display device 50 on the front side. The collective display device 50 includes a special figure 1 symbol display section 53 (variable display game display section). The special figure 1 symbol display section 53 displays a predetermined number of lighting pattern displays (displays during the derivation of results) of the first special figure variable display game (first variable display game) while sequentially updating them. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 sets the lighting mode at the start of fluctuation in the lighting pattern display to be different from the stop pattern display (result display) that is used most frequently.

  (2) The gaming machine 10 sets the most frequently used stop pattern display (result display) in the lighting mode in which the lighting pattern display is updated at the furthest timing from the start of the fluctuation.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, a light emitting unit performs alerting to a player and a game effect. First, the arrangement of the light emitting units on the front side of gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a view illustrating an example of an arrangement of light emitting units in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 includes light emitting units L00 to L0B on the front frame 12. The light emitting units L00 to L0B are arranged in an arc on the front frame 12 so as to surround the game board 30. That is, the light emitting units L00 to L0B constitute a first arc light emitting group arranged in an arc on the outer edge side of the game board 30.

  The light emitting units L00 to L05 are provided on the front frame 12. Specifically, the light emitting units L00 to L0B are provided on the frame decoration device 18 on the left side of the glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15, and the light emitting units L06 to L0B are provided on the frame decoration device 18 on the right side of the front frame 12. . The light-emitting units L00 to L0B can emit light by sequentially switching a plurality of emission colors, and are, for example, full-color LEDs. In addition, the light emitting units L00 to L0B may include a lamp for notification (for example, notification of abnormality in payout) provided at a predetermined portion. In other words, the light-emitting units L00 to L0B are components of the front frame (main body frame) 12 that can support game boards 30 of different game models. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 controls the light emitting units L00 to L0B in a common light emitting mode independent of the game model, and implements a common notification mode in different game models using the light emitting units L00 to L0B.

  The gaming machine 10 includes light emitting units L10 to L17 on the gaming board 30. The light emitting units L10 to L17 are arranged in an arc on the game board 30 so as to surround the display device 41. That is, the light emitting units L10 to L17 constitute a second arc light emitting group arranged in an arc on the inner edge side of the game board 30. The light-emitting units L10 to L17 are provided, for example, in one or two or more of game board components such as the center case 40, the board rendering device 44, the normal variation winning device 37, the special variation winning device 38, and the like. The light-emitting units L10 to L17 can emit light by sequentially switching a plurality of emission colors, and are, for example, full-color LEDs.

  That is, the light emitting units L10 to L17 are components of the game board 30 depending on the game model. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 controls the light emitting units L10 to L17 in a light emitting mode unique to the game machine, and realizes a notification mode unique to the game machine using the light emitting units L10 to L17.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an option setting unit 25 located on the upper plate 21, and the option setting unit 25 also includes a plurality of light emitting units. These light emitting units are arranged in an arc on the option setting unit 25. That is, the plurality of light emitting units arranged in an arc shape in the option setting unit 25 constitute a third arc light emitting group. The light emitting unit of the option setting unit 25 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 has a game area including a left game area in which a game ball can flow down on the left side of the display device 41 and a right game area in which a game ball can flow down on the right side of the display apparatus 41. Form. The gaming machine 10 has a normal fluctuation prize device 37 that can expect a larger prize opportunity when a game ball flows down the left game region, and a special fluctuation prize device that can expect a larger prize opportunity when a game ball flows down the right game region. 38. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 may require the player to strike left or right to strike a game ball in the left game area or right to strike the game ball in the right game area in accordance with the gaming state. The first arc-shaped light emitting group, the second arc-shaped light-emitting group, and the third arc-shaped light-emitting group are arranged in an arc shape when viewed from the front side, thereby enabling separate guidance according to the light emission mode. The separate guidance according to the light emission mode will be described later.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 can perform a separate operation by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation unit 24. The first arc-shaped light emitting group, the second arc-shaped light emitting group, and the third arc-shaped light emitting group are arranged such that the light emitting units are arranged in an arc shape corresponding to the rotating direction of the operation unit 24, so that the player can perform a separate guidance with respect to the punching guidance. Improving the feeling effect. Note that the arc-shaped arrangement of the light emitting units includes an annular arrangement and a spiral arrangement of the light emitting units.

  Note that the option setting unit 25 is an example of an operation receiving unit that receives a player's operation, and the operation receiving unit having the third arc-shaped light emitting group is not limited to the option setting unit 25, but may be the operation unit 24 or the like. Is also good.

Next, the light emitting unit of the option setting unit 25 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating an example of the arrangement of the light emitting units in the option setting unit according to the third embodiment.
The option setting unit 25 includes push button LEDs 250 to 258, touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8, and a push button SW. Each of the push button LEDs 250 to 258 is a full-color LED. The touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8 can detect a player's touch operation. The push button SW can detect a pressing operation of the option setting unit 25.

  Here, the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b are signals detected by a combination of the detection signals of the touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8 and the push button SW. For example, the state in which the touch sensor TSW1 or the touch sensor TSW6 detects the touch operation at the left and right positions corresponding to the selection operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 is the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. Equivalent to. The state where the touch sensor TSW4 detects the touch operation at the center position corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b. Hereinafter, in the third embodiment, the option setting unit 25 is referred to as a push button or a PB (Push Button).

  The push button 25 has a columnar shape that has a substantially circular top surface when the player looks down. The push button 25 has nine small circle portions about the size of a fingertip on its upper surface, and a push button LED is arranged in each small circle portion. The push button 25 has a push button LED 250 disposed at a small circle located at the center of the upper surface, and push buttons LED 251 to 258 located at eight small circles located on the circumference surrounding the small circle located at the center. Place. That is, the push button LEDs 251 to 258 constitute a third arc light emitting group arranged in an arc on the inner edge side of the push button 25. The third arc-shaped light-emitting group is an embodiment of a ring-shaped light-emitting group in which the push button LEDs 251 to 258 are arranged in a ring.

  In addition, since the touch sensor is not arranged in the small circle portion where the push button LED 258 is arranged, the small circle portion can be a home position when the player operates the eight touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8. When the push button 25 is located at the center of the gaming machine 10 and the operation unit 24 is located on the right side, the small circle where the push button LED 258 is arranged is located on the near left side when viewed from the player side, It is easy to handle the small circle portion 258 as a home position.

  Further, since the small circle portion on which the push button LED 258 is arranged does not have a touch sensor, it has a star-shaped polygonal design so as to be easily distinguished from the small circle portion on which the touch sensor is arranged.

  Next, light emission modes of the first to third arc-shaped light emitting groups will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the emission color of each light-emitting portion will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a diagram illustrating an example of a light emission color of the light emitting unit according to the third embodiment.

  Each of the light-emitting units (light-emitting units L00 to L0B, L10 to L17, and push-button LEDs 251 to 258) can be switched and displayed in seven color patterns CP1 to CP7. For example, emission colors “red”, “orange”, “yellow”, “green”, “blue”, “blue”, and “purple” are assigned to the color patterns CP1 to CP7, respectively. Each light emitting unit can perform a so-called rainbow display effect by sequentially switching the color patterns CP1 to CP7. The rainbow display effect is a light emission mode in which the light emission colors are sequentially switched between red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. For example, it is used in a scene that produces a relatively large sense of expectation. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can perform a jackpot notification or a jackpot notice by the rainbow display effect.

  In addition, although the seven colors are sequentially switched as an example of the rainbow color display effect, the color number may be sequentially switched between six colors or less, or eight colors or more. Also, as an example of the rainbow display effect, the emission colors “red”, “orange”, “yellow”, “green”, “blue”, “indigo”, and “purple” are sequentially switched. , A combination other than the colors exemplified above, such as using “light blue”, may be used.

Next, the rainbow display effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating an example of a rainbow-color display effect in the first arc-shaped light emitting group of the third embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 emits light of the colors “red”, “orange”, “yellow”, “green”, “blue”, “blue”, and “purple” for each of the light-emitting portions L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light-emitting group). By switching the seven colors sequentially and changing the emission color according to the positions of the light emitting units L00 to L0B, it is possible to produce an effect such that the rainbow display moves. The gaming machine 10 switches the display colors of the light emitting units L00 to L0B such that the rainbow display moves from the light emitting unit arranged on the upper side to the light emitting unit arranged on the lower side. With such a display, the gaming machine 10 can produce an extremely large sense of expectation relative to the player.

  Next, the display color switching timing of the rainbow display effect shown in FIG. 119 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display color switching timing of the rainbow display effect in the first arc-shaped light emitting group of the third embodiment.

  The light-emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light-emitting group) perform rainbow display effects by switching and displaying the color patterns CP1 to CP7 at predetermined time intervals. For example, the light emitting units L05 and L06 display the color pattern CP1 at the timing t0, switch to the color pattern CP2 at the timing t1, switch to the color pattern CP3 at the timing t2, and switch to the color pattern CP4 at the timing t3. Then, the display is switched to the color pattern CP5 at the timing t4, the display is switched to the color pattern CP6 at the timing t5, and the display is switched to the color pattern CP7 at the timing t6. Thereafter, the light emitting units L05 and L06 return to the timing t0 and switch and display the color pattern CP1. In this manner, the light emitting units L00 to L0B switch and display the color patterns CP1 to CP7 at predetermined time intervals.

  At timing t0, the light emitting units L05 and L06 display the color pattern CP1, the light emitting units L04 and L07 display the color pattern CP7, the light emitting units L03 and L08 display the color pattern CP6, and the light emitting units L02 and L09. Displays the color pattern CP5, the light-emitting portions L01 and L0A display the color pattern CP4, and the light-emitting portions L00 and L0B display the color pattern CP3. In this way, the light-emitting portions L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light-emitting group) move the rainbow display from the light-emitting portions L05 and L06 arranged on the upper side to the light-emitting portions L00 and L0B arranged on the lower side. The display color can be switched as follows.

  In addition, although the rainbow color display moving from the light emitting unit arranged on the upper side to the light emitting unit arranged on the lower side is described as an example, the light emitting unit arranged on the lower side is changed to the light emitting unit arranged on the upper side. An iridescent display that moves toward the display or an iridescent display that does not move may be used.

  Next, the state notification during the rainbow display effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state notification during a rainbow display effect in the first arc-shaped light emitting group of the third embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 has a rainbow color from one side of the light-emitting units L00 to L0B arranged in an arc toward the other side according to the emission colors of the light-emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light-emitting group) and the switching timing of the emission colors. The display color can be switched so that the display moves.

  For example, as shown in (1), the gaming machine 10 includes a light emitting unit L00 located on one side of the light emitting units L00 to L0B arranged in an arc shape, a light emitting unit L01, and a light emitting unit L02 located on the other side in this order. The display color can be switched so that the rainbow display moves clockwise to L0B. Such rainbow display is called clockwise rainbow display for convenience.

  Further, as shown in (2), the gaming machine 10 includes, in order from the light emitting unit L0B located on one side of the light emitting units L00 to L0B arranged in an arc, the light emitting unit L0A and the light emitting unit L09 on the other side. The display color can be switched so that the rainbow display moves counterclockwise until L00. Such an iridescent display is referred to as a counterclockwise iridescent display for convenience.

  Such a gaming machine 10 can perform a state notification by a clockwise rainbow color display or a counterclockwise rainbow color display while performing a jackpot notification or a jackpot notice by a rainbow display effect. For example, the gaming machine 10 can simultaneously perform the big hit notification and the right-handed guidance by associating the clockwise rainbow color display with the right-handed guidance. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can simultaneously perform the big hit notification and the left-hand guidance by associating the counterclockwise rainbow color display with the left-hand guidance.

  Next, the display color switching timing of the clockwise rainbow color display and the display color switching timing of the counterclockwise rainbow color display shown in FIG. 121 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display color switching timing of the clockwise rainbow color display and the display color switching timing of the counterclockwise rainbow color display in the first arc-shaped light emitting group of the third embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 realizes clockwise rainbow display by switching and displaying the color patterns CP1 to CP7 at predetermined time intervals by the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) as shown in (1). .

  As described with reference to FIG. 120, the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) switch and display the color patterns CP1 to CP7 at predetermined time intervals. As a result, each of the light emitting units L00 to L0B performs a jackpot notification by a rainbow-color display effect or a jackpot notice.

  Further, at timing t0, the light emitting unit L00 displays the color pattern CP1, and the light emitting unit L01 adjacent to the right side of the light emitting unit L00 displays the color pattern CP7. Further, at timing t1, the light emitting unit L00 displays the color pattern CP2, and the light emitting unit L01 adjacent to the light emitting unit L00 in the right direction displays the color pattern CP1. As described above, the light emitting unit L01 adjacent to the light emitting unit L00 in the right direction displays the color pattern displayed by the light emitting unit L00 at the timing immediately before. Similarly, the gaming machine 10 realizes a clockwise rainbow display in which the rainbow display effect in the light emitting units L00 to L0B appears to move clockwise.

  In the gaming machine 10, the light emitting units L00 to L0B (the first arc-shaped light emitting group) switch and display the color patterns CP1 to CP7 at predetermined time intervals as shown in (2), thereby displaying a counterclockwise rainbow color display. To achieve.

  As described with reference to FIG. 120, the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) switch and display the color patterns CP1 to CP7 at predetermined time intervals. As a result, each of the light emitting units L00 to L0B performs a jackpot notification by a rainbow-color display effect or a jackpot notice.

  Further, at the timing t0, the light emitting unit L00 displays the color pattern CP1, and the light emitting unit L01 adjacent to the right side of the light emitting unit L00 displays the color pattern CP2. Further, at timing t1, the light emitting unit L00 displays the color pattern CP2, and the light emitting unit L01 adjacent to the light emitting unit L00 in the right direction displays the color pattern CP3. As described above, the light emitting unit L01 adjacent to the light emitting unit L00 in the rightward direction first displays the color pattern that the light emitting unit L00 will display at the next timing. Similarly, the gaming machine 10, iridescent display effect in the light emitting portion L00~L0B realizes the counterclockwise iridescence display appears to move in a counterclockwise direction.

  The clockwise rainbow color display and the counterclockwise rainbow color display by the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) have been described above. Next, clockwise rainbow color display and counterclockwise rainbow color display by the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state notification during a rainbow-color display effect in the second arc-shaped light emitting group according to the third embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 has a rainbow color from one side of the light emitting units L10 to L17 arranged in an arc toward the other side according to the emission colors of the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emission group) and the timing of switching the emission colors. The display color can be switched so that the display moves.

  For example, as shown in (1), the gaming machine 10 includes a light emitting unit L10 located on one side of the light emitting units L10 to L17 arranged in an arc, a light emitting unit L11, and a light emitting unit L12 located on the other side in this order. The display color can be switched so that the rainbow display moves clockwise to L17 (clockwise rainbow display).

  Further, as shown in (2), the gaming machine 10 includes the light emitting units L17 located on one side of the light emitting units L10 to L17 arranged in an arc, the light emitting unit L16, and the light emitting unit L15 located on the other side in the order of the light emitting unit L15. The display color can be switched so that the rainbow display moves counterclockwise to L10 (counterclockwise rainbow display).

  Such a gaming machine 10 can perform a state notification by a clockwise rainbow color display or a counterclockwise rainbow color display while performing a jackpot notification or a jackpot notice by a rainbow display effect. For example, the gaming machine 10 can simultaneously perform the big hit notification and the right-handed guidance by associating the clockwise rainbow color display with the right-handed guidance. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can simultaneously perform the big hit notification and the left-hand guidance by associating the counterclockwise rainbow color display with the left-hand guidance.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform a rainbow display effect using the push button 25. Next, the clockwise rainbow color display and the counterclockwise rainbow color display by the push button LEDs 251 to 258 (third arc-shaped light emitting group) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 124 is a diagram showing an example of a state notification in rainbow display effect of the third arc light emission group of the third embodiment.

  As shown in (1), the gaming machine 10 controls the emission colors of the push button LEDs 251 to 258 (third arc-shaped light emitting group) and the switching timing of the emission colors so that the iridescent colors of the push button LEDs 251 to 258 arranged in a ring form. The display color can be switched so that the display moves clockwise (clockwise rainbow display).

  Further, the gaming machine 10, as shown in (2), by a switching timing of the emission color and emission color of the push button LED251～258 (third arc light emission group), in a push button LED251～258 which are cyclic array The display color can be switched so that the rainbow display moves counterclockwise (counterclockwise rainbow display).

  Such a gaming machine 10 can perform a state notification by a clockwise rainbow color display or a counterclockwise rainbow color display while performing a jackpot notification or a jackpot notice by a rainbow display effect. For example, the gaming machine 10 can simultaneously perform the big hit notification and the right-handed guidance by associating the clockwise rainbow color display with the right-handed guidance. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can simultaneously perform the big hit notification and the left-hand guidance by associating the counterclockwise rainbow color display with the left-hand guidance.

  In addition, two or more arc-shaped light emitting groups among the first arc-shaped light-emitting group, the second arc-shaped light-emitting group, and the third arc-shaped light-emitting group are synchronized with each other in a clockwise rainbow color display or a counterclockwise rainbow color display. Information can be given. For example, the display colors of the first arc-shaped light-emitting group and the second arc-shaped light-emitting group can be switched at the same timing so that the rainbow display moves from the light-emitting units L00 and L10 located on one side. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can obtain a larger notification effect than the notification by one arc-shaped light emitting group. In this case, in order to make the moving cycle of the rainbow display of the first arc-shaped light emitting group and the second arc-shaped light emitting group uniform, each of the gaming machines 10 emits light in the first arc-shaped light emitting group and the second arc-shaped light emitting group. The timing of switching the emission color in the unit may be different.

  Note that the first arc-shaped light emitting group, the second arc-shaped light emitting group, and the third arc-shaped light emitting group independently perform status notification by clockwise rainbow display or counterclockwise rainbow display. Good. For example, the first arc-shaped light emitting group, the second arc-shaped light emitting group, and the third arc-shaped light emitting group may perform a big hit value notification by a clockwise rainbow color display or a counterclockwise rainbow color display. . For example, the first arc-shaped light-emitting group reports the number of rounds, the second arc-shaped light-emitting group reports the presence or absence of a probability change, and the third arc-shaped light-emitting group reports the presence or absence of the ordinary power support. As described above, the gaming machine 10 aims to improve the notification effect by notifying the gaming state by a combination of the display modes of the first arc-shaped light emitting group, the second arc-shaped light emitting group, and the third arc-shaped light emitting group. At the same time, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, control of the effect control device 300 will be described. The special figure controlled by the effect control device 300 is a special effect figure displayed on the display device 41, and the special figure in the following description of the control processing of the effect control device 300 is the special figure for the effect. (Decorative design that is not this special map). Further, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described as a third embodiment, but the same applies to the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

[Main processing]
First, the main process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the main process in the effect control device of the third embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit prohibits the interruption.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initialization of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs an initial setting of the VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits interruption.

  [Step D15] The control unit permits display data generation. That is, the control unit permits a display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access a VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

  [Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is, for example, processing for setting the generated sequence of pseudo-random numbers using srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument to be given to the srand function, or use a value created based on an ID value of a CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine. May be.

  [Step D17] The control unit initializes an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, the RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags to be described later in control processing of the effect control apparatus 300)). Save the initial value at power-on in).

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT.
[Step D19] The control unit executes an effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for performing editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and decision button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at a high speed, the control unit may perform the process of sensing the input of the effect button in the effect button input process, or may execute the process in a short period timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

  [Step D20] The control unit executes a hall / player setting mode process. The hall / player setting mode process is a process of setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41, and accepting an operation by the player to change the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 and the like.

  [Step D21] The control unit executes a random number update process. The random number update process is a process of updating a pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main process using a rand function, for example. Since the rand function generates a random number each time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain a random number only by executing the rand function. Note that a counter that increments by “1” like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process. The received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D23] The control unit performs an effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw on the display device 41 and parameters thereof. For example, the control unit sets the commands in a table form in the effect display editing process.

  [Step D24] The control unit executes drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is processing for setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing processing has been completed.

  [Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is a frame switching timing, and if it is a frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26, and if not a frame switching timing, waits for a frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 sec ≒ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 sec) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sync interrupt). It is the timing of arrival at the target interval. Note that the V blank interrupt is generated each time one scan of the entire screen for drawing by the VDP 312 is completed. The generation cycle of the V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second as described above. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, frame switching is performed, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 seconds ≒ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or 1/30 second or less. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

  By the frame switching timing determination process, the subsequent processes (Steps D26 to D31 and the subsequent Steps D18 to D24) are executed at the frame switching timing in each of the processing cycles. The time management that must be synchronized with effect contents is performed in the frame (i.e., the processing cycle units). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, it becomes 100 ms in three frames. This is similar to the case where the main board (game control device) manages the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

  [Step D26] The control unit instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen according to the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table form and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

  [Step D27] The control unit executes a sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of sound from speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes decoration control processing. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like.
[Step D29] The control unit executes a movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process of controlling a movable body including various motors and SOL (solenoid) (for example, the board effect device 44).

  [Step D30] The control unit executes a launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and according to the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure changes per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, for a predetermined number of balls to be lent)). This is a process for correcting the mode of the effect.

  After executing Step D30, the control unit returns to Step D18, and thereafter repeats the processing of Step D18 to Step D30. That is, Steps D18 to D30 constitute a loop process (may be referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed in the above processing cycle after the activation of the effect control device 300.

  Note that the control unit executes the processing of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the effect of the screen, but the signals and data generated or set by these control processings (particularly, various LEDs and motors are controlled). The process of actually outputting the drive control signal to the port is performed in a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there may be a case where only a command is issued by serial communication or the like and a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, the received command check processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the received command check processing in the effect control device of the third embodiment. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

  The reception command (production command) has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the production control device (main board) 100 transmits the production command to the production control device 300. Are sequentially transmitted. Hereinafter, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

  The process of receiving a command from the main board is performed by a "command reception interrupt process" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed in a hardware manner (by the function of the CPU itself), and when a command is completely received, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified, so that the serial reception is performed. It is only necessary to take out the command from the buffer, but in the above “command reception interrupt processing”, every time there is a command reception interrupt, load the command from the serial reception buffer, check whether there is any abnormality in the loaded command data, and The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by “1” by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, (hereinafter the same) is to mean that readably stores stored in a predetermined storage area for use in controlling subsequent processing when simply referred to as "stores". The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is configured by, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311a (or the RAM 322) of the CPU 311. It is sufficient that the capacity of the command buffer is equal to or larger than the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the processing cycle described above; for example, 1/30 second).

  [Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of received commands. The command reception counter is set in RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in step D43 in principle, the command reception counter stores the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (the time corresponding to one processing cycle described above).

  [Step D42] The control unit determines whether or not the number of command receptions is “0 (zero)”. If the number of command receptions is not “0”, the control unit proceeds to step D43. If there is, the received command check processing ends. In the present application, "loading" data in the control processing as in step D41 means extracting data from the RAM (the RAM 322 or the RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of the present example).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of received commands.
Assuming that A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after the execution of step D41. Then, immediately after the execution of step D43, “A = AB = 0” is a normal movement. However, in the embodiment of the present example, the effect control device 300 interrupts the command reception from the game control device (main board) 100. Is given the highest priority without interrupt prohibition, the value of A may increase between the processing in step D41 and the processing in step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the count of the command is shifted, so that the subtraction process of “AB” is performed in step D43. I am doing it. However, when serial communication is used to transmit and receive commands from the main board as in the present embodiment, interrupts are prohibited and the value of A does not increase during the processing from step D41 to step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to “A ← 0”.

  [Step D44] The control unit stores the contents of the reception command buffer (corresponding to a command buffer, hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a command buffer) (that is, command data stored at an address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to a command area (sometimes called a command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in the RAM 322 or the RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO (first-in first-out) buffer.

  [Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the control unit updates the value of the command read index, which is the read pointer of the command buffer, by, for example, “1” in the range of “0” to “31”. Do it. Note that the range from “0” to “31” corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, “32”).

  [Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not step D44 and step D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to Step D47 when copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to Step D44 when copying is not completed.

  [Step D47] The control unit loads (ie, reads) the contents of the command area (the data stored first, of the data that has not been read in the command area, that is, the data to be read next). I do.

  [Step D48] The control unit executes a received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process of analyzing data of a loaded command (hereinafter, this command). The received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the next data to be read).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (that is, whether or not steps D47 to D49 are repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to Step D47 when the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed, and ends the received command check processing when the analysis is completed.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the reception command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the received command analysis processing in the effect control device of the third embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

  [Step D51] The control unit separates and stores the upper byte of MODE and the lower byte of ACT of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process. Note that, in the case of a command of a variation system instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, upper byte data stored as MODE instructs a first half variation pattern, and lower byte data stored as ACT instructs a second half variation pattern. Things.

  [Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of the MODE separated in step D51 is within a normal range. The control section proceeds to Step D53 when the value of MODE is within the normal range, and ends the received command analysis processing when the value of MODE is not within the normal range. Note that some MODE values are not defined and are not used, and if such values are not used, it is determined in step D52 that the value is not within the normal range.

  [Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within a normal range. The control unit proceeds to Step D54 when the value of ACT is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis processing when the value of ACT is not in the normal range.

  The determination in step D53 as to whether the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range is performed, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper and lower limits of the effective value of the ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and are separated into the upper and lower limits in step D53. It is checked whether the value of the obtained ACT is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined that the value is within the normal range (at this point, the missing tooth check described later has not been performed).

  [Step D54] control unit determines whether the value of the separated ACT to separation value of MODE is the correct combination. The control section proceeds to Step D55 when the value of ACT is a correct combination, and ends the received command analysis processing when the value is not a correct combination. The determination as to whether or not the ACT value is a correct combination can be made using, for example, a match check table. The match check table is a table in which all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the start address, and are provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in the match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, the combination is correct. It can be determined that they are not a combination.

  The determination as to whether or not the value of ACT is a correct combination is executed including a missing check of whether or not the combination of ACT is normal with respect to MODE. For one MODE, there are a plurality of valid ACTs, but their values are not always continuous (that is, some values do not exist discontinuously and some values are missing). Is checked to see if it is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is checked one by one whether they match.

  [Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes the variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. .

  Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 described later). Further, a variation command (also referred to as a variation command or a variation pattern command) is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, and a range in which data of the variation command can be taken is a variation command range.

  [Step D57] The control unit determines whether the MODE data is within the jackpot-related command range. When the MODE data is within the big hit command range, the control unit executes the big hit command processing (details omitted) (step D58). When the MODE data is not within the big hit command range, the control unit proceeds to step D59. . The jackpot-related command is a command for instructing an operation (such as display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to the effect during the jackpot, and the range of data of the jackpot-related command is the jackpot-related command range.

  [Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol-related command range. The control unit executes the symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol command range. . A symbol-type command (also referred to as a symbol command or a decorative special command) is a command for instructing information on a symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to stop the special symbol). range data can be taken of a symbol system command range.

  [Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the one-shot command range. The controller executes the one-shot command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the one-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the one-shot command range. . Note that, unlike a command that has a meaning by a combination such as a symbol command and a variable command, a command that is established independently is called a single-shot command. The single command (sometimes called a single command) includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. The range that the data of this single command can take is a single command range.

  [Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range. When the MODE data is within the pre-reading symbol command range, the control unit executes the pre-reading symbol command processing (details omitted) (step D64). When the MODE data is not within the pre-reading symbol command range, the control unit performs step S64. Proceed to D65.

  [Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the prefetch variation command range. The control unit executes the prefetch variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the prefetch variable command range (step D66), and receives when the MODE data is not within the prefetch variable command range. The command analysis processing ends. Note that the pre-reading design-related command and the pre-reading variation command are commands for a pre-reading effect.

  Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to a start winning prize memory in which the variable display game of a special figure has not been executed (holding the start prize memory or simply holding). In order to notify the player in advance of whether or not a big hit will occur (or what kind of fluctuation pattern will occur) when the game is subsequently executed with a predetermined degree of reliability, a display of suspension of the start winning prize memory or the like is performed in a manner different from the usual manner. And so on. The pre-reading commands (pre-reading fluctuation-related commands and pre-reading design-related commands) are commands for informing in advance of a fluctuation pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to suspension of a start winning prize memory to be subjected to a pre-reading effect. It is transmitted from control device 100 to effect control device 300. It should be noted that ordinary variable commands and symbol commands that are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

(Decoration control processing)
Next, the decoration control processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the decoration control process in the effect control device of the third embodiment. The decoration control process is a process executed by the control unit in step D28 of the main process.

  [Step D71] The control unit executes a test mode decoration process. The test mode decoration process is a process of setting a decoration pattern for checking whether a decoration device such as an LED provided in the gaming machine 10 normally lights with a predetermined decoration pattern. The control unit executes the test mode decoration processing when the gaming machine 10 is activated in the test mode, and does not execute the test mode decoration processing when the gaming machine 10 is activated in the normal mode.

  [Step D72] The control unit executes an error decoration process. The control unit executes the decoration process at the time of error when the effect control device 300 receives the command related to the error from the game control device 100, and does not execute the decoration process at the time of error when the command related to the error is not received. The decoration process at the time of error is a process of setting a decoration pattern for notifying a player or an employee of a game hall that an error has occurred.

  [Step D73] The control unit executes a decoration setting process. The decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern according to a game state. The decoration setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D74] The control unit executes an event decoration setting process. The event decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern according to a predetermined event when the event occurs. The predetermined event is, for example, when the push button 25 is operated. The event decoration setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D75] The control unit executes decorative pattern control data setting processing. The decoration pattern control data setting process is a process of setting control data to be transmitted to each of the effect devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18), and sets control data according to the decoration pattern set in steps D71 to D74. I do. After executing the decoration pattern control data setting processing, the control unit ends the decoration control processing.

[Decoration setting processing]
Next, the decoration setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the decoration setting process in the effect control device of the third embodiment. The decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the decoration control process.

  [Step D81] The control unit branches the process according to the gaming state. The control unit proceeds to Step D82 when the gaming state is “power-on”, proceeds to Step D84 when the gaming state is “power recovery”, and proceeds to Step D86 when the gaming state is “waiting for customer”, When the gaming state is “changing”, the process proceeds to step D88. When the gaming state is “symbol stopped”, the process proceeds to step D89. When the gaming state is “fanfare”, the process proceeds to step D90. When the game state is “rounding”, the process proceeds to step D91, and when the gaming state is “ending”, the process proceeds to step D92.

[Step D82] The control unit sets the decorative pattern in a loop setting. Note that the loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decorative pattern.
[Step D83] The control unit sets a power-on decoration pattern from power-on to a state in which a game can be played (waiting for a customer (state)). As a result, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly performs the decoration display corresponding to the power-on until the gaming machine 10 is in a playable state. After setting the power-on decoration pattern, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D84] The control unit sets the decorative pattern in a loop setting.
[Step D85] The control unit sets a power failure restoration decoration pattern until the game can be played (waiting for a customer (state)) after the power failure is restored. As a result, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly performs the decoration display corresponding to the restoration from the power failure until the gaming machine 10 is in a playable state. After setting the power failure restoration decoration pattern, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D86] The control unit sets the decorative pattern to a loop setting.
[Step D87] The controller executes a customer waiting demonstration decoration setting process while waiting for the customer (state). The control unit sets a decoration pattern corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration in the customer waiting demonstration decoration setting process. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 performs a decoration display corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration while waiting for the customer. After performing the customer waiting demonstration decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

  [Step D88] The control unit executes the changing decoration setting process when the gaming state is “changing”, that is, while the changing display game is running. In the changing decoration setting process, the control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, a rainbow including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display in the case of including a jackpot notice) corresponding to an effect mode of the running variable display game. Color display). Thus, while the variable display game is being executed, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display corresponding to the effect mode of the variable display game being executed. After executing the changing decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

  [Step D89] The control unit executes the symbol stop decoration setting process when the gaming state is “symbol stopped”, that is, when the identification symbol in the variable display game is stopped. The control unit sets a decoration pattern indicating that the identification symbol is being stopped in the decoration stopped decoration setting process. Thus, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the identification symbol is stopped while the identification symbol is stopped. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the symbol-stopped decoration setting process.

  [Step D90] The control unit executes the fanfare decoration setting process when the gaming state is “fanfare”, that is, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit. The control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, a rainbow display including a clockwise rainbow display and a counterclockwise rainbow display) indicating that the result of the variable display game has been a big hit in the fanfare decoration setting processing. . As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the result of the variable display game has been a big hit during the fanfare. After executing the decoration setting process during fanfare, the control unit ends the decoration setting process. The gaming machine 10 performs the decoration display with the decoration pattern set in the fanfare decoration setting process until the big hit state is started. Details of the fanfare decoration setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D91] The control unit executes a round decoration setting process when the game state is “round”, that is, when each round in the big hit state is being executed. The control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, a rainbow color display including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display) indicating that a round is being performed in the round decoration setting process. Thereby, during the round, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the round is being performed. After executing the decoration setting process during the round, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

  [Step D92] The control unit executes the ending decoration setting process when the gaming state is “ending”, that is, when the ending process indicating that the big hit state has ended is being executed. In the ending decoration setting process, the control unit sets a decoration pattern indicating that the ending is being performed (for example, a rainbow display including a clockwise rainbow display and a counterclockwise rainbow display). As a result, during the ending, the gaming machine 10 performs a decoration display indicating that the ending is being performed. After executing the ending decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Fanfare interior decoration setting processing]
Next, the fanfare decoration setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a view showing a flowchart of the fanfare decoration setting process in the effect control device of the third embodiment. The fanfare decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D90 of the decoration setting process. In the decorative pattern in the fanfare, the first half has a rainbow color display, and the second half has a clockwise rainbow color display or a counterclockwise rainbow color display.

  [Step D101] The control unit branches the process in accordance with a timer value indicating a lapse of time during the fanfare. The control unit proceeds to Step D102 when the timer value indicates “first half of the fanfare”, and proceeds to Step D103 when the timer value indicates “second half of the fanfare”.

  [Step D102] When the timer value indicates “first half of the fanfare”, the control unit executes a fanfare first half decoration setting process. In the first half decoration setting process of the fanfare, the control unit sets a rainbow color display (for example, a rainbow color display effect shown in FIG. 118) as a decoration pattern indicating that the result of the variable display game has been a big hit. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the result of the variable display game has been a big hit in the first half of the fanfare. After executing the fanfare first-half decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare-in-decoration decoration setting process.

  [Step D103] The control unit determines whether the hitting direction guidance after the start of the big hit state is left, that is, left or right. The control unit proceeds to step D104 when the hitting direction guidance after the start of the big hit state is left, and proceeds to step D105 when the hitting direction guidance after the start of the big hit state is not left. In addition, the hitting direction guidance is a distinction guide of left-handing and right-handing according to the game state, and the gaming machine 10 determines whether the hitting direction is left according to the gaming state after the start of the big hit state. Can be determined.

  [Step D104] When the timer value indicates “fanfare second half” and “left-hand direction guidance”, the control unit executes left-hand direction guidance decoration setting processing. In the left-hitting direction guidance decoration setting process, the control unit performs a counterclockwise rotation as a decoration pattern indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit and that the hitting direction after the big hit state is started is left. A rainbow color display (for example, a counterclockwise rainbow color display effect shown in FIG. 121 (2)) is set. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display in the second half of the fanfare indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit and that the hitting direction after the big hit state is started is left. After executing the left-facing direction guidance decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare decoration decoration setting process.

  [Step D105] The control unit executes the right-hand direction guidance decoration setting process when the timer value indicates “the second half of the fanfare” and “right-hand direction guidance”. The control unit sets a clockwise rainbow as a decoration pattern indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit and that the hitting direction after the big hit state is right in the right hitting direction guidance decoration setting processing. A color display (for example, a clockwise rainbow display effect shown in FIG. 121 (1)) is set. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display in the second half of the fanfare indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit and that the hitting direction after the big hit state is started is right. After executing the right hitting direction decoration decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare decoration decoration setting process.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a game effect in accordance with the fact that the result of the variable display game has been a big hit by the rainbow display effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform a clockwise rainbow color display effect or a counterclockwise rainbow color display effect as one form of the rainbow color display effect while continuing the rainbow color display effect. As a result, the gaming machine 10 provides the hitting direction guidance (attention to the player) after the start of the big hit state, while continuing the game effect accompanying the result of the variable display game being a big hit. Can be done for That is, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both the alerting of the player and the game effect.

  Although the game effect during the fanfare is shown as an example of the rainbow display effect, the effect may be during a round, during the ending, during a change, or the like. For example, the gaming machine 10 can perform an effect during a big hit by a rainbow color display effect, and can notify the hitting direction of the round by a clockwise rainbow color display effect or a counterclockwise rainbow color display effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs the effect during the interval by the rainbow color display effect, and can notify the hitting direction of the next round by the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect. Such a guidance of the batting direction during the round or during the interval can appropriately guide the batting direction to the player while aiming at compatibility with the game effect when the batting direction is different for each round.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 can provide a notification of a changing big hit by a rainbow color display effect, and can also notify a hitting direction after the big hit by a clockwise rainbow color display effect or a counterclockwise rainbow color display effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 notifies the value of the big hit (whether or not there is a probability change, whether or not there is a general electric power support, the number of rounds, etc.) irrespective of the hitting direction by the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect. be able to.

  In addition, as an application example of the rainbow color display effect, other game states such as a round, an ending, and a change are described. In these game states, similarly to the fanfare decoration setting processing, the decoration pattern is changed to the first half and the second half. And can be divided into In that case, the gaming machine 10 can perform a clockwise rainbow color display effect or a counterclockwise rainbow color display effect on one side. That is, the gaming machine 10 can perform a clockwise rainbow display effect or a counterclockwise rainbow display effect in the first half, and can perform a rainbow display effect in the second half.

In the fanfare decoration setting process, the first half and the second half are divided by the timer value, but may be divided by an event trigger such as detection of input from a predetermined input unit.
[Modification 1 of Third Embodiment]
Next, a first modification of the third embodiment in which the start or end of the clockwise rainbow display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow display effect is set by an event trigger will be described.

[Event decoration setting processing]
The event decoration setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the event decoration setting process in the effect control device according to the first modification of the third embodiment. The event decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D74 of the decoration control process.

  [Step D111] The control unit branches the process in accordance with the event state. Control unit proceeds to step D112 when the event state is "decision button decoration flag is ON", the flow advances to step D114 when the event condition is "selection button decoration flag is on", the event state is "start hole Switch If the event state is "ON", the process proceeds to step D116, and if the event state is "large winning opening switch ON", the process proceeds to step D117.

  [Step D112] The control unit clears the enter button decoration flag. The enter button decoration flag is a flag that is set when the enter button switch 25b is enabled and the ON of the enter button switch 25b is detected.

  [Step D113] The control unit executes a determination button decoration setting process. The determination button decoration setting processing is processing for setting a decoration pattern corresponding to an effect performed by operating the determination button switch 25b. For example, the gaming machine 10, by operating the decision button switch 25b in predetermined effect, start the clockwise iridescent display effect or counter-clockwise iridescent display effect, or terminated. The control unit ends the event decoration setting process after executing the determination button decoration setting process.

  [Step D114] The control unit clears the selection button decoration flag. The selection button decoration flag is a flag that is set when the selection button switch 25a is activated and the selection button switch 25a is turned on.

  [Step D115] The control unit executes a selection button decoration setting process. The selection button decoration setting processing is processing for setting a decoration pattern corresponding to an effect performed by operating the selection button switch 25a. For example, the gaming machine 10 starts or ends the clockwise rainbow display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow display effect by operating the selection button switch 25a during the predetermined effect. After executing the selection button decoration setting processing, the control unit ends the event decoration setting processing.

  [Step D116] The control unit executes a startup winning decoration setting process. The start prize decoration process corresponds to an effect that is executed when a game ball has won the start prize port when the start port switch is set to ON, that is, when a game ball has won the start prize port. This is a process for setting a decorative pattern to be performed. For example, the gaming machine 10 starts or ends the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect according to the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening during the predetermined effect. The control unit ends the event decoration setting process after executing the startup winning decoration setting process.

  The target start winning opening may be one of the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch, or both. For example, the gaming machine 10 can detect a prize of a game ball to the normal variable prize device 37 by setting a target start winning port to a start port 2 switch. In this case, if the normal variable winning device 37 is in a position where it is easy to win when the left-handed driving is performed and the left-handed guiding is being performed, the gaming machine 10 may turn on the start port switch as an end timing of the left-handed guiding. it can. Further, when the gaming machine 10 is in a position where it is easy to win when the ordinary variable winning device 37 is left-handed and should be right-handed, turning on the start port switch can be a trigger for starting right-handed guidance. .

  [Step D117] The control unit executes a decoration setting process for the special variable winning device. The special variable winning device decoration setting process is performed when the special winning opening switch 38a is set to ON, that is, when a game ball wins in the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38), the game ball is placed in the special winning opening. Is a process for setting a decorative pattern corresponding to an effect executed by winning. For example, the gaming machine 10 starts or ends the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect according to the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening during the predetermined effect. The control unit ends the event decoration setting process after executing the special variable winning device decoration setting process.

  Note that if the special variable winning device 38 is in a position where it is easy to win when the left-handed operation is performed, and the left-handed guidance is being performed, the gaming machine 10 sets the turning-on of the special winning opening switch 38a as an end timing of the left-handed guidance. Can be. In addition, if the special variable winning device 38 is in a position where it is easy to win when the right-turning is performed and the right-turning guidance is being performed and the special variable winning device 38 is in the right-turning guidance, the turning-on of the special winning opening switch 38a is used as an end of the right-turning guidance. Can be.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can perform the clockwise rainbow display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow display effect only for a necessary period.
[Modification 2 of Third Embodiment]
Next, a modified example of the light emission mode of the first to third arc-shaped light emitting groups will be described with reference to FIG. First, the emission color of each light emitting unit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating an example of a light emission color of a light emitting unit according to Modification Example 2 of the third embodiment.

  Each light-emitting unit (light-emitting units L00 to L0B, L10 to L17, and push button LEDs 251 to 258) can be switched and displayed in eight color patterns CP1 to CP8. Among them, the color patterns CP1 to CP7 have a predetermined light emission color assignment, and the color pattern CP8 has no light emission color assignment and corresponds to turning off. By sequentially switching the color patterns CP <b> 1 to CP <b> 8, each light emitting unit can perform a so-called iridescent display effect, and can clearly indicate a break of one cycle by turning off the light.

  As described above, since the gaming machine 10 includes the light-off timing in the cycle of the rainbow color display effect, when performing the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect, the rainbow color display effect is provided to the player. It is possible to more clearly sense the direction in which the effect is turned.

[Third Modification of Third Embodiment]
Next, a modification in which the clockwise rainbow display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow display effect is applied to the operation guidance of the push button 25 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen during variable display on the display device according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment.

  The variable display screen 600 is the display content of the display device 41. The display screen 600 during the fluctuation display includes, as display contents, a special figure game game display 601, a reservation display 602, a reservation consumption display 603, a special figure 1 reservation number display 604, a special figure 2 reservation number display 605, and effect participation. A guidance display 606 is included. The special figure game game display 601 is a display including at least a part of the display content related to the game state of the special figure game. For example, the special figure game game display 601 indicates that the decoration symbol is changing.

  The hold display 602 can clearly indicate the number of storages of the special figure change display game and indicate the degree of expectation for the game result for each storage by the display mode. For example, the hold display 602 is a white circle icon display for the first to sixth and eighth hold memories, and a black circle icon display for the seventh hold memory, so that the game result of the seventh hold memory is displayed. That the expectation for is relatively high. The reserved digest display 603 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode.

  The special figure 1 reserved number display 604 displays the reserved storage number (starting stored number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 reserved number display 605 displays the reserved number of special figure 2 games. The number of held storages displayed by the hold display 602 corresponds to the sum of the number of held storages displayed by the special figure 1 held number display 604 and the number of held storages displayed by the special figure 2 held number display 605. For example, when the special figure 1 hold number display 604 displays “4” and the special figure 2 hold number display 605 displays “4”, the hold display 602 indicates the number of hold storages by displaying eight round icons. Indicates "8".

  The production participation guidance display 606 is a display for guiding the production participation of the player on the push button 25. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays an image of a clock on the display device 41 together with the message “Rewind the time!”. Further, the gaming machine 10 displays an image of the push button 25 on the display device 41, and informs that the operation target of the player is the push button 25.

  At this time, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to participate in the effect by performing the counterclockwise rainbow display effect on the push button LEDs 251 to 258 (third arc-shaped light emitting group). Note that the gaming machine 10 can detect a player's touch operation with the touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8.

  The screen 600 during the fluctuation display displays the message "Rewind the time!", But displays, for example, the message "Fast forward the time!" And displays the message on the push button LEDs 251 to 258 (third arc-shaped light emitting group). A clockwise rainbow display effect can also be performed.

  Since the push button 25 has the push button LEDs 251 to 258 and the touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8 superimposed on each other, the gaming machine 10 provides the player with the operation guidance based on the clockwise rainbow display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow display effect. Can be directly and easily understood.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform a game effect with a high expectation by the rainbow color display effect, and while continuing the rainbow color display effect, a clockwise rainbow color display as one form of the rainbow color display effect. Operation guidance can be provided by staging or counterclockwise iridescent display staging. That is, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both the alerting (operation guidance) to the player and the game effect.

[Modification 4 of Third Embodiment]
Next, state notification during a rainbow-colored display effect in a gaming machine in which a plurality of light-emitting units are linearly arranged will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating an example of state notification during a rainbow-colored display effect in a linear light-emitting group according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 displays a rainbow color from one side of the linearly arranged light emitting units L20 to L25 toward the other side according to the emission color of the light emitting units L20 to L25 (linear emission group) and the timing of switching the emission color. The display color can be switched so that moves.

  For example, as shown in (1), the gaming machine 10 emits light on the other side in the order of the light emitting unit L20 located on one side of the linearly arranged light emitting units L20 to L25, the light emitting unit L21, and the light emitting unit L22. The display color can be switched so that the rainbow display moves rightward to the section L25. Such rainbow color display is referred to as rightward rainbow color display for convenience.

  In addition, as shown in (2), the gaming machine 10 emits light on the other side in the order of the light emitting unit L25 located on one side of the linearly arranged light emitting units L20 to L25, the light emitting unit L24, and the light emitting unit L23. The display color can be switched so that the rainbow display moves to the left to the section L20. Such an iridescent display is referred to as a leftward iridescent display for convenience.

  Such a gaming machine 10 can perform a state notification by a rightward rainbow color display or a leftward rainbow color display while performing a jackpot notification or a jackpot notice by a rainbow display effect. For example, the gaming machine 10 can simultaneously perform the big hit notification and the right-handed guidance by associating the right rainbow color display with the right-handed guidance. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can simultaneously perform the jackpot notification and the left-hand guidance by associating the left rainbow color display with the left-hand guidance.

  Note that the arc-shaped arrangement or the linear arrangement of the plurality of light-emitting units described in the third embodiment including the modification is one form of the directional light-emitting unit arrangement. The plurality of light emitting units are arranged in a row (row arrangement) as a directional light emitting unit arrangement. The row arrangement is not limited to one row, and two or more rows may be arranged (for example, a strip arrangement). In addition, the row arrangement is not limited to a straight line, and may be an arbitrary curve or a polygonal line (arc arrangement, annular arrangement, curved arrangement, polygonal arrangement).

[Modification Example 5 of Third Embodiment]
Next, state notification during a rainbow-colored display effect in a gaming machine in which a plurality of light-emitting units are arranged in blocks will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state notification during a rainbow-colored display effect in the massive light-emitting group according to Modification 5 of the third embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 controls the emission colors of the light emitting units L30 to L3A (block light emitting group) and the switching timing of the light emission colors so that the rainbow display moves in the preset order for the light emitting units L30 to L3A arranged in block. The display color can be switched.

  For example, as shown in (1), for the light emitting units L30 to L3A arranged in a block, the gaming machine 10 emits light from the light emitting unit L30 to the light emitting unit L31 adjacent to the light emitting unit L30, the light emitting unit L32 adjacent to the light emitting unit L31, A light emitting unit L33 adjacent to the light emitting unit L32, a light emitting unit L34 adjacent to the light emitting unit L33, a light emitting unit L35 adjacent to the light emitting unit L34, a light emitting unit L36 adjacent to the light emitting unit L35, a light emitting unit L37 adjacent to the light emitting unit L36; The display colors can be switched so that the rainbow display moves in the order of the light emitting unit L38 adjacent to the light emitting unit L37, the light emitting unit L39 adjacent to the light emitting unit L38, and the light emitting unit L3A adjacent to the light emitting unit L39. Such a rainbow color display is referred to as a normal order rainbow color display for convenience.

  Further, as shown in (2), the gaming machine 10 can switch the display colors of the light emitting units L30 to L3A arranged in a block so that the rainbow display moves in the reverse order to the normal rainbow display. it can. Such a rainbow color display is referred to as a reverse order rainbow color display for convenience.

  Such a gaming machine 10 can perform a state notification by a forward-order rainbow color display or a reverse-order rainbow color display while performing a jackpot notification by a rainbow color display effect or a notice of a jackpot. For example, the gaming machine 10 can simultaneously perform the big hit notification and the right-handed guidance by associating the normal order rainbow color display with the right-handed guidance. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can simultaneously perform the jackpot notification and the left-hand guidance by associating the reverse-order rainbow color display with the left-hand guidance.

  Further, the gaming machine 10, by setting the order in which the light-emitting unit adjacent the light emitting portion L30~L3A are arranged as switching order of display color, the distinction between positive sequence iridescent display reverse order iridescent can be displayed easily. The gaming machine 10 sets the order in which the adjacent light emitting units are arranged for the light emitting units L30 to L3A as the display color switching order. For example, a random order not related to the arrangement position is set as the display color switching order. Is also good. Further, the gaming machine 10 may fix the first light emitting unit and the last light emitting unit, and select and set one intermediate switching path from two or more intermediate switching paths. For example, the first light emitting unit L30 and the last light emitting unit L3A are fixed, and the first intermediate switching paths (L31, L32, L33, L34, L35, L36, L37, L38, L39) and the second One of the intermediate switching paths (L36, L31, L32, L33, L34, L35, L38, L37, L39).

As described above, when there are a plurality of options on the switching path, the gaming machine 10 can notify the gaming state according to the switching path in addition to the normal order rainbow color display and the reverse order rainbow color display.
Further, the gaming machine 10 sets the first order of the switching order of the display colors, which is the normal order for the light emitting units L30 to L3A, to the light emitting unit L30 located at the periphery of the massive light emitting group, and sets the last to the peripheral edge of the massive light emitting group. , It is possible to easily distinguish between the normal order rainbow color display and the reverse order rainbow color display. Note that the gaming machine 10 sets the first order of the display color switching order that is the normal order for the light emitting units L30 to L3A to the light emitting unit L30 located at the peripheral edge of the massive light emitting group, and sets the last to the peripheral edge of the massive light emitting group. Is set as the light emitting unit L3A located at the light emitting unit, the light emitting unit at an arbitrary position in the block light emitting group may be set as the first light emitting unit or the last light emitting unit.

The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment (including the first to fifth modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units (first arc light emitting group: light emitting units L00 to L0B, second arc light emitting group: L10 to L17, third arc light emitting group) arranged on the front side. Push button LEDs 251 to 258). The gaming machine 10 includes a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit causes the plurality of light emitting units to emit light in a light emitting mode (rainbow display effect) in which the plurality of light emitting colors are sequentially switched to notify the first state (big hit, big hit notice, etc.) (first state notification). The control unit switches the emission colors of the plurality of light emitting units by providing a predetermined time difference in relation to the occurrence of the first game state (big hit, ordinary power support) in which the first game (right strike) is executed. A time difference in the reverse order of the predetermined order in relation to the occurrence of the first display mode (for example, clockwise iridescent display effect) or the occurrence of the second game state (normal game state) for executing the second game (left-handed) The second state notification for notifying the second state (launch of the game ball) in the second display mode (for example, counterclockwise iridescent display effect) in which the emission color is switched and (operation guide notification) are provided. Do it.

  (2) The plurality of light emitting units are arranged in a row on the front side, and switch the display color so that the rainbow display moves from one side to the other side in the first display mode. The display colors are switched so that the rainbow display moves from the other side toward one side.

(3) The plurality of light emitting units arranged in a row include a first row of light emitting groups arranged in a row on the outer edge side of the game board.
(4) The plurality of light emitting units arranged in a row include a second row of light emitting groups arranged in a row on the inner edge side of the game board.

(5) The plurality of light emitting units arranged in a row include a third light emitting group arranged in a row in an operation receiving unit (push button 25, operation unit 24) that receives a player operation.
(6) In (5), the operation receiving unit superimposes and arranges a touch sensor that receives a touch operation of the player and a light emitting unit.

(7) The row arrangement is a linear arrangement, an arc arrangement, an annular arrangement, a curved arrangement, or a polygonal arrangement.
(8) The row arrangement is a linear arrangement in which a plurality of light emitting units are arranged in a line, or a band arrangement in which a plurality of light emitting units are arranged in two or more rows.

  (9) The plurality of light emitting units are arranged in a lump on the front side, and the display colors are switched so that the rainbow display moves in the order preset in the first display mode, and the order set in advance in the second display mode. The display color is switched in the reverse order.

(10) The control unit sequentially switches among seven color patterns (“red”, “orange”, “yellow”, “green”, “blue”, “blue”, and “purple”).
(11) The control unit includes a light-off timing during a cycle of a light emission mode in which a plurality of light emission colors are sequentially switched.

(12) The control unit guides the hitting direction of the game ball according to the game state by the first display mode or the second display mode.
(13) The control unit guides the hitting direction of the game ball according to the game state by the first display mode or the second display mode.

(14) The control unit guides a game value to be provided to the player in the first display mode or the second display mode.
(15) The control unit notifies the game state or guides the game value to be provided to the player by a combination of the first display mode or the second display mode displayed by the two or more row light emission groups or the block light emission groups. I do.

(16) The control unit sets the beginning of the first display mode or the second display mode as a timer trigger after transition to a predetermined gaming state.
(17) The control unit sets the end of the first display mode or the second display mode as an event trigger after transition to a predetermined gaming state.

In one aspect, the gaming machine 10 of the above-described third embodiment (including Modifications 1 to 5) further has the following features.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units (first arc light emitting group: light emitting units L00 to L0B, second arc light emitting group: L10 to L17, third arc light emitting group) arranged on the front side. Push button LEDs 251 to 258). The gaming machine 10 includes a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit causes the plurality of light emitting units to emit light in a light emitting mode (rainbow display effect) in which the plurality of light emitting colors are sequentially switched to notify the first state (big hit, big hit notice, etc.) (first state notification). The control unit switches the emission colors of the plurality of light emitting units by providing a predetermined time difference in relation to the occurrence of the first game state (big hit, ordinary power support) in which the first game (right strike) is executed. A time difference in the reverse order of the predetermined order in relation to the occurrence of the first display mode (for example, clockwise iridescent display effect) or the occurrence of the second game state (normal game state) for executing the second game (left-handed) The second state notification for notifying the second state (launch of the game ball) in the second display mode (for example, counterclockwise iridescent display effect) in which the emission color is switched and (operation guide notification) are provided. Do it.

  (2) In (1), the gaming machine 10 has a game board detachably attached to the main body frame, and a plurality of light emitting units disposed on the front side, and is rotatable with respect to the main body frame. A variable display device (e.g., the display device 41 or the collective display device 50) provided on the game board, the variable display game being executed, and the execution result of the variable display game is special. When a result is obtained, a special game state can be generated. The control unit is in a state where the execution result of the variable display game can be a special result (a state in which three symbols are aligned, for example, when all three symbols are swaying, full rotation, re-lottery, fanfare, etc.). In this case, when the first state notification is executed and the special game state is generated, the second state notification is executed in the first display mode.

  (3) In (2), a game area is formed on the game board, and the game area includes a first game area in which a firing position (firing force) of a game ball is set in a first game state, and a second game area. And a second game area in which a launch position (firing force) of a game ball is set in the state. The first game state includes a special game state.

  (4) In (1), a game board removably attached to the main body frame, and a plurality of light emitting units arranged on the front side, and a transparent pivotally attached to the main body frame. A member holding frame, and a game control unit that executes a variable display game on a variable display device provided on a game board and generates a special game state when the execution result of the variable display game is a special result. The control unit executes the first state notification when the execution result of the variable display game is a special result, and issues the second state notification by the second display mode when the special game state is generated. Execute.

  (5) In (4), a game area is formed on the game board, and the game area is constituted by a first game area in which a launch position of a game ball is set in a first game state and a second game state, The first game state includes a special game state.

  (6) In (3) or (5), the game board attached to the main body frame is any of (2) or (3), or (4) or (5). Also, the light emission mode of the plurality of light emitting units in the first state notification is common.

[Fourth embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment alerts the player by an alert display arranged on the gaming board 30. In the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, a game effect is performed by the light emitting unit. First, the alert display and the arrangement of the light emitting units on the front side of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating an example of an alert display and an arrangement of light-emitting units in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.

  As described in the third embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group) on the front frame 12. Is provided. In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes an alert display 610. The alert display 610 is located on the front of the gaming machine 10, more specifically, in the gaming area of the gaming board 30 and at the top of the gaming area. The attention display 610 is a display for calling attention to the player, and includes visual information such as characters and pictograms.

  The alerting display 610 is formed as a part of the design of the cell of the game board 30. The alert display 610 may be located on the front of the gaming machine 10 and does not necessarily need to be located on the gaming board. In addition, the alert display 610 may be provided independently of the cell, for example, may be provided on the side case 33 or the like. The alert display 610 functions as a display for giving a model-dependent alert corresponding to the game board 30 if provided on the game board 30, and serves as a display for giving a common alert for a plurality of models if provided on the front frame 12. Function.

  The alert display 610 has a substantially arc-shaped display area along the inner edge of the substantially circular game area. That is, the alerting display 610 is also formed in an arc shape in the same manner as the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group).

Next, the display contents of the alert display 610 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents of an alert display according to the fourth embodiment.
The display content shown in (1) includes a pictogram (displaying an exclamation mark “!” In a triangular frame) that calls attention to the player, and a character string indicating the specific content of the attention “ Be careful not to stare. " Such display contents are attached to a gaming machine having a light emitting unit that emits light in a predetermined manner (for example, a predetermined light emission intensity, a light emission duration, a predetermined period of blinking, etc.), and to provide a safe and secure game environment. To contribute.

  The display content shown in (2) includes a character string “equipped with an illegal monitoring system” indicating specific caution content. Such display contents are attached to a game machine equipped with a fraud monitoring system (for example, fraud monitoring by a magnetic sensor 61 or a board radio wave sensor 62 or the like), and check illegal games by a fraudulent player.

  The display contents shown in (3) include a pictogram (displaying an exclamation mark "!" In a triangular frame) to call attention to the player, and a character string "specifically tapping or pushing the gaming machine" Please do not pull. " Such display contents are commonly attached to a plurality of types of game machines and contribute to providing a safe and secure game environment.

  Display contents shown in (4), and call attention to the player pictogram (display an exclamation point in a triangular shape in the frame "!"), A string showing the specific attention content "Do not close the magnet" Including. Such display contents are commonly attached to a plurality of types of game machines and contribute to providing a safe and secure game environment.

  The display content shown in (5) is a pictogram (displaying an exclamation mark “!” In a triangular frame) that calls attention to the player, and a character string indicating the specific content of the attention “ Let's have a break time. " Such display contents are commonly attached to a plurality of types of game machines and contribute to providing a safe and secure game environment.

  Note that the display contents shown in the above (1) to (5) are examples, and the display contents are not limited to the contents of attention to the player. The display content may be a game guide, a game performance display, or the like as long as the display content alerts the player.

  Next, display effects of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a diagram illustrating an example of the movement display effect starting from the alert display according to the fourth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 turns on and off a predetermined emission color (for example, “red”) for each of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group). Is switched according to the position of the light emitting unit, so that the lighting display can be rendered to move.

  The gaming machine 10 has the light-emitting units L00 to L0B and the light-emitting units L10 such that the lighting display moves from the light-emitting unit arranged on the upper side to the light-emitting unit arranged on the lower side with the alerting display 610 as a starting point. Switching on and off of L17. With such a display (attention start point movement display), the gaming machine 10 can direct the player to pay attention to the attention display 610. In addition, since the gaming machine 10 always displays the alert display 610, the gaming machine 10 has a role of guiding the alert display 610 by paying attention to the alert display 610 by using the alert start point moving display.

  The alerting indication 610 is located between the arc formed by the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and the arc formed by the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group). It is in. As a result, even when the alert display 610 cannot be clearly noticed by one of the arc-shaped light-emitting groups, the gaming machine 10 can cause the alert display 610 to be clearly noticed by the two arc-shaped light-emitting groups. it can.

  Further, the alerting display 610 is located at a position where the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) are bilaterally divided into the light emitting units L00 to L05 and the light emitting units L06 to L0B, and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second Are divided into left and right parts by the light emitting units L10 to L12 and the light emitting units L13 to L17. That is, the light emitting units L00 to L05 function as a first line light emitting group, the light emitting units L06 to L0B function as a second line light emitting group, and the light emitting units L10 to L12 function as a third line light emitting group. The light emitting units L13 to L17 function as a fourth row light emitting group. As a result, the four line-shaped light-emitting groups are arranged with one end thereof directed toward the alert display 610, and the gaming machine 10 can make the alert display 610 more noticeable by the four line-shaped light-emitting groups. it can.

  Next, the switching timing of turning on and off the light emitting units L00 to L0B and the light emitting units L10 to L17 in the alert start point moving display shown in FIG. 138 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display mode switching timing of the movement display effect in the first arc-shaped light emitting group and the second arc-shaped light emitting group of the fourth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 switches the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group) between lighting (ON) and turning off (OFF) at predetermined time intervals. The alert start point move display is performed.

  First, the gaming machine 10 turns off all the lights of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group) at timing t0. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 resets the player's attention. Next, the gaming machine 10 turns on the light emitting units L05, L06, L12, and L13 at the timing t1, and continues to turn off the remaining light. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the light emitting units L05, L06, L12, and L13. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the alert display 610 located near the light emitting units L05, L06, L12, and L13.

  Next, at timing t2, the gaming machine 10 switches the light emitting units L05, L06, L12, and L13 from on to off, and switches the light emitting units L04, L07, L11, and L14 from off to on. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 performs the alert start point moving display starting from the alert display 610. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the visibility of the alert display 610 after the player's attention by turning off the light emitting units L05, L06, L12, and L13 at the timing t2.

  Thereafter, at timing t3, the gaming machine 10 switches the light emitting units L04, L07, L11, and L14 from on to off, and switches the light emitting units L03, L08, L10, and L15 from off to on. At timing t4, the gaming machine 10 switches the light emitting units L03, L08, L10, L15 from on to off, and switches the light emitting units L02, L09, L16 from off to on. Gaming machine 10 is switched to turn off the light emitting portion L02, L09, L16 from the lighting at the timing t5, switch to turn on the light-emitting portion L01, L0a, L17 from off. At timing t6, the gaming machine 10 switches the light emitting units L01, L0A, L17 from on to off, and switches the light emitting units L00, L0B from off to on. The gaming machine 10 may return to the timing t0, turn off all the lights and loop the display mode switching at the timings t0 to t6, or may shift to another variation pattern after making a round of the timings t0 to t6. Good. In addition, the movement display effect including the alert start point movement display may be a display effect in which the lighting mode moves from one end to the other end of the column formed by the plurality of light emitting units, and may be used to switch between single-color lighting and non-lighting. The present invention is not limited to this, and other display modes can be applied, including switching of display colors, switching of blinking cycles, switching of lighting intensity, and timing switching of rainbow display as described in the third embodiment.

  Since such a gaming machine 10 always displays the alert display 610, the attention display for the alert display 610 can be sufficiently improved by the alert start point moving display. Further, since the gaming machine 10 does not newly alert the user with a display device or the like, it is possible to limit a decrease in interest in the game. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 achieves both the enhancement of the attention to the alert display 610 and the effect display in the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group). I do.

  Next, another display effect of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating an example of a moving display effect ending with the alert display according to the fourth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 turns on and off a predetermined emission color (for example, “red”) for each of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group). Is switched according to the position of the light emitting unit, so that the lighting display can be rendered to move. The gaming machine 10 is configured such that the light-emitting units L00 to L0B and the light-emitting units L10 are arranged such that the lighting display moves from the light-emitting unit disposed on the lower side to the light-emitting unit disposed on the upper side with the alerting display 610 as an end point. Switching on and off of L17. With such a display (attention end point movement display), the gaming machine 10 can direct the player to pay attention to the attention display 610. In addition, since the gaming machine 10 always displays the alert display 610, the gaming machine 10 has a role of guiding a time when the alert display 610 should be noted or a time when it is desirable to pay attention by the alert end point moving display.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 switches the timings of turning on and off the light emitting units L00 to L0B and the light emitting units L10 to L17 shown in FIG. Moving display can be realized.

The gaming machine 10 performs such a warning start point movement display or a warning end point movement display during the fanfare.
[Fanfare interior decoration setting processing]
Next, the fanfare decoration setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the fanfare decoration setting process in the effect control device according to the fourth embodiment. The fanfare decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit (control unit (CPU 311) of effect control device 300) in step D90 of the decoration setting process. The decoration pattern set by the decoration setting process during fanfare includes a case where the first half is a normal fanfare display with the first half as a warning start point moving display, and a case where the first half is a normal fanfare display with a second half as a warning end point movement display. There are times when you do.

  [Step D1010] The control unit determines whether to display the fanfare display including the alert start point move display or the alert end point move display. The control unit proceeds to step D1011 when displaying the fanfare including the alert start point move display, and proceeds to step D1014 when not displaying the fanfare display including the alert start point move display.

  For example, the control unit can acquire information depending on the model from the game control device 100, and determine the mode of the moving display effect based on the information. That is, the gaming machine 10 instructs the control unit from the gaming control device 100 to display the alert start point movement display when the type of the alert start point shift display is desirable from the configuration and the effect form of the gaming board 30. In addition, when the type of the alerting end point movement display is desirable from the configuration and the effect form of the gaming board 30, the gaming machine 10 instructs the control unit from the game control device 100 to display the alerting end point movement display.

  [Step D1011] The control unit branches the process in accordance with the timer value indicating the passage of time during the fanfare. The control unit proceeds to Step D1012 when the timer value indicates “first half of the fanfare”, and proceeds to Step D1013 when the timer value indicates “second half of the fanfare”.

  [Step D1012] The control unit executes the alert start point decoration setting process when the timer value indicates “first half of the fanfare”. The gaming machine 10 performs the alert start point moving display by the alert start point decoration setting process. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 directs the player to pay attention to the alert display 610 at the time of starting the fanfare. After executing the alert start point decoration setting processing, the control unit ends the fanfare decoration setting processing.

  [Step D1013] The control unit executes the fanfare second half decoration setting process when the timer value indicates “fanfare second half”. The control unit sets the rainbow-colored display effect as a decoration pattern indicating that the result of the variable display game has been a big hit in the fanfare second half decoration setting processing. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the result of the variable display game has been a big hit in the second half of the fanfare. After executing the fanfare second-half decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare mid-decoration setting process.

  [Step D1014] The control unit branches the process in accordance with the timer value indicating the passage of time during the fanfare. The control unit proceeds to Step D1015 when the timer value indicates “first half of the fanfare”, and proceeds to Step D1016 when the timer value indicates “second half of the fanfare”.

  [Step D1015] The controller executes the fanfare first half decoration setting process when the timer value indicates “fanfare first half”. The control unit sets the rainbow display effect as a decoration pattern indicating that the result of the variable display game has been a big hit in the fanfare first half decoration setting process. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the result of the variable display game has been a big hit in the first half of the fanfare. After executing the fanfare first-half decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare-in-decoration decoration setting process.

  [Step D1016] The control unit executes the attention end point decoration setting process when the timer value indicates “the second half of the fanfare”. The gaming machine 10 performs the alert end point moving display by the alert end point decoration setting process. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 directs the player to pay attention to the alert display 610 at the end of the fanfare. After executing the alert end point decoration setting processing, the control unit ends the fanfare decoration setting processing.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a game effect in accordance with the fact that the result of the variable display game has been a big hit by the rainbow display effect. Further, the gaming machine 10 can perform the alert start point move display or the alert end point move display in cooperation with the rainbow color display effect. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the degree of attention to the alert display 610 while continuing the game effect associated with the result of the variable display game being a big hit. That is, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both the alerting of the player and the game effect.

  Although the game effect during the fanfare is shown as an example of the alert start point movement display or the alert end point movement display, it may be during a round, an ending, a change, or the like. Further, the gaming machine 10 may perform a warning start point movement display or a warning end point movement display every time a predetermined time elapses, and furthermore, a warning start point movement display or a warning start point movement display corresponding to a gaming state at the time when the predetermined time elapses. The alert end point moving display may be performed.

  In the gaming machine 10, the alert start point move display or the alert end point move display is determined depending on the model, but may be determined according to the game state. For example, the gaming machine 10 can display an alert start point movement display when performing a fanfare effect, and can display an alert end point movement display when performing an ending effect.

  The gaming machine 10 may determine the mode of the movement display effect (for example, the alert start point shift display or the alert end point shift display) in association with the notification of the gaming state. For example, the gaming machine 10 may notify the value of the big hit (whether or not there is a probability change, whether or not there is a regular power support, the number of rounds, etc.) in association with the alert start point movement display or the alert end point movement display. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can direct the player to pay more attention to the alert display 610.

In the fanfare decoration setting process, the first half and the second half are divided by the timer value, but may be divided by an event trigger such as detection of input from a predetermined input unit.
[Modification 1 of Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 selectively performs the alert start point movement display or the alert end point movement display in the fourth embodiment. In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the alerting clockwise movement display or the alerting counterclockwise movement display having the alerting indication 610 as a start point and an end point is selectively performed. First, a movement display effect with the alert display 610 as a start point and an end point will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating an example of a moving display effect in which the alert display according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment has a start point and an end point.

  FIG. 142 (1) shows an alert clockwise movement display, and FIG. 142 (2) shows an alert counterclockwise movement display. In the gaming machine 10 shown in (1), the light emitting units that are turned on by the switching timing of turning on and off the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group). The display mode can be switched so that moves clockwise. At this time, the gaming machine 10 uses the light emitting unit L06 located near the alerting display 610 as a start point and the other light emitting unit L05 located near the alerting display 610 as an end point, and sets the first arc-shaped light emitting group. reminder perform the clockwise movement display. Further, the gaming machine 10 uses the light emitting unit L13 located near the alerting display 610 as a start point and another light emitting unit L12 located near the alerting display 610 as an end point, and pays attention to the second arc-shaped light emitting group. Evoked clockwise movement display.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 shown in (2) is turned on at the switching timing of turning on and off the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group). The display mode can be switched so that the light emitting unit moves counterclockwise. At this time, the gaming machine 10 uses the light emitting unit L05 located near the alerting display 610 as a starting point and the other light emitting unit L06 located near the alerting display 610 as an end point, and sets the first arc-shaped light emitting group. A warning counterclockwise movement display is performed. Further, the gaming machine 10 uses the light emitting unit L12 located near the alerting display 610 as a start point and the other light emitting unit L13 located near the alerting display 610 as an end point, and pays attention to the second arc-shaped light emitting group. Awaken counterclockwise movement display.

  Such a gaming machine 10 can improve the degree of attention to the alert display 610 between the start and end of the alert clockwise movement display or the alert counterclockwise movement display.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may determine the alerting clockwise movement display or the alerting counterclockwise movement display depending on the model, or may determine the alerting counterclockwise movement display depending on the game state. For example, the gaming machine 10 can display an alert clockwise movement display when performing a fanfare effect, and can display an alert counterclockwise movement display when performing an ending effect.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 may perform a mode of a movement display effect (for example, an alert clockwise movement display or an alert counterclockwise movement display) in association with the notification of the gaming state. For example, the gaming machine 10 may notify the value of the big hit (whether or not there is a probability change, whether or not there is a regular telephone support, the number of rounds, etc.) in association with the alert clockwise movement display or the alert counterclockwise movement display. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can direct the player to pay more attention to the alert display 610.

  Next, the switching timing of turning on and off the light emitting units L00 to L0B and the light emitting units L10 to L17 in the alert clockwise movement display shown in FIG. 142 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode switching timing of the moving display effect in the first arc-shaped light emitting group and the second arc-shaped light emitting group in Modification Example 1 of the fourth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 switches the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group) between lighting (ON) and turning off (OFF) at predetermined time intervals. A warning clockwise movement display is performed.

  First, the gaming machine 10 turns off all the lights of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group) at timing t10. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 resets the player's attention. Next, the gaming machine 10 turns on the light emitting units L06 and L13 at the timing t11, and continues to turn off the remaining light. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the light emitting units L06 and L13. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the alert display 610 located near the light emitting units L06 and L13.

  Next, at timing t12, the gaming machine 10 switches the light-emitting units L06 and L13 from on to off, and switches the light-emitting units L07 and L14 from off to on. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 performs the alerting clockwise movement display starting from the alerting display 610. Further, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the visibility of the alert display 610 after the player's attention by turning off the light emitting units L06 and L13 at the timing t12.

  Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 sequentially switches the light emitting units clockwise each time the timing of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group) is changed, and the timing t22. To turn on the light emitting units L05 and L12 and turn off the rest. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the light emitting units L05 and L12. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the alert display 610 located near the light emitting units L05 and L12.

  Incidentally, the gaming machine 10, to the display mode switching timing t10~t22 off all lighting back to the timing t0 may be loops, if migrated to other variation pattern after round timing t10~t22 Good. In addition, the movement display effect including the alert clockwise movement display may be a display effect in which the lighting mode moves from one end to the other end of the column formed by the plurality of light emitting units, and is switched between turning on and off a single color. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and other display modes can be applied, including switching of display colors, switching of blinking cycles, switching of lighting intensity, and timing switching of rainbow display as described in the third embodiment.

  Since such a gaming machine 10 always displays the alert display 610, the attention display on the alert display 610 can be sufficiently improved by the alert clockwise movement display. Further, since the gaming machine 10 does not newly alert the user with a display device or the like, it is possible to limit a decrease in interest in the game. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 achieves both the enhancement of the attention to the alert display 610 and the effect display in the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc light emitting group). I do.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 alerts the user by switching the timings of turning on and off the light-emitting units L00 to L0B and the light-emitting units L10 to L17 shown in FIG. It is possible to realize a counter-clockwise movement display.

[Modification 2 of Fourth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with an alert display 610 at an upper part in the gaming area. Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that a warning display is provided at a position where the player can confirm the firing force of the game ball.

With reference to FIG. 144, the position where the alert display is provided in the second modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement of an alert display according to Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment.
The game board 30 includes an inner rail 611 and an outer rail 612 formed in an arc shape as the guide rail 31. A game ball fired from a hit ball firing device (not shown) passes between the inner rail 611 and the outer rail 612, passes through the return prevention valve 613, and enters the game area. A game ball having a large firing force is reduced by the return rubber 614. Therefore, the player confirms the firing force of the game ball in an arc-shaped range (fire force confirmation range 615) from the position where the game ball is fired from the hitting ball firing device and becomes visible to the return rubber 614, and the game ball is played. Adjust the firing rate of.

  The alerting display 616 is provided at a position in the firing force confirmation range 615 at which the game ball is fired from the hitting ball firing device and becomes visible. In addition, the alert display 617 is provided at a position in the firing force confirmation range 615 before the game ball passes through the return prevention valve 613. The alerting indication 618 is provided at a position in the firing force confirmation range 615 after the game ball has passed the return prevention valve 613. Further, the alert display 619 is provided at a position adjacent to the return rubber 614 in the firing force confirmation range 615.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the fourth embodiment provides the alert display in the firing force confirmation range 615. Since many of the players check the firing force of the game ball at the start of the game, the gaming machine 10 provides the alert display in the firing force confirmation range 615 to make the player pay attention to the alert display at the start of the game. be able to. In addition, the firing force confirmation range 615 is outside the range of interest of the player during the game when many of the players confirm the firing force of the game ball at the start of the game. For this reason, the firing force confirmation range 615 is unlikely to become an obstacle in the game production while being constantly posted. On the other hand, the firing force confirmation range 615 is located at a position where it is difficult to sufficiently fulfill the original purpose of causing the player to pay attention to the alert display during the game. However, the gaming machine 10 achieves both the game effect and the alert by performing the movement display effect.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 can be provided with one or more of the alert displays 616 to 619. By notifying the effect control device 300 from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the gaming machine 10 can perform the corresponding movement display effect even if any of the alert displays 616 to 619 is provided. it can.

  Further, the game board 30 may be configured such that a warning member 616 to 619 can be illuminated from the back surface by a required light emitting part using a transparent member such as a resin as a substrate. In this case, the gaming machine 10 can cause the attention displays 616 to 619 to emit light in conjunction with the movement display effect, and the attention displays 616 to 619 can be further improved.

  Next, a moving display effect when the gaming machine 10 provides the alert display 619 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating an example of a moving display effect in which the alert display according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment is set as a start point or an end point.

  FIG. 145 (1) shows an alert start point shift display, and FIG. 145 (2) shows an alert end point shift display. (1) and for the gaming machine 10 shown in (2), the light-emitting portions L00～L0B (first arc light emission group) and the light emitting portion L10～L17 (second arc light emission group), a predetermined emission color (e.g. , by switching in accordance with turning on and off of the "red") to the position of the light emitting portion, it is possible to light up the display to produce to move.

  In the gaming machine 10 shown in (1), the light-emitting units L06, L07, L13, and L14 disposed near the warning display 619, with the light-emitting units L00, L0B, The light emitting units L00 to L0B and the light emitting units L10 to L17 are switched on and off so that the lighting display moves toward L10 and L17. With such a display (attention start point movement display), the gaming machine 10 can direct the player to pay attention to the attention display 619.

  In the gaming machine 10 shown in (2), the light-emitting units L06 and L06 disposed far from the light-emitting units L00, L0B, L10, and L17 disposed near the warning display 619 with the warning display 619 as an end point. The light emitting units L00 to L0B and the light emitting units L10 to L17 are switched on and off so that the lighting display moves toward L07, L13, and L14. With such a display (attention end point movement display), the gaming machine 10 can direct the player to pay attention to the attention display 619.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform a movement display effect corresponding to the position of the alert display 619.
Note that the alerting display 619 is located at a position where the light-emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light-emitting group) are bilaterally divided into the light-emitting units L00 to L06 and the light-emitting units L07 to L0B, and the light-emitting units L10 to L17 (second Are divided into left and right parts by the light emitting units L10 to L13 and the light emitting units L14 to L17. That is, the light emitting units L00 to L06 function as a first row light emitting group with respect to the alert display 619, the light emitting units L07 to L0B function as a second row light emitting group with respect to the alert display 619, and the light emitting units L10 to L10. L13 functions as a third row light-emitting group for the alert display 619, and the light emitting units L14 to L17 function as a fourth row light-emitting group for the alert display 619. As a result, the four line-shaped light emitting groups are arranged with one end thereof directed toward the alerting display 619, and the gaming machine 10 can make the alerting display 619 more noticeable by the four line-shaped light emitting groups. it can.

[Fanfare interior decoration setting processing]
Here, the decoration setting process in the fanfare for realizing the movement display effect performed in accordance with the position of the alert display 619 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the fanfare decoration setting process in the effect control device according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment. The fanfare decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit (control unit (CPU 311) of effect control device 300) in step D90 of the decoration setting process. In the decoration pattern set by the fanfare decoration setting processing, the first half is a warning start point moving display corresponding to the position of the warning display, and the second half is a normal fanfare display.

  [Step D1011] The control unit branches the process in accordance with the timer value indicating the passage of time during the fanfare. The control unit proceeds to Step D1031 when the timer value indicates “first half of the fanfare”, and proceeds to Step D1021 when the timer value indicates “second half of the fanfare”.

  [Step D1021] The control unit executes the fanfare latter half decoration setting process when the timer value indicates “the latter half of fanfare”. The control unit sets a decorative pattern (for example, a rainbow-colored display effect shown in FIG. 118) indicating that the result of the variable display game has been a big hit in the fanfare second-half decoration setting processing. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the result of the variable display game has been a big hit in the second half of the fanfare. After executing the fanfare second-half decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare mid-decoration setting process.

  [Step D1031] The control unit determines the position of the alert display that the player wants to pay attention to. For example, when the gaming machine 10 posts only one alert display, the control unit determines the position of the alert display as the position of the alert display that the player wants to pay attention to. When the gaming machine 10 displays two or more alert displays, the control unit may cause the player to pay attention to the position of the alert display selected according to the game state among the posted alert displays. It is determined as the position of the alert display.

  When the position of the alert display that the player wants to pay attention to is the position A (for example, the position corresponding to the alert display 616), the control unit proceeds to Step D1041 and proceeds to the position B (for example, the position corresponding to the alert display 617). If the position is (the position corresponding to the alert display 619), the process proceeds to step D1051. If the position is the position C (for example, the position corresponding to the alert display 619), the process proceeds to step D1061. Proceed to step D1071.

  [Step D1041] The control unit executes alert A start point decoration setting processing. The gaming machine 10 performs the alert start point moving display corresponding to the position A by the alert A start point decoration setting process. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 directs the player to pay attention to the position A (for example, the position corresponding to the alert display 616). After executing the attention A starting point decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare decoration setting process.

  [Step D1051] The control unit executes alert B start point decoration setting processing. The gaming machine 10 performs the alert start point moving display corresponding to the position B by the alert B start point decoration setting process. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 directs the player to pay attention to the position B (for example, the position corresponding to the alert display 617). After executing the alert B starting point decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare decoration setting process.

  [Step D1061] The control unit executes alert C start point decoration setting processing. The gaming machine 10 performs the alert start point moving display corresponding to the position C by the alert C start point decoration setting process. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 directs the player to pay attention to the position C (for example, the position corresponding to the alert display 618). After executing the alert C starting point decoration setting processing, the control unit ends the fanfare decoration setting processing.

  [Step D1071] The control unit executes a warning D start point decoration setting process. The gaming machine 10 performs the alert start point moving display corresponding to the position D by the alert D start point decoration setting process. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 directs the player to pay attention to the position D (for example, the position corresponding to the alert display 619). After executing the attention D start point decoration setting processing, the control unit ends the fanfare decoration setting processing.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a game effect in accordance with the fact that the result of the variable display game has been a big hit by the rainbow display effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform the alert start point moving display corresponding to the alert display position in cooperation with the rainbow display effect. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the degree of attention to the alert display while continuing the game effect accompanying the result of the variable display game being a big hit. That is, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both the alerting of the player and the game effect.

  Although the game effect during the fanfare is shown as an example of the alert start point moving display, it may be during a round, an ending, a change, or the like. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may perform an alert start point movement display every time a predetermined time elapses, or may perform an alert start point movement display corresponding to a gaming state at the elapse of the predetermined time. Good.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 may determine the alert display position in relation to the notification of the gaming state. For example, the gaming machine 10 may notify a jackpot value (whether or not there is a probability change, whether or not there is a regular power support, the number of rounds, etc.) in association with the position of the alert display. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can cause the player to pay more attention to the alert display.

In the fanfare decoration setting process, the first half and the second half are divided by the timer value, but may be divided by an event trigger such as detection of input from a predetermined input unit.
In the fanfare decoration setting processing, the alert start point movement display is performed as the movement display effect, but the alert end point movement display, the alert clockwise movement display, the alert counterclockwise movement display, or the like may be used. .

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment (including the first and second modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units (row light emitting groups) arranged in a row on the front side. The gaming machine 10 displays an alert display (alert display 610, 616 to 619) on one end side of the row light emitting group. The gaming machine 10 includes a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit switches the display mode (moving display effect) in which the lighting modes move from one end to the other end or from the other end to the one end of the row.

  (2) The alert display (alert display 610) includes a row formed by the first row light emitting groups (light emitting units L00 to L0B) and a second row light emitting group (light emitting sections L10 to L17). It is in a position sandwiched between the row to be performed.

  (3) The first columnar light emitting group (light emitting units L00 to L05) and the second divided line light emitting group (light emitting units L00 to L05) are located near the alert display (alert display 610). Switching (moving) in which the lighting mode is moved in one or both of the first divided row-shaped light-emitting group and the second divided row-shaped light-emitting group. Display).

  (4) The second row light-emitting group (light-emitting units L10 to L17) includes a third divided row light-emitting group (light-emitting units L10 to L13) and a fourth light-emitting unit near the warning display (warning display 610). The display mode is switched (moving) such that the lighting mode moves in one or both of the third divided row-shaped light-emitting group and the fourth divided row-shaped light-emitting group. Display).

(5) The alert display (alert display 610) is displayed on the game board in a range where the firing force of the game ball can be confirmed (firing force confirmation range 615).
(6) In (3) and (4), the control unit sets the first line-shaped light-emitting group or the second line-shaped light-emitting group in accordance with the position of the warning display (warning display 610, 616 to 619). A division position at which the light is to be divided into the divided light emitting groups is selected.

(7) The control unit determines the mode of the moving display effect based on the information depending on the model.
(8) The control unit performs a moving display starting from one end at the start of the fanfare.
(9) The control unit performs a moving display with one end as the end point at the end of the fanfare.

  (10) After performing the moving display starting from one end of the first divided row light emitting group, the control unit performs the moving display starting from the other end of the second divided row light emitting group (attention). Clockwise movement display or warning counterclockwise movement display).

(11) The control unit determines the mode of the movement display effect in association with the notification of the game state.
(12) The control unit determines the alert display position in relation to the notification of the game state.
(13) In (11) and (12), the notification of the gaming state includes the value of the big hit (whether there is a probability change, whether there is a general-purpose support, the number of rounds, etc.).

(14) The lighting modes to be moved include switching between lighting and extinguishing, switching between display colors, switching between blinking cycles, switching between lighting intensities, and switching between rainbow display timings.
[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment alerts the player by emphasizing the light emission mode of the predetermined decorative portion. First, the configuration of the decorative portion of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment and the light emission mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration and a light emission mode of a decoration unit in the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 includes the frame decoration device 18 on the front frame 12. The frame decoration device 18 has an outer edge light emitting group 18L including a plurality of light emitting units. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is arranged in a row on the outer edge side of the game board 30 so as to surround the game board 30. Outer light emission group 18L is a form of column-like light emission group.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 includes a center case 40 so as to surround the display device 41. The center case 40 has an inner edge light emitting group 40L including a plurality of light emitting units. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is arranged in a row on the inner edge side of the game board 30. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is one form of a row light emitting group.

  In addition, the front frame 12 and the center case 40 can be non-game progress related parts not related to the game progress from one viewpoint. In addition, the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L can be non-game progress related decoration portions for decorating the non-game progress related portion. Note that the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L are examples of a non-game progress related decoration section, and the non-game progress related decorative section may be any as long as it decorates the non-game progress related section. For example, the light emitting unit of the option setting unit 25 is a non-game progress related decoration unit.

  The game board 30 includes game board components such as a start winning port 36, a normal variable winning device 37, and a special variable winning device 38. Further, the gaming board 30 includes a starting winning opening light emitting portion 36L for decorating the starting winning opening 36 in a light emitting mode, a normal variable winning device light emitting portion 37L for decorating the normal variable winning device 37 in a light emitting mode, and a special variable winning device 38. A special fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 38L that is decorated in a light-emitting mode is provided.

  Note that, in one aspect, the start winning prize port 36, the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37, and the special fluctuation prize winning device 38 can be a game progress related portion related to the game progress depending on a predetermined game state. That is, the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38 can be any of the game progress-related portion and the non-game progress-related portion depending on the game state. Further, the starting winning opening emitting unit 36L, ordinary variation winning device emitting unit 37L, and special variation winning device emitting unit 38L may be a game progress relationship escutcheon decorating game progress relationship part.

  The start winning opening light emitting unit 36L, the normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L, and the special fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 38L may be a single light emitting unit or a light emitting group including two or more light emitting units. There may be. The starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, the normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L, and the special fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 38L are configured integrally with these game board components and directly irradiate the game board components. Alternatively, it may be one that irradiates a player from a game board constituent member. The starting winning opening light emitting portion 36L, the normal fluctuation winning device light emitting portion 37L, and the special fluctuation winning device light emitting portion 38L are configured separately from the game board components and indirectly illuminate the game board components. Alternatively, the player may be irradiated from the vicinity of the game board component.

  For example, the outer edge light emitting group 18L, the inner edge light emitting group 40L, the starting winning opening light emitting portion 36L, the normal variable winning device light emitting portion 37L, and the special variable winning device light emitting portion 38L are full-color LEDs that can emit light by switching a plurality of emission colors. However, other light emitting means such as a monochromatic LED and a lamp may be used.

  The outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L decorate the gaming machine 10 in a synchronized light emitting mode. For example, the outer edge light-emitting group 18L and the inner edge light-emitting group 40L perform moving display in the same direction (for example, the lighting position is switched in a counterclockwise direction at a period of 400 ms) in monochromatic lighting or rainbow display effect. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the interest according to the gaming state by performing a cooperative effect in which the switching of the light emitting mode of the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the switching of the light emitting mode of the inner edge light emitting group 40L are synchronized.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 emits light (for example, 100 ms) asynchronous with the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L with respect to the start winning opening light emitting unit 36L, the normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L, or the special fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 38L. Cycle white blinking). Accordingly, the gaming machine 10 distinguishes the player from the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L from the start winning opening light emitting portion 36L, the normal variable winning device light emitting portion 37L, or the special variable winning device light emitting portion 38L. Can be done. Thereby, even when the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L perform a cooperative effect, the gaming machine 10 allows the player to easily recognize the special fluctuation prize winning device 38 during the big hit, or the normal fluctuation during the normal power support. The player can easily recognize the winning device 37, and can easily recognize the starting winning port 36 in the normal state.

  Next, the correspondence between the progress of the special figure game and the game effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating the correspondence between the progress of the special figure game and the game effect according to the fifth embodiment. Here, the game state transition of the special figure game is shown, and the game effect of the non-game progress related decoration section and the game progress related decoration section in each game state will be described.

  The game state transition process of the illustrated special figure game is as follows: a special figure change without power support (during a change without electric support), a fanfare at timing T11, a big hit (during a round) at timing T12, an ending at timing T13, and a timing T14. Shows the special map fluctuations with the Poden support (during the fluctuation with the Electric support).

  A game effect without hatching indicates a synchronous game effect synchronized with another game effect without hatching, and a game effect with hatching indicates a game effect not synchronized with other game effects, that is, an asynchronous game effect.

  For example, in the gaming state in which there is no power support, the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L perform a synchronous game effect, and the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L and the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L also have a non-game progress relationship. Performs synchronous game effects synchronized with the decoration section. The outer edge light emitting group 18L, the inner edge light emitting group 40L, the normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L, and the special fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 38L perform a synchronous game effect even during a fanfare or ending. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform a game effect with a sense of unity as a whole.

  On the other hand, in the big hit game state, the special fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 38L, which is one of the game progress related decoration units, performs an asynchronous game effect that is not synchronized with the other. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can alert the player to the special variable winning device 38. That is, since the special variable prize winning device 38 is greatly related to the player's profit in the game progress in the jackpot game state, the gaming machine 10 protects the player's profit at the expense of a part of the integrity of the game effect. Is being planned.

  In addition, in the game state in which the power is fluctuating, the normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L, which is one of the game progress-related decoration units, performs an asynchronous game production that is a game production not synchronized with the other. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can alert the player to the normal variable prize device 37. That is, since the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is greatly related to the profit of the player in the progress of the game in the changing game state with the power support, the gaming machine 10 can play the game at the expense of a part of the integrity of the game effect. To protect the interests of the elderly.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 performs the asynchronous game effect that is not synchronized with the other decorative portions for the game progress-related decorative portion according to the game state, thereby attaining both the attention to the player and the game effect. .

  The light emitting unit (including the light emitting group) performs a game effect according to a light emitting mode, and the audio output unit performs a game effect according to a voice mode such as music, sound effect, and voice. The game effect is not limited to this, and may include an operation mode by the board effect device 44, a vibration mode by a vibration generator such as a vibrator, and the like.

  Note that the asynchronous game effect in the game progress decoration unit is not only asynchronous with the other light emitting units, but also with the audio output. As a result, the gaming machine 10 further enhances the degree of attention to the game progress-related decoration portion that performs the asynchronous game effect.

  Next, an asynchronous game effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating a correspondence between synchronous game effects and asynchronous game effects in the big hit gaming state according to the fifth embodiment.

  After the gaming state becomes a big hit at timing T12, the gaming machine 10 performs a game effect in the light emitting mode P1 for the inner edge light emitting group 40L, performs a game effect in the light emitting mode P2 for the outer edge light emitting group 18L, and emits the normal fluctuation winning device light. A game effect is performed for the part 37L in the light emission mode P4. Each of the light emission modes P1, P2, and P4 is the cycle TS1, and starts the game effect in the first cycle from timing T12, and starts the game effect in the second cycle when the game effect in the first cycle ends at timing T123. I do. In this way, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly executes the light emission modes P1, P2, and P4 for the inner edge light emitting group 40L, the outer edge light emitting group 18L, and the normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L during the jackpot gaming state.

  On the other hand, after the gaming state becomes a big hit at timing T12, the gaming machine 10 performs a gaming effect in the light emitting mode P3 with respect to the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L. The light emission mode P3 is a cycle TS2 different from the cycle TS1. The gaming machine 10 provides a time lag TL1 after the timing T12, starts the first-cycle gaming effect from the timing T121, and starts the second-cycle gaming effect when the first-cycle gaming effect ends at the timing T122. . In this way, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly executes the light emission mode P3 for the special fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 38L during the jackpot gaming state.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 alerts the player to the special fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 38L by making the timing of starting the light emitting mode P3 different from the timing of starting the light emitting modes P1, P2, and P4. It can be further emphasized. Further, the gaming machine 10 further emphasizes the alerting of the player to the special fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 38L by making the timing of repeating the light emitting mode P3 different from the timing of repeating the light emitting modes P1, P2, and P4. it can. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can further emphasize the alert to the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L to the player by making the repetition period of the light emission mode P3 different from the repetition cycle of the light emission modes P1, P2, and P4. Note that the gaming machine 10 may set the cycle TS2 to be shorter than the cycle TS1, whereby the gaming machine 10 can further emphasize the alert to the player to the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L.

  Note that the asynchronous game effect in the game progress decoration unit is not only asynchronous with the other light emitting units, but also with the audio output. Therefore, the light emission mode P3 and the sound output mode P5 have different start triggers, repetition triggers, or repetition periods. Accordingly, the gaming machine 10, can be further emphasized Beware of special variation winning device emitting portion 38L with respect to a player who is listening to speech.

[Round decoration setting process]
Next, the switching control between the synchronous game effect and the asynchronous game effect for the decoration unit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the round decoration setting process in the effect control device according to the fifth embodiment. The in-round decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D91 of the decoration setting process described in the third embodiment.

  [Step D121] The control unit sets the special fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 38L as a game progress related decoration unit. The setting of the special variable winning device light emitting portion 38L in the game progress related decoration portion is based on the fact that the special variable winning device 38 is related to the game progress during the round (during the big hit) and thus corresponds to the game progress related portion.

  [Step D122] The control unit sets light-emitting units other than the special fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 38L as non-game progress related decoration units. The setting of the light-emitting units other than the special fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 38L in the non-game progress related decoration unit is performed during the round (during the big hit) because the other decoration target parts are not related to the game progress. By the equivalent.

[Step D123] The controller sets the decorative pattern to the A-loop setting. The A loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decorative pattern in the cycle A.
[Step D124] The control unit sets a round decoration pattern for the game progress related decoration unit. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly performs the decoration display in the round A with the decoration pattern during the round for the game progress related decoration part.

[Step D125] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to the B loop. Note that the B loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decorative pattern in a cycle B different from the cycle A.
[Step D126] The control unit sets a round decoration pattern for the non-game progress related decoration unit. As a result, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly performs the decoration display with the in-round decoration pattern in the cycle B for the non-game progress related decoration part. After setting the round decoration pattern for the non-game progress related decoration part, the control unit ends the round decoration setting process.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can switch between the synchronous game effect and the asynchronous game effect for the decorative portion according to the game state.
[Modification 1 of Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 154. FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the fifth embodiment alerts the player by emphasizing the light emission mode of the predetermined decorative portion according to the state at the time of power-on. First, the light emitting mode of the decorative portion of the gaming machine 10 according to the first modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration and a light emitting mode of a decoration unit in a gaming machine according to a first modification of the fifth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 determines the game progress-related decoration section in accordance with the state at the time of power-on (including the restoration of power failure), and controls the game progress-related decoration section in a non-game progress-related decoration section in an asynchronous light emission mode.
For example, when the power-on state is a recovery from a power-off during a big hit, the gaming machine 10 determines the special variable prize winning device light-emitting unit 38L as a game progress-related decoration unit as shown in (1), The variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is set to a light emitting mode asynchronous with other light emitting units (for example, white blinking with a period of 100 ms). Thereby, even when the display device 41 cannot display the display content before the power is cut off at the time of restoration from the power cut, the gaming machine 10 alerts the player to the special variable prize winning device 38, and Can protect the interests of the elderly.

  Further, the gaming machine 10, when the state of power-on recovery from power shutdown in Hiroshi conductive support, as shown in (2), to determine the common variation winning device emitting portion 37L as a game progresses relationship escutcheon The normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L is in a light emitting mode asynchronous with other light emitting units (for example, white blinking with a 100 ms cycle). Thereby, even when the display device 41 cannot display the display content before the power is turned off when the power is turned off, the gaming machine 10 alerts the player to the normal variable prize device 37 and plays the game. Can protect the interests of the elderly.

  In addition, in the case where the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on or when the game machine is restored from the normal game state, the gaming machine 10 determines the starting winning opening light emitting portion 36L as a game progress related decoration portion (not shown), and starts the winning winning opening. The unit 36L is in a light emitting mode asynchronous with other light emitting units (for example, white blinking with a period of 100 ms). Accordingly, even when the activation from the RAM clear is notified by another light emitting unit, or when the display device 41 cannot display the display contents before the power is turned off when the power is turned off, the gaming machine 10 can keep the game The player can be alerted to the starting winning opening 36, and the profit of the player can be protected.

  Next, the determination of the game progress-related decoration section according to the state when the power is turned on (including the restoration of the power failure) and the control of the light emission mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 154. First, the decoration setting processing of the first modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the decoration setting process in the effect control device according to the first modification of the fifth embodiment.

[Decoration setting processing]
The decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the decoration control process described in the third embodiment.

  [Step D81] The control unit branches the process according to the gaming state. The control unit, the process proceeds to step D82A if the gaming state is "power-on", the process proceeds to step D84A if the gaming state is "the power is restored", the process proceeds to step D86 if the game state is "in the customer waiting", When the gaming state is “changing”, the process proceeds to step D88. When the gaming state is “symbol stopped”, the process proceeds to step D89. When the gaming state is “fanfare”, the process proceeds to step D90. When the game state is “rounding”, the process proceeds to step D91A, and when the gaming state is “ending”, the process proceeds to step D92.

  [Step D82A] The control unit executes power-on decoration setting processing. The power-on decoration setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the changing decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process. The “power-on” is a state in which the power is turned off without maintaining the state at the time of power-off, and involves, for example, a RAM clear.

  [Step D84A] The control unit executes a power failure restoration decoration setting process. The power failure restoration decoration setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the power failure restoration decoration setting processing, the control unit ends the decoration setting processing. Note that “power failure recovery” is a state in which the power-off state is maintained and activated.

[Step D86] The control unit sets the decorative pattern to a loop setting.
[Step D87] The controller executes a customer waiting demonstration decoration setting process while waiting for the customer (state). After performing the customer waiting demonstration decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

  [Step D88] The control unit executes the changing decoration setting process when the gaming state is “changing”, that is, while the changing display game is running. After executing the changing decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

  [Step D89] The control unit executes the symbol stop decoration setting process when the gaming state is “symbol stopped”, that is, when the identification symbol in the variable display game is stopped. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the symbol-stopped decoration setting process.

  [Step D90] The control unit executes the fanfare decoration setting process when the gaming state is “fanfare”, that is, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit. After executing the decoration setting process during fanfare, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

  [Step D91A] The control unit executes the round decoration setting process when the gaming state is “round”, that is, when each round in the big hit state is being executed. After executing the decoration setting process during the round, the control unit ends the decoration setting process. The in-round decoration setting process may be the during-round decoration setting process of the fifth embodiment described with reference to FIG.

  [Step D92] The control unit executes the ending decoration setting process when the gaming state is “ending”, that is, when the ending process indicating that the big hit state has ended is being executed. After executing the ending decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Power-on decoration setting processing]
Next, the power-on decoration setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a power-on decoration setting process in the effect control device according to the first modification of the fifth embodiment. The power-on decoration setting processing is processing executed by the control unit in step D82A of the decoration setting processing.

  [Step D131] The control unit sets the starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L as a game progress related decoration unit. The setting of the start winning port light emitting section 36L in the game progress related decoration section is based on the fact that the start winning port 36 is related to the game progress when the power is turned on, and thus corresponds to the game progress related section.

  [Step D132] The control unit sets the light emitting units other than the starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L as non-game progress related decoration units. The setting of the light emitting units other than the start winning opening light emitting unit 36L in the non-game progress related decoration unit is based on the fact that the other decoration target parts are not related to the game progress when the power is turned on, and thus correspond to the non-game progress related unit. .

[Step D133] The control unit sets the decorative pattern to the A loop setting. The A loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decorative pattern in the cycle A.
[Step D134] The control unit sets a power-on decoration pattern for the game progress-related decoration unit. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly performs the decoration display with the power-on decoration pattern in the cycle A with respect to the game progress related decoration part.

[Step D135] The control unit sets the decorative pattern to the B loop. Note that the B loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decorative pattern in a cycle B different from the cycle A.
[Step D136] The control unit sets a power-on decoration pattern for the non-game progress related decoration unit. As a result, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly performs the decoration display with the power-on decoration pattern in the cycle B for the non-game progress related decoration part. The control unit sets the power-on decoration pattern for the non-game progress related decoration unit, and then ends the power-on decoration setting process.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both decoration at the time of turning on the power and alerting the start winning port 36. For example, when the power is turned on with RAM clear, the gaming machine 10 controls the non-game progress related decoration unit in a light emitting mode for urging a game room attendant to call attention to an improper power-on operation. At this time, since the gaming machine 10 controls the starting winning opening light emitting portion 36L asynchronously with the non-game progress related decoration portion, the profit protection of the well-meaning player can be secured. Therefore, in one aspect, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both alerting the game room attendant and alerting the player.

[Power restoration restoration decoration processing]
Next, the power failure restoration decoration setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a power failure restoration decoration setting process in the effect control device of the first modification of the fifth embodiment. The power outage restoration decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D84A of the decoration setting process.

[Step D141] The control unit sets the decorative pattern to the B-loop setting. Note that the B loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decorative pattern in a cycle B.
[Step D142] The control unit branches the process in accordance with the power-off gaming state. The control unit proceeds to Step D143 when the power-off gaming state is “during electric power support (generic power support)”, proceeds to Step D145 when the power-off gaming state is “big hit”, and sets the gaming state to In the case of "other (neither during power support nor during big hit)", the flow proceeds to step D147.

  In addition, the control unit (effect control device 300) can acquire the game state at power-off from the game control device 100. The effect control device 300 receives a power-on command from the game control device 100 after power-on. The power-on command includes various types of information such as model designation, decoration special figure 1 reservation number, decoration special figure 2 reservation number, and probability information. The power-on command includes power-on information for determining whether or not the power-on is a power failure recovery for restoring the state before the power-off. The effect control device 300 executes a process associated with the restoration of the power failure when the power-on information indicates the restoration of the power failure, and executes a process with the power-on when the information of the power activation does not indicate the restoration of the power failure. The power-on command includes information on the state before the power is turned off. Thereby, the effect control device 300 can determine the game progress-related decoration unit based on the state before the power is turned off. At power-on command is one of the single system command is processed by the single command processing (see FIG. 127) in step D62 received command analysis process.

  [Step D143] In the case of “during electricity support”, the control unit sets the normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L as a game progress related decoration unit. The setting of the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L in the game progress related decoration unit is based on the fact that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponds to the game progress related unit since the normal variable winning device 37 is related to the game progress during the regular telephone support.

  [Step D144] The control unit sets light-emitting units other than the normal fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 37L as non-game progress related decoration units. The setting of the light-emitting units other than the normal fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 37L in the non-game progress related decoration unit corresponds to the non-game progress related unit since the other decoration target parts are not related to the game progress during the ordinary power support. It depends.

  [Step D145] In the case of “during big hit”, the control unit sets the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L as a game progress related decoration unit. The setting of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L in the game progress related decoration unit is based on the fact that the special variable winning device 38 is related to the game progress during the big hit and corresponds to the game progress related unit.

  [Step D146] The control unit sets light-emitting units other than the special fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 38L as non-game progress related decoration units. The setting of the light-emitting units other than the special fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 38L in the non-game progress related decoration unit is based on the fact that the other decoration target parts do not relate to the game progress during the big hit and correspond to the non-game progress related unit. .

  [Step D147] In the case of “others”, the control unit sets all light-emitting units as non-game progress related decoration units. The setting of all the light emitting parts to the non-game progress related decoration part is based on the non-game progress related part because all the decoration target parts are not related to the game progress in the game state at the time of power failure recovery except during normal power support and big hit By the equivalent of

Note that the settings of the game progression related decoration section and the non-game progression related decoration section in each game state may be different depending on the models having different game properties.
[Step D148] The control unit sets a power failure restoration decoration pattern for the non-game progress related decoration unit. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly performs the decoration display with the power failure restoration decoration pattern in the cycle B for the non-game progression related decoration part.

[Step D149] The control unit sets the decorative pattern to the A-loop setting. The A loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decorative pattern at a period A different from the period B.
[Step D150] The control unit sets a power failure restoration decoration pattern for the game progress related decoration unit. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly performs the decoration display in the cycle A with the power failure restoration decoration pattern for the game progress related decoration part. After setting the power failure restoration decoration pattern for the game progress related decoration part, the control unit ends the power failure restoration decoration setting process. For example, the power failure restoration decoration pattern set in the game progress-related decoration section includes white blinking or white lighting for 100 ms. Further, the power failure restoration decoration pattern set in the game progress related decoration unit may be an enhanced light emission mode in which the light emission mode is emphasized more than the power failure restoration decoration pattern set in the non-game progress related decoration unit. For example, the power outage restoration decoration pattern set in the game progression related decoration unit may have a higher brightness than the power failure restoration decoration pattern set in the non-game progression related decoration unit, or may have a shorter brightness or color switching cycle. Or the like.

  Note that such an enhanced light emission mode may limit the duration to a predetermined time (for example, a preset time sufficiently longer than the cycle A or an event trigger such as a winning detection in the game progress-related section). .

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both decoration at the time of restoration from a power failure and alerting the normal variable prize device 37 or the special variable prize device 38. For example, when the power failure is restored, the gaming machine 10 may not be able to restore the display content of the display device 41 and may not be able to sufficiently inform the player of the current gaming state, but in a light emitting mode corresponding to the current gaming state. The non-game progress related decoration unit is controlled. At this time, since the gaming machine 10 controls the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L or the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L asynchronously with the non-game progress related decoration unit, the profit protection of the player can be secured. Therefore, in one aspect, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both a game effect according to the gaming state and alerting the player.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described fifth embodiment (including the first modification) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a game progress-related decoration section, a non-game progress-related decoration section, and a control section (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game progress related decoration unit (for example, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L) decorates the game progress related unit (for example, the special variable winning device 38) related to the game progress in a light emitting mode. The non-game progress related decoration portions (for example, the outer edge light-emitting group 18L and the inner edge light-emitting group 40L) decorate the non-game progress related portions (for example, the front frame 12 and the center case 40) that are not related to the game progress in a light-emitting manner. The control unit asynchronously controls the light emission mode of the game progress related decoration unit and the light emission mode of the non-game progress related decoration unit in a specific game state (for example, a big hit) where the player can advantageously proceed with the game.

  (2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a first game progress-related decoration section (for example, the special variable winning device light emitting section 38L) and a second game progress-related decoration section (for example, normal) as game progress related decoration sections. (Variable winning device light-emitting unit 37L). The first game progress related decoration unit and the second game progress related decorative unit decorate the game progress related unit in different game states, respectively (for example, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L has a special variable winning during a big hit). The device 38 is decorated, and the normal variable prize device light emitting unit 37L decorates the normal variable prize device 37 during the ordinary telephone support).

  The control unit sets the light emission mode of the first game progress relation decoration unit and the light emission mode of the second game progress relation decoration unit in the asynchronous control as a common light emission mode (for example, white blinking with a period of 100 ms).

  (3) The gaming machine 10 includes a game progress related decoration unit, a non-game progress related decoration unit, and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game progress related decoration unit (for example, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L) decorates the game progress related unit (for example, the special variable winning device 38) related to the game progress in a light emitting mode. The non-game progress related decoration portions (for example, the outer edge light-emitting group 18L and the inner edge light-emitting group 40L) decorate the non-game progress related portions (for example, the front frame 12 and the center case 40) that are not related to the game progress in a light-emitting manner. The control unit synchronously controls the light emission mode of the game progression related decoration unit and the light emission mode of the non-game progression related decoration unit in the first game state (for example, the normal state). In a second game state (for example, a big hit) where the game can proceed advantageously, the light emission mode of the game progress related decoration unit and the light emission mode of the non-game progress related decoration unit are asynchronously controlled.

  (4) In the gaming machine 10 of (3), the control unit sets the timing of starting the light emission mode of the game progress related decoration unit and the timing of starting the light emission mode of the non-game progress related decoration unit to coincide with each other in the synchronous control, In the asynchronous control, the start timing of the light emission mode of the game progress relation decoration unit is not coincident with the start timing of the light emission mode of the non-game progress relation decoration unit (for example, timing T12 and timing T121 in FIG. 149).

  (5) In the gaming machine 10 of (3), the control unit sets the timing of repeating the light emission mode of the game progress relation decoration unit and the timing of repeating the light emission mode of the non-game progress relation decoration unit to coincide with each other in the synchronous control, In the asynchronous control, the repetition timing of the light emission mode of the game progress relation decoration unit and the repetition timing of the light emission mode of the non-game progress relation decoration unit do not coincide (for example, timing T122 and timing T123 in FIG. 149).

  (6) In the gaming machine 10 of (3), the control unit sets the repetition period of the light emission mode of the game progress relation decoration unit to the repetition period of the light emission mode of the non-game progress relation decoration unit in the synchronous control, and performs the asynchronous control. , The repetition period of the light emission mode of the game progress relation decoration unit and the repetition period of the light emission mode of the non-game progress relation decoration unit do not match (for example, period TS1 and period TS2 in FIG. 149).

  (7) In the gaming machine 10 of (3), the control unit compares the repetition period of the light emission mode of the game progress relation decoration unit with the synchronous control in the asynchronous control and sets the short period (for example, the period with respect to the period TS1 in FIG. 149). TS2).

(8) In the gaming machine 10 of (7), the short-period light emission mode includes lighting.
(9) The gaming machine 10 includes a game progress-related decoration section, a non-game progress-related decoration section, a sound effect section, and a control section (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game progress related decoration unit (for example, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L) decorates the game progress related unit (for example, the special variable winning device 38) related to the game progress in a light emitting mode. The non-game progress related decoration portions (for example, the outer edge light-emitting group 18L and the inner edge light-emitting group 40L) decorate the non-game progress related portions (for example, the front frame 12 and the center case 40) that are not related to the game progress in a light-emitting manner. The sound effect parts (for example, the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b) perform effects by sound output. The control unit asynchronously controls the light emission mode of the game progress relation decoration unit with the audio output in a game state (for example, a big hit) where the player can advantageously proceed with the game, and sets the light emission mode of the non-game progress relation decoration unit as the audio output. Synchronous control is performed (for example, a period from timing T12 to timing T13 in FIG. 148).

  (10) In the gaming machine 10 of (9), the control unit sets the timing of starting the predetermined sound output by the sound effect unit and the start time of the light emission mode of the game progress relation decoration unit to be a timing that does not coincide with each other. the timing to match the start trigger of a predetermined light emission mode of the start trigger and non-game progress relationship escutcheon of the audio output (e.g., the timing T12 and the timing T121 in FIG. 149) to.

  In the gaming machine 10 (11) (9), the control unit, and repeatedly trigger the timing that does not match the lighting mode of the repeated trigger and game progress relationship escutcheon of predetermined audio output by the audio presentation unit, voice rendering unit The timing at which the predetermined sound output repetition timing coincides with the repetition timing of the light emitting mode of the non-game progress relation decoration unit is set to a timing (for example, timing T122 and timing T123 in FIG. 149).

  (12) In the gaming machine 10 of (9), the control unit makes the repetition period of the predetermined sound output by the sound effect unit and the repetition period of the light emission mode of the game progress relation decoration unit inconsistent, and the predetermined time by the sound effect unit The repetition period of the audio output and the repetition period of the light emitting mode of the non-game progress relation decoration unit are set to coincide (for example, the period TS1 and the period TS2 in FIG. 149).

  (13) The gaming machine 10 includes a game progress-related decoration section, a non-game progress-related decoration section, and a control section (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game progress related decoration unit (for example, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L) decorates the game progress related unit (for example, the special variable winning device 38) related to the game progress in a light emitting mode. Non game progress relationship escutcheon (e.g., outer light emission group 18L, inner light emission group 40L), the non-game progress related part which is not related to a game progress (e.g., front frame 12 and the center case 40) is decorated with a light emission mode of. When the power-on is detected, the control unit controls the decoration of the game progress-related decoration unit in an enhanced light emission mode that is more emphasized than the non-game progress-related decoration unit.

  (14) The gaming machine 10 of (13) has a first game progress-related decoration section (for example, the special variable winning device light-emitting section 38L) and a second game progress-related decoration section (for example, normal) as game progress-related decoration sections. (Variable winning device light-emitting unit 37L). The control unit selects the first game progress-related decoration unit or the second game progress-related decoration unit as the decoration control target of the highlighted light emission mode based on the game state at the time of power-off that is restored after the power is turned on.

  (15) In the gaming machine 10 of (13), the first game progress-related decoration section decorates a special prize port (for example, the special variable prize device 38) that can be awarded in a special game state (for example, a big hit). When the game state at the time of power-off is the special game state, the control unit selects the first game progress-related decoration unit as a decoration control target in the highlighted light emission mode.

  (16) In the gaming machine 10 of (13), the second game progress-related decoration unit decorates the specific winning opening (for example, the normal variable winning device 37), and the control unit specifies the gaming state when the power is turned off. When the player is in a gaming state (for example, during normal telephone support) that is advantageous for the player with respect to winning in the winning opening, the second game progress-related decoration section is selected as a decoration control target in the highlighted light emission mode.

  (17) In the gaming machine 10 of (13), the second game progress-related decoration unit (for example, the starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L) serves as a starting opening of the variable display game executed on the variable display device. for example, decorated start winning opening 36), the control unit, when detecting a reset of the game state of power-off, selecting the second game progress related decoration as the decorative control target enhancement lighting mode.

(18) In the gaming machine 10 of (13) to (17), the control unit continues the highlighted light emission mode for a predetermined time.
(19) In the gaming machine 10 of (13) to (17), the control unit continues the highlighted light emission mode until receiving an instruction of a new decoration mode.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment facilitates discrimination between the light emission mode of the abnormality notification (the abnormality notification mode) and the light emission mode of the game effect (the game effect mode), and achieves both the game effect and the abnormality notification. . First, the configuration of the decorative portion of the gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment and the light emission mode during normal times (no abnormality and abnormal) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the decorative portion of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment and an example of a light emission mode during normal times (no abnormality and abnormality).

The gaming machine 10 shown in (1) shows a light emitting mode in a normal state (no abnormality), and the gaming machine 10 shown in (2) shows a light emitting mode in a normal state (abnormal).
First, the configuration of the decorative section (light emitting section) of the gaming machine 10 will be described. The gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units including a frame decoration device 18, a push button light emitting unit 25L, and a handle light emitting unit 24L on the front frame 12. The light emitting section provided in the front frame (main body frame) 12 is an embodiment of the main body frame light emitting section. The frame decoration device 18 has an outer edge light emitting group 18L including a plurality of light emitting units. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is arranged in a row on the outer edge side of the game board 30 so as to surround the game board 30. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is one form of a row light emitting group. The push button light emitting unit 25L decorates the push button (option setting unit) 25 in a predetermined light emitting mode. For example, the push button light emitting unit 25L may be the push button LEDs 250 to 258 described with reference to FIG. 117, or may be a separately provided light emitting unit. The handle light emitting section 24L decorates the handle 24 with a predetermined light emitting mode.

These main body frame light emitting units perform a game effect in a light emitting mode common to a plurality of game models, and perform an abnormality notification in a light emitting mode common to a plurality of game models.
The gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units including an inner edge light emitting group 40L, a start winning opening light emitting unit 36L, a normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and a special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L on the game board 30. The light emitting units provided in these game boards 30 are one form of the game board light emitting units. The inner edge light emitting group 40L includes a plurality of light emitting units, and is provided in the center case 40 so as to surround the display device 41. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is arranged in a row on the inner edge side of the game board 30. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is one form of a row light emitting group. The starting winning opening light emitting portion 36L decorates the starting winning opening 36 in a predetermined light emitting mode. The normal fluctuation winning device light emitting section 37L decorates the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in a predetermined light emitting mode. The special fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 38L decorates the special fluctuation winning device 38 according to a predetermined light emission mode.

  These game board light emitting units perform a game effect in a light emitting mode corresponding to the game model. The gaming machine 10 does not perform the abnormality notification in the game board light emitting unit by entrusting the abnormality notification to the main frame light emitting unit. Note that the gaming machine 10 may perform the abnormality notification in the light emitting portion corresponding to the game machine by performing the abnormality notification in the game board light emitting portion in the light emitting mode corresponding to the game model.

  Next, abnormal notification of the gaming machine 10 during normal operation will be described. In addition, the normal time here means the time when there is no big hit (game state). In the gaming machine 10 shown in (1), in a state in which no abnormality has occurred, the main body frame light emitting portion and the game board light emitting portion each have a light emitting mode corresponding to the game state. For example, in the gaming machine 10 shown in (1), the same hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicates that the outer edge light-emitting group 18L and the inner edge light-emitting group 40L each have a light emission mode corresponding to a game state. The main frame light emitting section and the game board light emitting section do not necessarily need to emit light from all the light emitting sections. For example, the gaming machine 10 shown in (1) has a push button light emitting unit 25L, a handle light emitting unit 24L, a starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, a normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and a special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L. Indicates that the light is turned off, or that a light emission mode independent of the game state can be taken due to the occurrence of an event.

  In the gaming machine 10 shown in (2), in a state where an abnormality has occurred, the game board light emitting unit has a light emitting mode corresponding to the gaming state, and the main body light emitting unit has a light emitting mode corresponding to the abnormality. For example, in the gaming machine 10 shown in (2), a hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicates that the inner edge light emitting group 40L is a light emitting mode corresponding to a game state, and the outer edge light emitting group 18L is a light emitting mode corresponding to an abnormality. This is indicated by a hatching pattern (crossed oblique lines).

  In this manner, in the gaming machine 10, in normal times, the main frame light emitting section and the game board light emitting section cooperate to perform a game effect if no abnormality has occurred, and the game board light emitting section if the abnormality has occurred. The game production is in charge, and the body frame light emitting unit is in charge of the abnormality notification. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to distinguish between the light emission mode of the abnormality notification and the light emission mode of the game effect in the normal state, and causes the game room staff to recognize the abnormality of the game machine. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 has both the game effect and the abnormality notification at the normal time.

  Next, the configuration of the decorative portion of the gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment and the light emission mode at the time of a big hit (no abnormality and abnormality) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the decorative portion of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment and a light emission mode during a big hit (no abnormality and abnormal). The gaming machine 10 shown in (1) shows a light emitting mode at the time of a big hit (no abnormality), and the gaming machine 10 shown at (2) shows a light emitting mode at a big hit (abnormal).

  In the gaming machine 10 shown in (1), in a state where no abnormality has occurred, the main body frame light emitting portion and the game board light emitting portion each have a light emitting mode corresponding to a game state (big hit). For example, in the gaming machine 10 shown in (1), the same hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicates that the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L each have a light emitting mode corresponding to a gaming state (big hit). In the gaming machine 10 shown in (1), clockwise arrows indicate that the light emitting mode of the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the light emitting mode of the inner edge light emitting group 40L are clockwise iridescent.

  In the gaming machine 10 shown in (2), in a state where an abnormality has occurred, the game board light emitting unit has a light emitting mode according to the gaming state (big hit), and the main body light emitting unit corresponds to the abnormality during the big hit. It is. For example, in the gaming machine 10 shown in (2), the hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicates that the inner edge light emitting group 40L is in a light emitting mode corresponding to the gaming state (big hit), and the outer edge light emitting group 18L is abnormal during the big hit. The corresponding light emission mode is indicated by a hatching pattern (horizontal line). In the gaming machine 10 shown in (2), the clockwise arrow indicates that the light emitting mode of the inner edge light emitting group 40L is clockwise rainbow display, and the light emitting mode of the outer edge light emitting group 18L is counterclockwise rainbow color display. Is indicated by a counterclockwise arrow.

  In this manner, in the gaming machine 10, during the big hit, if no abnormality has occurred, the main frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit cooperate to perform a game effect. The game production is in charge, and the body frame light emitting unit is in charge of the abnormality notification. At this time, the gaming machine 10 makes the abnormality notification mode of the main body frame light emitting unit different from the normal abnormality notification mode. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish between the light emission mode of the abnormality notification during the big hit and the light emission mode of the game effect, so that the game machine staff can recognize the abnormality of the game machine. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 achieves both the game effect and the abnormality notification during the big hit.

  The light emission mode of the abnormality notification during such a big hit is such that when the light emission mode of the inner edge light emitting group 40L is clockwise iridescent display, the light emitting mode of the outer edge light emitting group 18L rotates in the opposite direction to the inner edge light emitting group 40L. Clockwise rainbow display. Such a light emission mode of the abnormality notification is a light emission mode that gives an observer (for example, a game room clerk) a sense of discomfort by comparing and observing the game performance when no abnormality has occurred. Therefore, such a gaming machine 10 can notify an observer of an abnormal state by giving an uncomfortable feeling.

  Further, such a gaming machine 10 can change the light emission mode of the abnormality notification in response to the game board light emitting section that changes the light emission mode according to the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can set a greater alerting power than setting the light emission mode of the abnormality notification to a common light emission mode for all game states. For example, even if the light emitting mode of the game board light emitting unit during the big hit is similar to the light emitting mode of the abnormality notification of the main body frame light emitting unit in the normal state, the gaming machine 10 still notifies the abnormality notification of the main body frame light emitting unit during the big hit. The alerting power during the big hit can be set by making the light emission mode different from the normal time. That is, in the related art, the light emitting mode of the game board light emitting unit that weakens the alertness of the light emitting mode of the abnormality notification of the main body frame light emitting unit is to be avoided, but such a gaming machine 10 has a large hit. The degree of freedom of the light emitting mode of the game board light emitting unit is expanded.

  Here, the light emission mode of the main body frame light emitting portion and the game board light emitting portion for each game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating an example of a light emission mode for each game state of the main frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit according to the sixth embodiment.

  The game board light emitting unit is in a normal state light emission mode when the game state is the normal state, and is in a big hit state light emission mode when the game state is the big hit state, regardless of whether or not an abnormality has occurred. The main body frame light emitting section is in a normal state light emission mode when the game state is the normal state and in a big hit state light emission mode when the game state is the big hit state, when there is no abnormality.

  On the other hand, when there is an abnormality, the main body frame light emitting portion is in an abnormality notification mode when the game state is the normal state, and is in a special abnormality notification mode when the game state is the big hit state. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 makes the abnormality notification mode of the main body frame light emitting unit different according to the game state, so that the alerting power by the abnormality notification mode of the main body frame light emitting unit which is the contrast of the light emitting mode of the game board light emitting unit. Can be improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, the game state in which the main body frame light emitting unit changes the abnormality notification mode is set to the normal state and the big hit state, but in two different game states (the first game state and the second game state). What is necessary is just that a main-body frame light emission part changes an abnormality alerting | reporting mode. In addition, the number of abnormality notification modes in which the main body frame light emitting units are different is not limited to two, but may be three or more.

[Floating decoration setting processing]
Next, a changing decoration setting process of setting a decoration pattern on the main frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit during the change of the special figure game, which is one of the normal states, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the changing decoration setting process in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. The changing decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D88 of the decoration setting process shown in FIG. 129 or 152.

  [Step D151] The control unit determines whether an error (abnormality) has occurred in the gaming machine 10. Control unit proceeds to step D152 when there is no error in the gaming machine 10, the process proceeds to step D153 when there is an error in the gaming machine 10.

  When detecting the occurrence and end of the error, the game control device 100 notifies the control unit (the effect control device 300) by an error notification command. Thereby, the effect control device 300 can detect the occurrence and the end of the error in the gaming machine 10. The errors that can be detected by the control unit include, for example, a front frame opening error, a game frame opening error, a shot ball out error, an overflow error, a payout error error, a switch error error, a large winning opening illegal winning error, a remaining ball error, a magnetic error, There are a vibration error, an illegal prize winning error, a board radio error, a frame radio error, and other errors. In addition, the control unit does not need to determine all errors notified by the game control device 100 as errors to be determined as to whether or not an error has occurred in step D151, and may limit the errors to some errors.

The error notification system command is one of the single system commands, and is processed by the single system command process (see FIG. 127) in step D62 of the received command analysis process.
[Step D152] The controller sets the changing decorative pattern to the main frame light emitting unit because no error to be notified by the main frame light emitting unit has occurred.

[Step D153] The control unit sets an error notification pattern in the main frame light emitting unit because an error to be notified by the main frame light emitting unit has occurred.
[Step D154] The control unit sets a changing decoration pattern on the game board light emitting unit regardless of whether an error has occurred. The control unit ends the changing decoration setting process after setting the changing decoration pattern in the game board light emitting unit.

[Round decoration setting process]
Next, the in-round decoration setting processing for setting a decoration pattern on the main frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit during the round of the special figure game in the big hit state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 159 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the round decoration setting process in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. The decoration setting process during the round is a process executed by the control unit in step D91 of the decoration setting process shown in FIG.

  [Step D161] control unit determines whether an error occurs in the gaming machine 10 (abnormality). The control unit proceeds to Step D162 when there is no error in the gaming machine 10, and proceeds to Step D163 when there is an error in the gaming machine 10. Note that the control unit does not need to determine all errors notified by the game control device 100 as errors to be determined in step D161 as to whether or not an error has occurred, and may limit the errors to some errors.

[Step D162] The controller sets the round decoration pattern to the main frame light emitting unit since no error to be notified by the main frame light emitting unit has occurred.
[Step D163] Since an error to be reported by the main frame light emitting unit has occurred, the control unit sets an in-round error notification pattern in the main frame light emitting unit. The error notification pattern during the round is different from the error notification pattern set in the main frame light emitting unit by the control unit in step D153 of the changing decoration setting process.

  [Step D164] The control unit sets a round decoration pattern on the game board light emitting unit regardless of whether an error has occurred. The control unit ends the round decoration setting process after setting the round decoration pattern in the game board light emitting unit.

  As described above, the control unit controls the main frame light emitting unit in a decoration (error notification) pattern according to the gaming state when an error to be notified by the main frame light emitting unit has occurred. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish the light emission mode of the abnormality notification and the light emission mode of the game effect regardless of the gaming state, and can achieve both the game effect and the error notification.

[Modification Example 1 of Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the sixth embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 in that, in a specific gaming state (during a big hit), the push button light emitting unit 25L performs an abnormality notification in place of the decorative light emitting device 18 (the outer edge light emitting group 18L). , Is different from the sixth embodiment.

  First, the configuration of the decorative portion of the gaming machine 10 according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment and the light emission mode in an abnormal state (normal state and big hit state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a decorative portion of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment and an example of a light emission mode in an abnormal state (normal state and big hit state). The gaming machine 10 shown in (1) shows a light emitting mode in an abnormal state (normal state), and the gaming machine 10 shown in (2) shows a light emitting mode in an abnormal state (big hit state).

  In the gaming machine 10 shown in (1), when an abnormality occurs in the normal state, a hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicates that the light emitting portion of the game board emits light according to the normal state. Further, the gaming machine 10 shown in (1), the hatching pattern (cross-hatched to be a light emitting mode decorative light emitting device 18 (outer light emission group 18L) and the handle-emitting portion 24L correspond to the abnormality each of the main frame emitting portion ).

  In the gaming machine 10 shown in (2), a hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicates that, in an abnormal state (big hit state), the game board light emitting portion and the decorative light emitting device 18 (outer edge light emitting group 18L) have a light emitting mode according to the big hit state. ). In the gaming machine 10 shown in (2), a hatching pattern (crossed diagonal lines) indicates that the push button light emitting unit 25L of the main frame light emitting unit is in a light emitting mode corresponding to the abnormality.

  In the gaming machine 10 shown in (2), clockwise arrows indicate that the light emitting mode of the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the light emitting mode of the inner edge light emitting group 40L are clockwise rainbow colors. Therefore, even in the event of an abnormality, the gaming machine 10 can cooperate with the main frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit to perform a gaming effect during a big hit.

  Thus, in the normal state, the gaming machine 10 performs the abnormality notification by the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the handle light emitting unit 24L, and performs the abnormality notification by the push button light emitting unit 25L in the big hit state. That is, the gaming machine 10 performs the abnormality notification by the light emitting unit corresponding to the game state among the main frame light emitting units. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform effective abnormality notification for each gaming state. In addition, since the gaming machine 10 can perform effective abnormality notification for each gaming state, it is possible to perform a game effect in cooperation with the game board light emitting portion and the remaining main body frame light emitting portion even in the event of an abnormality. Can be. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both game effects and abnormality notification.

  In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the abnormality notification is performed by the push button light emitting unit 25L in the big hit state, so that the abnormality notification does not disturb the game effect performed by the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L. Further, since the push button light emitting unit 25L is located at the upper edge of the upper plate 21 and is close to the upper plate ball outlet 22, it is easy for the player who checks the prize ball during the big hit to check the abnormality notification. . In addition, the abnormality notification by the push button light emitting unit 25L can be expected to have a check effect on a player who commits an illegal act.

  Here, the light emitting mode of the outer edge light emitting group 18L, the push button light emitting unit 25L, the handle light emitting unit 24L, and the inner edge light emitting group 40L for each game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating an example of a light emission mode for each game state of the outer edge light emitting group, the push button light emitting unit, the handle light emitting unit, and the inner edge light emitting group according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

  The inner edge light-emitting group 40L is a game board light-emitting unit, which is in a normal state light emission mode when the game state is the normal state, regardless of the presence or absence of abnormality, and is a big hit state light emission mode when the game state is the big hit state. It is.

  The outer edge light emitting group 18L, the push button light emitting unit 25L, and the handle light emitting unit 24L are body frame light emitting units. The outer edge light-emitting group 18L has a normal state light emission mode when the game state is the normal state and a large hit state light emission mode when the game state is the big hit state when no abnormality occurs. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality, the outer edge light emitting group 18L is in the abnormality notification mode when the game state is the normal state and is in the big hit state when the game state is the big hit state. As described above, the outer edge light emitting group 18L is in charge of the abnormality notification in the normal state, and is not in charge of the abnormality notification in the big hit state.

  The push button light emitting unit 25L, when there is no abnormality and the abnormality occurrence gaming state even with in the case of a normal state, is not set specific lighting mode. Thus, the push button light emitting unit 25L is in the state, charge setting operation or the like of game effects and plying in the demonstration in variable display, game effects by the event trigger. On the other hand, the push button light emitting unit 25L is in an abnormality notification mode when an abnormality occurs when the gaming state is the big hit state. As described above, the push button light emitting unit 25L is not in charge of the abnormality notification in the normal state, but is in charge of the abnormality notification in the big hit state.

  Further, the handle light emitting unit 24L is in an abnormality notification mode when an abnormality occurs when the gaming state is the normal state. On the other hand, no specific light emission mode is set in the handle light emitting unit 24L when there is no abnormality occurrence and when the game state is the big hit state even if abnormality occurs. Thus, the handle light emitting unit 24L can limit the light emission opportunity and emphasize the abnormality notification mode. As described above, the handle light emitting unit 24L is in charge of the abnormality notification in the normal state, and is not in charge of the abnormality notification in the big hit state.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can change the main body frame light-emitting portion in charge of the abnormality notification according to the game state at the time of occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can perform abnormality notification with high alertness regardless of the game effect for each gaming state. Such a gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish between the light emission mode of the abnormality notification and the light emission mode of the game effect, and can achieve both the game effect and the abnormality notification.

  In addition, the combination of the light emitting units that perform the light emission mode of the abnormality notification (the abnormality notification mode) and the light emission mode of the game effect (the game effect mode) is not limited to the combination of the body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit, but may be any other arbitrary value. May be combined.

[Modification 2 of Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. The gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the sixth embodiment is different from the sixth embodiment in that the abnormality notification mode of the main frame light emitting unit can be changed according to the game model.

  Here, light-emitting modes of the main body frame light-emitting portion and the game board light-emitting portion in different game states will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is a diagram illustrating an example of a gaming machine type light emitting mode of a main body frame light emitting unit and a game board light emitting unit of Modification 2 of the sixth embodiment.

  The game board light emitting unit is a light emitting mode corresponding to a game model regardless of whether or not an abnormality has occurred. For example, the light emission mode of the game model A is the light emission mode A regardless of the occurrence of the abnormality, and the light emission mode of the game model B is the light emission mode B regardless of the occurrence of the abnormality.

  On the other hand, the main body frame light emitting section has a common light emission mode regardless of the game model when no abnormality occurs, and has an abnormality notification mode corresponding to the game model when an abnormality occurs. For example, the abnormality notification mode of the game model A is the abnormality notification mode A, and the abnormality notification mode of the game model B is the abnormality notification mode B.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 makes the abnormality notification mode of the main body frame light emitting section different according to the game model, thereby notifying the abnormality notification of the main body frame light emitting section which is the contrast of the light emitting mode of the game board light emitting section depending on the game model. The alertness according to the aspect can be improved.

  In addition, when an abnormality occurs, the gaming machine 10 may have a common abnormality notification mode regardless of the game model in a normal game state, and may have an abnormality notification mode corresponding to the game model in a specific game state such as a big hit. Such a gaming machine 10 prioritizes the degree of freedom of the light emission mode for each game model during a big hit so as to maximize the effect of the game effect, and prioritizes easiness to understand by the common abnormality notification mode in the remaining game states. can do.

[Round decoration setting process]
Next, the in-round decoration setting processing for setting a decoration pattern on the main frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit during the round of the special figure game in the big hit state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the round decoration setting process in the effect control device according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. The decoration setting process during the round is a process executed by the control unit in step D91 of the decoration setting process shown in FIG.

  [Step D171] The control unit determines whether or not an error has occurred (abnormality has occurred) in the gaming machine 10. The control unit proceeds to Step D172 when there is no error in the gaming machine 10, and proceeds to Step D173 when there is an error in the gaming machine 10. Note that the control unit does not need to determine all errors notified by the game control device 100 as errors to be determined in step D171 as to whether or not an error has occurred, and may limit the errors to some errors.

[Step D172] The control unit sets the round decoration pattern in the main frame light emitting unit since no error to be notified by the main frame light emitting unit has occurred.
[Step D173] The control unit determines a game model in the gaming machine 10, and branches in accordance with the game model.

  Note that the game control device 100 notifies the control unit (effect control device 300) of the game model by a power-on command or a power failure recovery command. Thereby, the effect control device 300 can detect a game model in the gaming machine 10. Note that the control unit does not necessarily need to determine a game model in which a specific game model has been specified, and it is sufficient that the control unit can specify a model classification for separating abnormal notification modes.

  The power-on command and the power failure recovery command are one of single-shot commands, and are processed by single-shot command processing (see FIG. 127) in step D62 of the received command analysis processing.

[Step D174] Since the determination result of the game model is the game model A, the control unit sets the in-round error notification pattern A (abnormal notification mode A) in the main frame light emitting unit.
[Step D175] The control unit sets the in-round error notification pattern B (abnormal notification mode B) in the main frame light emitting unit because the determination result of the game model is the game model B.

  [Step D176] The control unit sets a round decoration pattern in the game board light emitting unit regardless of whether an error has occurred. The control unit ends the round decoration setting process after setting the round decoration pattern in the game board light emitting unit.

  As described above, when an error to be notified by the main frame light emitting unit has occurred, the control unit controls the main frame light emitting unit in a decoration (error notification) pattern according to the game model. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish between the light emission mode of the abnormality notification and the light emission mode of the game effect according to the game model, and can achieve both the game effect and the abnormality notification.

The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment (including the first and second modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a main body frame light-emitting portion (outer edge light-emitting group 18L, push button light-emitting portion 25L, handle light-emitting portion 24L, and the like), a game board light-emitting portion (inner edge light-emitting group 40L), and a controller (game control device). 100, effect control device 300). The main body frame light emitting unit is provided in the main body frame (front frame 12) with a plurality of light emitting units arranged in a row. The game board light-emitting unit is provided on a game board (game board 30) in which a plurality of light-emitting units are arranged in a row in parallel with the main body frame light-emitting unit and detachably attached to the main body frame. When no abnormality is detected, the control unit moves the main frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit in a first moving light emitting mode in which a predetermined light emitting mode moves in the same direction (for example, clockwise rainbow display). When a control is performed and an abnormality is detected, a second moving light emitting mode in which the main frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit are moved in different directions in a predetermined light emitting manner (for example, the game board light emitting unit is clockwise rainbow colored display) , The main frame light emitting unit is controlled in a counterclockwise rainbow color display).

(2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) has a main frame light emitting unit, and includes a transparent member holding frame rotatably mounted on the main frame.
(3) The control unit switches the moving direction of the predetermined light emitting mode in the main frame light emitting unit between the first moving light emitting mode and the second moving light emitting mode.

(4) The control unit switches the moving direction of the predetermined light emitting mode in the game board light emitting unit between the first moving light emitting mode and the second moving light emitting mode.
(5) The gaming machine 10 includes a main body frame light emitting unit (18L of outer edge light emitting unit, 25L of push button light emitting unit, 24L of handle light emitting unit, etc.), a game board light emitting unit (40L of inner edge light emitting group), and a control unit (game control device). 100, effect control device 300). The main body frame light emitting unit is provided on the main body frame (front frame 12) with a plurality of light emitting units arranged in a ring. The game board light-emitting unit is provided on a game board (game board 30) having a plurality of light-emitting units arranged in an annular shape independent of the main body frame light-emitting unit and detachably attached to the main body frame. When no abnormality is detected, the control unit moves the main frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit in a first moving light emitting mode in which a predetermined light emitting mode moves in the same direction (for example, clockwise rainbow display). When a control is performed and an abnormality is detected, a second moving light emitting mode in which the main frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit are moved in different directions in a predetermined light emitting manner (for example, the game board light emitting unit is clockwise rainbow colored display) , The main frame light emitting unit is controlled in a counterclockwise rainbow color display).

(6) The gaming machine 10 of (5) includes a transparent member holding frame rotatably mounted on the main body frame, and the transparent member holding frame includes a main body frame light emitting unit.
(7) The gaming machine 10 of (5) includes an operation unit capable of accepting a player's operation on the main body frame, and includes a main body frame light emitting unit on the operation unit.

(8) The operation unit of (7) is the operation unit (operation unit 24) of the hit ball launching device.
(9) The operation unit (7) is an option setting unit (option setting unit 25) that receives setting operations for various options.

(10) The control unit of (5) switches the moving direction of the predetermined light emitting mode in the main frame light emitting unit between the first moving light emitting mode and the second moving light emitting mode.
(11) The control unit of (5) switches a moving direction of a predetermined light emitting mode in the game board light emitting unit between the first moving light emitting mode and the second moving light emitting mode.

The gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment (including the first and second modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a main body frame light-emitting unit (the outer edge light-emitting group 18L, the push button light-emitting unit 25L, the handle light-emitting unit 24L, and the like), and a control unit (the game control device 100, the effect control device 300). The main frame light emitting unit is provided on the main frame (front frame 12). The control unit controls the main body frame light emitting unit in a first light emitting mode (anomaly notification mode) when an abnormality is detected in a first gaming state (for example, a normal state), and a second mode different from the first gaming state. When the abnormality is detected in the gaming state (big hit state), the main frame light emitting unit is controlled in the second light emitting mode (special abnormality notification mode) different from the first light emitting mode.

  (2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) has a game board (game board 30) which is detachably attached to the main body frame and has a game board light emitting portion (inner edge light emitting group 40L), and a main body frame light emitting portion. And a transparent member holding frame rotatably mounted on the body frame.

(3) In the gaming machine 10 of (2), in the second gaming state, the light emitting mode of the game board light emitting unit is common regardless of the presence or absence of abnormality detection.
(4) In the second game state, the control unit in (1) controls the outer edge light emitting group 18L in the second light emitting mode.

  (5) The control unit of (1) controls the outer edge light emitting group 18L in the first light emitting mode in the first gaming state, and controls the push button light emitting unit 25L or the handle light emitting unit 24L in the second gaming state to the second light emitting state. Is controlled in the light emission mode.

  (6) The gaming machine 10 includes a main frame light emitting unit, a game board light emitting unit, and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The main body frame light emitting section (the outer edge light emitting group 18L, the push button light emitting section 25L, the handle light emitting section 24L, etc.) is provided on the main body frame (the front frame 12). The game board light emitting section (the inner edge light emitting group 40L) is provided on a game board (game board 30) which is detachably attached to the main body frame. When the game board is of the first type (game type, game machine type, and the like), the control unit controls the light emission mode of the main body frame light emission unit at the time of abnormality detection in the first light emission mode. If it is a type different from the second type, controls the light emitting mode of the main body frame emitting portion of the abnormality detected by the first light emitting mode is different from the second lighting mode.

  (7) When detecting an abnormality in the first game state (normal state), the control unit of (6) sets the light emission mode of the main frame light emitting unit to the case where the game board is the first type and the case where the game board is the second type When the abnormality is detected in the second game state (big hit state), the light emission mode of the main frame light emitting unit when the game board is of the first type is set to the first light emission mode. The light emitting mode of the main frame light emitting unit when the game board is of the second type is referred to as a second light emitting mode.

(8) In the gaming machine 10 of (7), in the second gaming state, the light emitting mode of the game board light emitting unit is common regardless of the presence or absence of abnormality detection.
[Seventh embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment can guide a player to a target of a game ball by a light emission mode of a light emitting unit provided on the game board 30 in a predetermined game state. First, the configuration of the decorative portion of the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment and a light emission mode in a normal state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration and a light emission mode of a decoration unit in the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. The gaming machine 10 shown in (1) shows a light emission mode during normal times (before power failure occurs), and the gaming machine 10 shown in (2) shows a light emission mode when power failure is restored.

  First, the configuration of the decorative section (light emitting section) of the gaming machine 10 will be described. The gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units including the frame decoration device 18 on the front frame 12. The light emitting unit provided in the front frame (main body frame) 12 is an embodiment of the main body frame light emitting unit. The frame decoration device 18 has an outer edge light emitting group 18L including a plurality of light emitting units. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is arranged in a row on the outer edge side of the game board 30 so as to surround the game board 30. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is one form of a row light emitting group.

These main body frame light emitting units perform a game effect in a light emitting mode common to a plurality of game models, and perform an abnormality notification in a light emitting mode common to a plurality of game models.
The gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units including an inner edge light emitting group 40L, a gate light emitting unit 34L, a starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, a normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and a special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L. Prepare for 30. The light emitting unit provided in the game board 30 is one form of the game board light emitting unit. The inner edge light emitting group 40L includes a plurality of light emitting units, and is provided in the center case 40 so as to surround the display device 41. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is arranged in a row on the inner edge side of the game board 30. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is one form of a row light emitting group.

  The gate light emitting section 34L decorates the ordinary symbol starting gate (ordinary symbol starting gate) 34 in a predetermined light emitting mode. The starting winning opening light emitting portion 36L decorates the starting winning opening 36 in a predetermined light emitting mode. The normal fluctuation winning device light emitting section 37L decorates the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in a predetermined light emitting mode. The special fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 38L decorates the special fluctuation winning device 38 according to a predetermined light emission mode. The game board light emitting unit performs a game effect in a light emitting mode corresponding to the game model.

  The gaming machine 10 guides a player to a target of a game ball in a predetermined game state. The gaming machine 10 shown in (1) is during special figure time reduction (during regular telephone support). I have.

  The gaming machine 10 emits light in the guide mode (for example, white lighting or white blinking with a period of 100 ms) of the normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L, and turns off the other game board light emitting units. Also, the gaming machine 10 turns off the main frame light emitting unit. For example, in the gaming machine 10 shown in (1), the hatching pattern (crossed diagonal lines) indicates that the normal fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 37L emits light in the guide mode, and that the remaining light-emitting units are turned off. Indicated by

  Such a gaming machine 10 can guide the player to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as an aim of the game ball. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can appropriately make the player pay attention to the target of the game ball, so that the game guidance effect is high for an unguided player.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 guides the player as an aim of the game ball from among the general-purpose starting gate 34, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38, which are guide object candidates. One target (guidance target portion) can be selected according to the game state. Also, the gaming machine 10 selects one guidance target unit from the guidance target candidates according to the gaming state, but may select two or more. Further, the guidance target section is not limited to the range exemplified above, and a required gate, a winning opening, and the like can be set according to the model of the gaming machine 10.

  For convenience of description, a light emitting unit corresponding to the guide target unit is referred to as a guide light emitting unit, and a light emitting unit which is a contrast to the guide light emitting unit is referred to as a control light emitting unit. The range of the control light-emitting portion may be a light-emitting portion related to all decorations except for the guide light-emitting portion, or a light-emitting portion having a predetermined relationship with the guide light-emitting portion (for example, a positional relationship near the guide light-emitting portion). It may be limited to a part. In this case, the gaming machine 10 sets a control light emitting unit for each guide light emitting unit.

  In the case of a power failure recovery from a power supply interruption while guiding the player to the target of the game ball, the gaming machine 10 emits light in the guide light emitting section in the guide mode as shown in (2), and the remaining light emission. The part emits light in a recovery game state mode corresponding to the recovery game state. The recovery-state game state is a light emission mode that is set in advance for each game state. For example, a normal state (during symbol fluctuation) is blinking red, and a normal state (during symbol stop) is blinking green. For example, in the gaming machine 10 shown in (2), the hatching pattern (crossed diagonal lines) indicates that the normal fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 37L emits light in the guide mode, and the remaining light-emitting units are in the recovery game mode. Are shown by hatching patterns (parallel oblique lines).

  Such a gaming machine 10 can guide the normal variable winning device 37 to a player as a target of a game ball even after recovery from a power failure. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to the gaming state in a state where the display contents on the display device 41 are not necessarily restored due to the restoration of the power failure from the power interruption.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 has a light emission mode in which the guide effect to the player is lower than before the power failure, but assists the player in restarting the game by guiding the game state together with the aim of the game ball. The gaming machine 10 can improve the game guidance effect for a player who forgets the state before the power failure due to the power failure time.

  Next, display states before and after a power failure of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a view illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating a display state before and after a power failure of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment.

  The power supply to the gaming machine 10 is stopped by the power failure at the timing T10, the power supply is not performed between the timing T10 and the timing T11, and the power supply is restarted at the timing T11.

  The gaming state of the gaming machine 10 before the occurrence of the power failure (before the timing T10) is under normal power support. The gaming machine 10 turns on the guide light-emitting unit (the normal fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 37L) and turns off the control light-emitting unit (light-emitting units other than the normal fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 37L). Further, the gaming machine 10 displays on the display device 41 in an effect mode corresponding to the gaming state during the support of the ordinary electric power (see FIG. 164 (1)).

  In the gaming machine 10, when the power supply is stopped at the timing T11 after the power supply is stopped at the timing T10, the gaming control device 100 and the effect control device 300 execute the initialization process, respectively. The game control device 100 returns to the game state at the time of power-off because the backup power supply unit 420 holds the data in the RAM 111C inside the game microcomputer 111 during the power loss. The game control device 100 transmits a power failure recovery command to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 receives the power failure recovery command and restores the effect control. However, the effect control device 300 cannot continuously restore the effect before the power failure because information on the effect before the power failure has been lost.

  Effect control device 300, the game state based on the power recovery command to identify that it is in Hiroshi conductive support, turns on the guide light emitting portion, turns off the control light-emitting portion. Further, effect control device 300 causes display device 41 to display an initialization display mode (for example, a message such as “Please wait a moment.”). The power failure restoration command includes information that can specify the gaming state. For example, the power failure recovery command includes information that can specify whether there is a probability change or whether there is a general power support.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 can quickly guide the target of the gaming ball even after restoration from the power failure. Note that the effect control device 300 requires time for an initialization process (for example, expansion of image data) performed by the VDP 312. Therefore, the display device 41 keeps the game state until the VDP 312 ends the initialization process. it is impossible to perform display corresponding to.

  When the VDP 312 completes the initialization process at the timing T13, the effect control device 300 displays a recovery display mode (for example, a message such as “Please wait a moment.” Or “Wait for command reception”) on the display device 41. Effect control device 300 continues to light the guide light-emitting unit, and emits the control light-emitting unit in a light-emission mode upon restoration. The light emission mode at the time of restoration is a display corresponding to the game state at the time of restoration, and is set in advance. The effect control device 300 causes the control light-emitting unit to blink in a predetermined color as a recovery light-emission mode when the gaming state is in the normal power support mode, for example.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 can quickly guide the target of the gaming ball even after restoration from the power failure. Note that the effect control device 300 may not be able to perform an effect in an effect mode according to the game state until receiving a command following the power failure recovery command from the game control device 100. However, when there is no update of the game state, the game control device 100 does not always transmit the command following the power failure recovery command. Even in such a case, the gaming machine 10 can cause the control light-emitting unit to emit light in the light-emission-at-restoration mode based on the power failure restoration command (see FIG. 164 (2)).

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can assist the player in restarting the game by guiding the gaming state together with the aim of the gaming ball. Accordingly, the gaming machine 10, the player that forgets state before the power failure by the power failure time, it is possible to improve the game guiding effect.

  When the effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100 at timing T14, the gaming machine 10 can perform an effect according to the gaming state. For example, the gaming machine 10 turns on the guide light emitting unit and turns off the control light emitting unit. In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs display on the display device 41 in an effect mode corresponding to the gaming state during the ordinary power support.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 turns off the control light-emitting unit from the timing T12 to the timing T13, but may emit light in the recovery light-emitting mode similarly to the timing T13 to the timing T14.

  Next, a recovery light emission mode for each game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating an example of a light emission mode for each game state of the specific light emitting unit and the non-specific light emitting unit according to the seventh embodiment.

  The effect control device 300, based on the information that can specify the game state included in the power failure restoration command, the game state “low probability state (without general power support)” and the game state “low probability state (with general power support)” , And the gaming state “high-probability state (without ordinary power support)” and the gaming state “high-probability state (with ordinary power support)”.

  In the gaming state “low probability state (with ordinary power support)” and the game state “high probability state (with ordinary power support)”, the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L decorating the normal variable winning device 37 is used as a guide light emitting unit, The remaining light emitting portions are set as control light emitting portions. Gaming state "high probability state (Hiroshiden not supported)" is the start winning opening the light-emitting portion 36L to decorate the start winning opening 36 and guide the light emitting unit, and controls the light-emitting portion and the remainder of the light-emitting portion.

  The game state "Low probability state (with general power support)" and the game state "High probability state (without general power support)" and the game state "High probability state (with general power support)" show the aim of the game ball. As the guide light emission mode, the guide light emission unit is turned on and the control light emission unit is turned off.

  In the gaming state “low probability state (with ordinary power support)”, the guide light-emitting unit is turned on and the control light-emitting unit is blinked at a high speed (for example, blinking at a period of 200 ms) as the light emission mode at the time of restoration. In the gaming state "high probability state (no ordinary power support)", as the light emission mode at the time of recovery, the guide light emitting unit is turned on, and the control light emitting unit is alternately turned on at low speed (for example, 500 ms in two systems with different timings of turning on and off). Cycle). In the gaming state "high probability state (with normal power support)", the light emission mode at the time of restoration is such that the guide light emitting section is turned on and the control light emitting section is alternately turned on at high speed (for example, 200 ms in two systems with different timings of turning on and off). Cycle).

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 can assist the player in restarting the game by guiding the game state together with the aim of the game ball after the restoration of the power failure. Note that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily guide the target of the game ball in all game states, and does not guide the target of the game ball in the game state “low probability state (no ordinary power support)”, for example. .

  Further, the gaming machine 10 may be a device that guides a target of a game ball based on a game state other than the illustrated game state. For example, when the gaming machine 10 sets the passing of the game ball at a predetermined gate as one of the jackpot start conditions (game state transition condition), the gaming machine 10 sets a state of waiting for the game ball at the predetermined gate to pass the game ball. Can be set to a game state. At this time, the game control device 100 can include information that can specify the game state in the power failure restoration command.

[Power restoration restoration decoration processing]
Next, the power failure restoration decoration setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a power failure restoration decoration setting process in the effect control device of the seventh embodiment. The power outage restoration decoration setting process of the seventh embodiment is a process executed by the control unit (the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300) instead of the process executed in step D85 of the decoration setting process (FIG. 129). is there.

  [Step D181] control unit gaming state determines whether or not the main guiding gaming state. The guidance required game state is a game state in which a target point of a game ball is guided, for example, a game state shown in FIG. 166. The control unit proceeds to Step D182 when the gaming state is the required guidance gaming state, and proceeds to Step D185 when the gaming state is not the required guidance gaming state.

  [Step D182] The control unit determines whether the initialization of the VDP 312 has been completed. The control unit proceeds to Step D183 when the initialization of the VDP 312 is not completed, and proceeds to Step D184 when the initialization of the VDP 312 is completed.

[Step D183] The control unit sets the guide light-emitting unit to the lighting setting, sets the control light-emitting unit to the light-off setting, and ends the power failure restoration decoration setting process.
[Step D184] The control unit sets the guide light-emitting unit to the lighting setting, sets the non-specific light-emitting unit to the light emission mode setting at the time of restoration, and ends the power failure restoration decoration setting processing.

[Step D185] The control unit sets a power failure restoration decoration pattern for the light emitting unit, and ends the power failure restoration decoration setting process.
The decoration pattern set in this way continues until the effect control device 300 receives from the game control device 100 a command that allows the effect contents to be returned to normal. Thereby, if the gaming state before the power failure is the guidance required gaming state, the gaming machine 10 can continue the game guidance from the time of the power recovery. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can guide the game state before the power failure to a player or a game room clerk by setting a decoration pattern according to the game state before the power failure.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described seventh embodiment has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a gaming board 30 and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game board 30 has a first light emitting unit (for example, a normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L) and a second light emitting unit (for example, an outer edge light emitting group 18L and an inner edge light emitting group 40L). The control unit sets the first light emitting unit to a first light emitting mode (guide light emitting mode: lighting), and sets the second light emitting unit to a second light emitting mode (guide light emitting mode: off) different from the first light emitting mode. When the power failure occurs in the first light emission control state (guide light emission mode control state), the first light emission unit is set to the first light emission mode and the second light emission unit is set to a second light emission mode different from the second light emission mode after the power failure is restored. Control is performed in a second light emission control state (restoration light emission mode control state), which is the third light emission mode (restoration light emission mode).

  (2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) is detachably attached to a main body frame (front frame 12) and has a game board (game board 30) having a game board light emitting portion (inner edge light emitting group 40L); A transparent member holding frame that has a frame light emitting portion (outer edge light emitting group 18L) and is rotatably mounted on the main body frame.

  (3) The gaming machine 10 includes a guide target unit (for example, the normal variable winning device 37), a first light emitting unit (for example, the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L), and a second light emitting unit (for example, outer edge light emitting device). Group 18L, inner edge light emitting group 40L), and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The guidance target section is a target for game guidance. The first light emitting unit is provided at a position corresponding to the guidance target unit. The second light emitting unit is provided at a position that does not correspond to the guidance target unit. The control unit sets the first light emitting unit to a first light emitting mode (guide light emitting mode: lighting) for guiding the guide target unit and turns off the second light emitting unit to a first light emitting control state (guide light emitting mode control). State), after the power failure is restored, the first light emitting unit is set to the first light emitting mode, and the second light emitting unit is set to the second light emitting mode according to the game state at the time of the power failure restoration (light emitting mode at the time of restoration). In the second light emission control state (the light emission mode control state at the time of restoration).

(4) The gaming machine 10 of (3) selects a guidance target portion from two or more guidance target candidates according to the gaming state.
(5) In the gaming machine 10 of (4), the command transmitted from the game control device to the effect control device at the time of restoration of the power failure includes the game state at the time of restoration of the power failure, and the production control device includes the game at the time of restoration of the power failure contained in the command. The guidance target part is selected based on the state.

(6) The gaming state at the time of power failure recovery in (5) includes a state with a probability change or a state without a probability change.
(7) The game state at the time of restoration from the power failure in (5) includes a state with ordinary power support or a state without ordinary power support.

(8) The game state at the time of restoration from power failure in (5) includes a state of waiting for establishment of a game state transition condition.
[Modification 1 of Seventh Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment turns off the light emitting unit during the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 at the time of restoration from power failure. First, an initialization operation of the board effect device in the game board of the gaming machine 10 according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 and 169. FIG. 168 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of an initialization operation of the board effect device in the game board according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 169 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of an initialization operation of the board effect device in the game board according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment.

  The board production device 44 (44a, 44b, 44c) performs a series of initialization operations in the order shown from (1) to (5) when the power outage is restored. The initialization operation is an operation for confirming whether or not the board effect device 44 operates normally. For example, the gaming machine 10 (the effect control device 300) performs the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 by monitoring the effect switch 47 provided for each board effect device 44. The effect combination switch 47 is, for example, an effect motor switch for detecting an initial position and the like of an effect motor for driving the board effect device 44, and the ON / OFF state is monitored by the effect device switch 44.

  Gaming board 30 shown in (1) shows a board presentation device 44 in initialization operation starts, a display device 41, a state of inner light emission group 40L. At this time, the board effect device 44 (44a, 44b, 44c) is still at the initial position. That is, the board effect device 44 is at a position where it does not interfere with the display area of the display device 41. Here, that the board effect device 44 does not interfere with the display area of the display device 41 means that the visibility of the display content on the display device 41 is not hindered by the board effect device 44. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is turned off (white light indicates that the light emitting unit is turned off). In the game board 30 shown in (1), the inner edge light emitting group 40L is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game board light emitting unit and the body frame light emitting unit may be turned off.

  The gaming board 30 shown in (2) shows the state of the board rendering device 44, the display device 41, and the inner edge light emitting group 40L after the initializing operation and after the gaming board 30 shown in (1). . At this time, the board effect device 44a of the board effect device 44 operates to the position during the board effect, and the board effect devices 44b and 44c are still at the initial position. That is, the board effect device 44a is at a position where it can interfere with the display area of the display device 41. However, when the display content displayed by the display device 41 is the initialization display mode, the board effect device 44a is not necessarily provided in the display device 41 because the display content is provisional display content until the initialization display mode returns to normal. Does not hinder the visibility of the displayed content.

  The gaming board 30 shown in (3) shows the state of the board rendering device 44, the display device 41, and the inner edge light emitting group 40L after the initialization board shown in (2) after the start of the initialization operation. . At this time, among the board effect devices 44, the board effect devices 44b and 44c operate to the position during the board effect, and all of the board effect devices 44 are at the position during the board effect. That is, the board effect devices 44a, 44b, and 44c are at positions where they can interfere with the display area of the display device 41. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is off.

  The gaming board 30 shown in (4) shows the state of the board rendering device 44, the display device 41, and the inner edge light emitting group 40L after the initialization operation is started and after the gaming board 30 shown in (3). . At this time, among the board effect devices 44, the board effect devices 44b and 44c operate from the position during the board effect to the initial position, and only the board effect device 44a is at the position during the board effect. That is, the board effect device 44a is at a position where it can interfere with the display area of the display device 41. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is off.

  The game board 30 shown in (5) shows the state of the board rendering device 44, the display device 41, and the inner edge light emitting group 40L after the start of the initialization operation and after the game board 30 shown in (4). . At this time, the board effect device 44a operates from the position during the board effect to the initial position, and ends the initialization operation by setting all of the board effect devices 44 to the initial position. That is, the board effect device 44 is at a position where it cannot interfere with the display area of the display device 41. By the end of the initialization operation of the board effect device 44, the inner edge light-emitting group 40L ends the turning-off and becomes a required lighting mode (a hatching pattern (cross hatching) indicates that the light-emitting unit is in the required lighting mode).

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 turns off the inner edge light emitting group 40L during the initialization operation of the board effect device 44, thereby indicating to the player that the game state is not normal. That is, the gaming machine 10 can clearly distinguish the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the restoration of the power failure from the operation in the game effect. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the possibility of giving a misunderstanding in the progress of the game to the player, and can suppress the start of the game by the player during the initialization operation of the board rendering device 44 after the restoration of the power failure. That is, the gaming machine 10 has a game start check function during the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the restoration of the power failure.

  Next, the display of the display device 41 during the initialization of the board effect device 44 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the display device in which the board effect device in the game board according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment is performing an initialization operation.

  The game board 30 is in the process of initializing the board effect device 44 after the restoration of the power failure, and shows a state in which the symbol fluctuation display is being performed on the display device 41 by winning the winning prize opening 36. The board effect device 44a is at a board effect position (see FIG. 168 (2) or FIG. 169 (4)) that can interfere with the display area of the display device 41, and interferes with the display area of the display device 41 to visually recognize the design fluctuation. Is impaired. In normal times, the display device 41 performs display in cooperation with the operation of the board effect device 44 even when the board effect device 44 operates, so that the board effect device 44a interferes with the display area of the display device 41. No problem. However, the symbol fluctuation during the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the restoration of the power failure is an operation that is not coordinated with the operation of the board effect device 44 (non-cooperative operation), so that the visibility of the player may be impaired. .

  The gaming machine 10 suppresses the occurrence of a non-cooperative operation by the above-described game start check function, and prevents an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the player. In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs the symbol variation display on the display device 41 even during the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the restoration of the power failure, but this is because the result of the variation display game is directly related to the profit of the player. It is intended to provide a higher level of protection for profits.

  Next, a display state of the gaming machine 10 after restoration from a power failure will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a view illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating a display state of the gaming machine according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment after restoration from a power failure.

  The power supply of the gaming machine 10 is restarted at the timing T20 from the power outage state in which the power supply is stopped. The game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 each execute an initialization process after the power supply is restarted. The game control device 100 transmits a power failure recovery command to the effect control device 300. At timing T21, the effect control device 300 receives the power failure restoration command and restores the effect control.

  The effect control device 300 starts the initialization operation of the board effect device 44, turns off the light emitting unit, and sets the display on the display device 41 to an initial display mode (for example, a message such as "Please wait a moment."). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the restoration of the power failure by turning off the light emitting unit.

  Further, for example, even if the symbol change is started on the display device 41 due to the winning in the starting winning opening 36 at the timing T22, the effect control device 300 continues the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 and the turning off of the light emitting unit. . As a result, the gaming machine 10 continues the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the restoration of the power failure even if the symbol change is started on the display device 41. In addition, the gaming machine 10 continues to turn off the light emitting unit, and specifies the initialization operation of the board effect device 44.

  Further, at timing T23, when the initialization of the VDP 312 is completed, the effect control device 300 changes the display on the display device 41 to a recovery display mode (for example, a message such as “Please wait a moment.” Or “Wait for command reception”). I do. Effect control unit 300, while the recovery display mode the display of the display device 41, to continue the initialization operation until the initialization operation of the power is restored after the board effect device 44 is completed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 continues to turn off the light emitting unit, and specifies the initialization operation of the board effect device 44.

  Gaming machine 10, the initialization operations of the board effect device 44 after the power is restored at the timing T24 is completed, switch the display mode of the light emitting portion to the recovery time of lighting mode. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the completion of the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the restoration of the power failure.

  When receiving the command from the game control device 100 at the timing T25, the effect control device 300 controls the light emission of the light emitting unit in the game state light emission mode according to the game state, and controls the display device 41 in the game state display mode according to the game state. Display control.

[Power restoration restoration decoration processing]
Next, the power failure restoration decoration setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a power failure restoration decoration setting process in the effect control device according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment. The power outage restoration decoration setting process of the first modification of the seventh embodiment is executed by the control unit (the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300) instead of the process executed in step D85 of the decoration setting process (FIG. 129). This is the process to be performed.

  [Step D191] The control unit determines whether or not the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 is completed. The control unit proceeds to Step D192 when the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 is completed, and proceeds to Step D193 when the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 is not completed.

[Step D192] The control unit turns off the light emitting unit, and ends the power failure restoration decoration setting process.
[Step D193] The control unit sets a power failure restoration decoration pattern for the light emitting unit, and ends the power failure restoration decoration setting process.

  The decoration pattern set in this way continues until the effect control device 300 receives from the game control device 100 a command that allows the effect contents to be returned to normal. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the restoration of the power failure.

The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a gaming board 30 and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game board 30 includes a light emitting unit (for example, the inner edge light emitting group 40L) and a rendering device (the board rendering device 44). The effect device has a movable part that can be converted into a first state (initial state) and a second state (effect state). The control unit performs initialization control for setting the movable unit of the effect device to the first state and the second state. The control unit turns off the light emitting unit during the initialization control.

  (2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) is detachably attached to a main body frame (front frame 12) and has a game board (game board 30) having a game board light emitting portion (inner edge light emitting group 40L); A transparent member holding frame that has a frame light emitting portion (outer edge light emitting group 18L) and is rotatably mounted on the main body frame.

(3) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a display device (display device 41) on the gaming board 30. The movable portion greatly interferes with the display area of the display device in the second state as compared with the first state.
(4) The control unit of (1) performs display according to the progress of the game on the display device during the initialization control.

(5) The gaming machine of (4) is capable of executing the variable display game, and the control unit performs the symbol variable display on the display device.
[Eighth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to an eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment aims to achieve both game guidance and effect display on the display device 41. The gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment switches the display mode of the light emitting unit according to the display content of the display device 41.

  First, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit during normal display on the display device 41 and the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit during special display on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration and a light emission mode of a decoration unit in the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 shown in (1) shows the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit during normal display on the display device 41, and the gaming machine 10 shown in (2) shows the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit during special display on the display device 41. Show.
First, the configuration of the decorative section (light emitting section) of the gaming machine 10 will be described. The gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units including the frame decoration device 18 on the front frame 12. The light emitting section provided in the front frame (main body frame) 12 is an embodiment of the main body frame light emitting section. The frame decoration device 18 has an outer edge light emitting group 18L including a plurality of light emitting units. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is arranged in a row on the outer edge side of the game board 30 so as to surround the game board 30. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is one form of a row light emitting group.

  The gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units including an inner edge light emitting group 40L and a normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L on the game board 30. The light emitting units provided in these game boards 30 are one form of the game board light emitting units. The inner edge light emitting group 40L includes a plurality of light emitting units, and is provided in the center case 40 so as to surround the display device 41. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is arranged in a row on the inner edge side of the game board 30. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is one form of a row light emitting group. The normal fluctuation winning device light emitting section 37L decorates the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in a predetermined light emitting mode. The normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L is located in the extension direction of one side of the inner edge light emitting group 40L.

  Next, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit during the normal display by the display device 41 will be described. Note that the normal display here is a display state determined in advance, for example, a display state during normal fluctuation (excluding a predetermined reach fluctuation or notice operation) or a symbol stop state. Note that the special display is a display state different from a predetermined normal display, for example, a display state during a predetermined reach fluctuation or a notice operation.

  In the gaming machine 10 shown in (1), the hatching pattern (crossed oblique lines) and the clockwise arrow indicate that the game board light-emitting unit (the inner edge light-emitting group 40L) is in a clockwise rainbow color light-emitting mode during normal display. Indicated by The light emission mode of the clockwise rainbow color display is a light emission mode that guides the aiming (right hit) to the normal fluctuation winning device 37.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 guides the player to right-hand by the clockwise, ie, clockwise, movement display (including the circulation display) by the inner edge light emitting group 40L. At this time, the normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L that decorates the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is located in the extension direction of one side of the inner edge light emitting group 40L, and thus becomes the end point of the clockwise rainbow color display. With such an arrangement of the inner edge light emitting group 40L and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be guided, the gaming machine 10 improves the right-hand guidance effect for the player.

  The normal fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 37L may constitute a group of line-shaped light-emitting groups together with the inner edge light-emitting group 40L, and perform clockwise rainbow display together with the inner edge light-emitting group 40L, or may be a clockwise rainbow. A special display mode (for example, white lighting) may be used as the end point of the color display. These light emitting units that provide game guidance can be regarded as guide light emitting units. In addition, the light emission mode performed by the guide light emitting unit as a game guide can be regarded as a guide light emission mode.

  In the gaming machine 10 shown in (1), the hatch pattern (cross hatching) and the clockwise rotation indicate that the frame decorative light emitting device 18 (outer edge light emitting group 18L) is in a clockwise iridescent display during normal display. Indicated by arrows. The light emission mode of the clockwise rainbow color display is a light emission mode that guides the aiming (right hit) to the normal fluctuation winning device 37. At this time, in the outer edge light emitting group 18L, the outer edge light emitting portion 18L2 located below the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is excluded from the clockwise rainbow display target. The outer edge light-emitting portion 18L2 emits light in a light-emitting mode (for example, blinking for 100 ms (indicated by a hatched pattern (parallel diagonal lines)) according to the game state, which can be distinguished from clockwise rainbow display. Note that the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the outer edge light emitting portion 18L2 and emits light in a light emitting mode according to the game state, which can be distinguished from the clockwise rainbow display. All of the divisions may be used. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the start winning opening light emitting portion 36L for decorating the starting winning opening 36, the special variable winning device light emitting portion 38L for decorating the special variable winning device 38, and the like can be distinguished from the clockwise rainbow display. Emits light. Further, the gaming machine 10 includes a light emitting unit located around the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, for example, a starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, a special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L to be decorated, and a normal symbol starting gate (normal figure starting gate). The gate light emitting portion 34L or the like that decorates the gate 34 may be turned off.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate that the target is the ordinary variable prize device 37 together with the right-handed guidance to the player. Note that the gaming machine 10 can perform display related to the variable display game on the display device 41 during the right-hand guidance. However, the gaming machine 10 may relatively bury the display mode of the display device 41 when the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit is emphasized in the performance of the entire gaming machine. Such a gaming machine may cause a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Therefore, the gaming machine 10 interrupts the right-hand guidance in accordance with the content displayed on the display device 41. That is, the gaming machine 10 has a guidance interruption function of interrupting the right-hand guidance during the special display distinguished from the normal display. The gaming machine 10 shown in (2) is in a special display (for example, during a reach display) on the display device 41, and the inner edge light-emitting group 40L and the outer edge light-emitting group 18L are light emission modes according to the game state. In the gaming machine 10 shown in (2), a hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicates that the inner edge light emitting group 40L and the outer edge light emitting group 18L are in a light emitting mode according to the game state.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can cause the player to pay attention to the display content of the display device 41 during the special display by interrupting the right-hand guidance during the special display on the display device 41. Therefore, the gaming machine can reduce the chance of competition between the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit and the display mode of the display device 41, and can enhance the interest of the player by a game effect according to the game state.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 can set the timing of the special display in advance for each variable display pattern, and can distinguish the display content on the display device 41 into the normal display and the special display based on the set content. Further, the gaming machine 10 is illustrated as a right-handed game as an example of the game guide, but may be a left-handed or a game guide aiming at another position. Further, the gaming machine 10 exemplifies the normal variable winning device 37 as an object of the game guidance, but may be another portion, for example, a starting winning port 36, a special variable winning device 38, a general-purpose starting gate 34, and the like. There may be.

  Further, when the gaming machine 10 sets the general-purpose starting gate 34 above the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as an object of right-handed guidance, the inner-edge light emitting group 40L and the outer-edge light emitting located below the general-purpose starting gate 34 and below. The group 18L may be excluded from the clockwise rainbow display target.

[Modification 1 of Eighth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the eighth embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the eighth embodiment, the display content of the display device 41 can be switched from the normal display to the special display only when the game guidance is not performed in the light emitting unit.

  The display state of the gaming machine 10 during the normal power support will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating a display state during a normal power support of the gaming machine according to the first modification of the eighth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10, the gaming state is in Hiroshi power support. Note that, during the Toden support, this is an example of a game state in which game guidance is performed. The gaming machine 10 switches a light emitting mode of a guide light emitting unit (for example, the inner edge light emitting group 40L and the outer edge light emitting group 18L) for performing game guidance at a predetermined cycle. For example, the gaming machine 10 switches the light emission mode of the guide light emitting unit from the game effect light emission mode to the guide light emission mode at timing T32, and switches from the guide light emission mode to the game effect light emission mode at timing T33. That is, the gaming machine 10 emits light in the guide light emission mode during the light emission period TS11 from timing T32 to timing T33, and emits light in the game effect light emission mode during the light emission period TS12 from timing T33 to timing T34. Is repeated. In this way, the gaming machine 10 secures an opportunity for the game guidance to be performed during the cycle TS1 by juxtaposing the game guidance period for performing the game guidance and the game production period for performing the game production. This allows the gaming machine 10 to achieve both game guidance and game effects.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 restricts the special display of the display device 41 during a period in which the guide light emitting unit emits light in the guide light emitting mode, and permits the special display in a period in which the guide light emitting unit emits light in the game effect light emitting mode. I have. For example, the gaming machine 10 performs a special display on the display device 41 from the timing T30 to the timing T31 during a period until the timing T32 at which the guide light emitting unit emits light in the game effect light emitting mode. Note that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily perform special display on the display device 41 even during the period in which the guide light emitting unit emits light in the game effect light emitting mode. Further, even when the guide light emitting unit emits light in the guide light emitting mode, the gaming machine 10 performs a special display on the display device 41 when deriving a special result (for example, a big hit). Is also good. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 suppresses the special display on the display device 41 from being buried in the game guide, and realizes a cooperative operation with the game effect light emission mode in the guide light emitting unit.

  Although the light-emitting period TS11 and the light-emitting period TS12 have been described as fixed periods, the light-emitting period TS11 and the light-emitting period TS12 may be, for example, variable periods cooperating with audio output such as BGM and audio. For example, when the gaming machine 10 switches from the audio pattern A to the audio pattern B at the timing T32, the output period of the audio pattern B can be set to the light emission period TS11. Then, when switching from the audio pattern B to the audio pattern C at the timing T33, the gaming machine 10 may set the output period of the audio pattern C as the light emission period TS12. Note that the gaming machine 10 may arbitrarily select and repeat a plurality of audio patterns having different audio output periods, in which case the cycle TS1 is a variable period. The gaming machine 10 may repeat one voice pattern or arbitrarily select and repeat a plurality of voice patterns having the same voice output period. In that case, the cycle TS1 is a fixed period. In the gaming machine 10, one of the light emitting period TS11 and the light emitting period TS12 may be a fixed period, and the other may be an indefinite period.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 has a game guiding effect in a period in which the guide light emitting unit emits light in the guide light emitting mode, and pays attention to display contents on the display device 41 in a period in which the guide light emitting unit emits light in the game effect light emitting mode. degree can be increased.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described eighth embodiment (including the first modification) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a gaming board 30 and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game board 30 includes a light emitting unit (for example, an inner edge light emitting group 40L) and a display device 41. The control unit can display a normal display and a special display distinguishable from the normal display on the display device 41. The control unit performs first light emission control in which the light emitting unit emits light in the first light emitting mode to perform game guidance, and second light emission control in which the light emitting unit emits light in the second light emitting mode to perform a game effect. Can do it. When switching from the normal display to the special display on the display device 41, the control unit switches from the first light emission control to the second light emission control.

  (2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) is detachably attached to a main body frame (front frame 12) and has a game board (game board 30) having a game board light emitting portion (inner edge light emitting group 40L); A transparent member holding frame that has a frame light emitting portion (outer edge light emitting group 18L) and is rotatably mounted on the main body frame.

(3) The light emitting section of (2) includes a game board light emitting section and a main frame light emitting section.
(4) The gaming machine 10 of (1) has an array of light emitting groups including a plurality of light emitting units, and the control unit controls the guide target unit (the normal fluctuation winning device 37) located on one side of the array of light emitting groups. ) Is referred to as a first light-emitting mode.

(5) The gaming machine 10 of (4) includes a guide light emitting unit (normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L) for decorating the guide target unit on one side of the row light emitting group.
(6) The control unit in (1) presets the timing of switching from the normal display to the special display for each variable display pattern.

  (7) The gaming machine 10 includes a gaming board 30 and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game board 30 includes a light emitting unit (for example, an inner edge light emitting group 40L) and a display device 41. The control unit can display a normal display and a special display distinguishable from the normal display on the display device 41. Control unit includes a first light emission control for the game guide to emit light in the first lighting mode in the light emitting portion, and light emission in the second lighting mode in the light emitting portion and a second emission control performing game effects Can do it. The control unit restricts the display device 41 from switching from the normal display to the special display during the first light emission control period.

(8) The control unit of (7) permits the display device 41 to switch from the normal display to the special display during the second light emission control period.
(9) The control unit of (7) switches between the first light emission control and the second light emission control at a predetermined timing.

(10) The control unit of (9) sets one of the first light emission control period and the second light emission control period as a fixed period and the other as an indefinite period.
(11) The control unit of (9) switches between the first light emission control and the second light emission control in synchronization with the sound output switching trigger.

[Ninth embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit for decorating the special winning opening is changed corresponding to the opening mode of the special winning opening. The gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment has two opening modes: a long opening in which the special winning opening is opened for a long time, and a short opening in which the special winning opening is opened for a short time.

  First, the configuration of the decorative portion of the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment and the light emission mode in a normal state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration and a light emitting mode of a decoration unit in the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 shown in (1) shows a light emitting mode when the big winning opening is opened for a long time, and the gaming machine 10 shown in (2) shows a light emitting mode when the big winning opening is opened for a short time.

  First, the configuration of the decorative section (light emitting section) of the gaming machine 10 will be described. The gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units including the frame decoration device 18 on the front frame 12. The light emitting unit provided in the front frame (main body frame) 12 is an embodiment of the main body frame light emitting unit. The frame decoration device 18 has an outer edge light emitting group 18L including a plurality of light emitting units. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is arranged in a row on the outer edge side of the game board 30 so as to surround the game board 30. Outer light emission group 18L is a form of column-like light emission group.

  The gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units including an inner edge light emitting group 40L, a gate light emitting unit 34L, a starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, a normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and a special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L. Prepare for 30. The light emitting unit provided in the game board 30 is one form of the game board light emitting unit. The inner edge light emitting group 40L includes a plurality of light emitting units, and is provided in the center case 40 so as to surround the display device 41. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is arranged in a row on the inner edge side of the game board 30. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is one form of a row light emitting group.

  The gate light emitting section 34L decorates the ordinary symbol starting gate (ordinary symbol starting gate) 34 in a predetermined light emitting mode. The starting winning opening light emitting portion 36L decorates the starting winning opening 36 in a predetermined light emitting mode. The normal fluctuation winning device light emitting section 37L decorates the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in a predetermined light emitting mode. The special fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 38L decorates the special fluctuation winning device 38 according to a predetermined light emission mode. The game board light emitting unit performs a game effect in a light emitting mode corresponding to the game model.

  Note that the special variable winning device 38 corresponds to a large winning opening of the gaming machine 10, and the special variable winning device light emitting portion 38L corresponds to a light emitting portion for decorating the large winning opening. The gaming machine 10 shown in (1) is in a state where the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time. The long-time opening is one of a plurality of opening modes in the special variable winning device 38, and the opening time is longer (for example, 30 seconds) than other opening modes. Opening for a long time is a mode in which the special variable prize winning device 38 has a large winning opportunity. The long-time opening is not necessarily defined by the opening time, but may be defined by the winning number (for example, 10).

  The gaming machine 10 causes the special fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 38L to emit light in a special light-emitting mode. For example, the gaming machine 10 causes the special fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 38L to emit light in a highlighted light-emitting mode (for example, a rainbow-color light-emitting mode in which predetermined seven colors are circulated and switched) to clearly indicate the point of interest to the player. At this time, the gaming machine 10 emits the outer edge light-emitting group 18L and the inner edge light-emitting group 40L in a light emission mode (for example, clockwise rainbow color display or counterclockwise rainbow color display) according to the gaming state (for example, big hit state). Let it. The hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicates that the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L are light emitting modes according to the game state.

  In addition, the normal figure starting gate 34, the starting winning port 36, and the normal variable winning device 37 together with the special variable winning device 38 are points of interest for the player. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 includes the gate light emitting unit 34L, the starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L in order to clearly indicate the special variable winning device 38 as an aim. In this case, a non-emphasized light emission mode (for example, extinguished) that is inconspicuous as compared with. For example, in the gaming machine 10 shown in (1), the special fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 38L is indicated by a hatching pattern (cross-hatched lines) to indicate that the light emission mode is the emphasized light emission mode, and the gate light-emitting unit 34L and the start winning opening light-emitting unit 36L are normally changed. The white display indicates that the winning device light emitting unit 37L is in the non-emphasized light emitting mode.

  The gaming machine 10 shown in (2) is in a state where the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened for a short time. Short opening and the short special variation winning device 38 open time as compared with one in and another opening aspects of a plurality of open manner in (e.g., 0.5 seconds). Also, short opening is small opening mode of winning opportunities for special variation winning device 38.

  The gaming machine 10 sets the special fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 38L to a non-emphasized light emission mode (for example, off). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates to the player that it is not worth aiming at the special variable winning device 38. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 contributes to reducing the opportunity for the player to uselessly consume the game ball.

  In the gaming machine 10, the gate light emitting unit 34L, the starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, and the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L are set in a non-emphasized light emitting mode, similarly to the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L. In the gaming machine 10 shown in (2), the fact that the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L, the gate light emitting unit 34L, the starting winning port light emitting unit 36L, and the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L are in the non-emphasized light emitting mode is displayed in white. Show. Note that, at this time, the gaming machine 10 has the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L in a light emitting mode (for example, clockwise rainbow display or counterclockwise rainbow display) according to the gaming state (for example, big hit state). to emit light. The hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicates that the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L are light emitting modes according to the game state.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the long-time opening of the special variable prize winning device 38 which is advantageous for the player by the highlighted light emission mode of the special variable prize winning device light emitting portion 38L, and the special variable prize winning device 38 which is disadvantageous for the player. By explicitly indicating the short-time opening in the non-emphasized light emission mode of the special fluctuation winning device light-emitting unit 38L, it is possible to perform a game guidance that is beneficial to the player.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the gaming state with the general electric power support that is advantageous for the player by the highlighted light emission mode of the gate light emitting unit 34L and the normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L, and without the general electric power support that is disadvantageous for the player. By explicitly indicating the game state by the non-emphasized light emission mode of the gate light emitting unit 34L or the normal fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 37L, a game guide that is beneficial to the player may be provided.

  Next, the opening mode of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) and the light emitting mode of the special winning opening light emitting unit (special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L) during the jackpot of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing an opening mode of the special winning opening during a big hit and a light emitting mode of the special winning opening light emitting unit of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment.

  In the gaming machine 10, the gaming state is a big hit state. In the state of the big hit, the gaming machine 10 opens a special winning opening for each round divided by an interval from the fanfare to the ending. The gaming machine 10 sets a big hit as a plurality of rounds, and sets an opening time for each round. For example, the gaming machine 10 can open the large winning opening for a long time in the first 10 rounds of the 16 rounds and open the large winning opening for a short time in the last 6 rounds.

  The timing T40 to the timing T41 indicate the fanfare time TS21 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened. Special variation winning device 38 becomes the open state from the closed state at the timing T41, the closed state from the open state at timing T42. Therefore, the timing T41 to the timing T42 indicate the long-time opening time TS22 of the special fluctuation winning device 38. Further, the special variable winning device 38 is changed from the closed state to the open state at the timing T43, and is opened for a long time. Therefore, the timing T42 to the timing T43 indicate the interval time TS23 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a long time.

  The special fluctuation winning device 38 changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing T44, changes from the closed state to the open state at the timing T45, and changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing T46. Therefore, the timing T45 to the timing T46 indicate the short-time opening time TS25 of the special variable winning device 38, and the timing T44 to the timing T45 indicate the interval time TS24 before the short-time opening of the special variable winning device 38.

  The long open time TS22 is longer than the short open time TS25. The interval time TS24 is the same time as the fanfare time TS21 and the interval time TS23. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 secures the detection time of the gaming ball that has won the special variable winning device 38. Note that the gaming machine 10 may set the interval time TS24 shorter than the fanfare time TS21 and the interval time TS23 since the prize opportunity in the short opening time TS25 is small.

  Since the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is long or short for each round, the gaming machine 10 sets the special variable winning device light emitting portion 38L to a rainbow light emission mode in the long opening time, Turns off when open for a short time.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to aim at the special variable winning device 38 in the rainbow light emission mode, that is, the special variable winning device 38 that opens for a long time. Further, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player not to aim at the special variable prize device 38 when the light is turned off, that is, the special variable prize device 38 that opens for a short time.

  Such a gaming machine 10 can prevent a player from wastefully consuming a game ball in a big hit in which an opening time is set for each round, and can increase the number of acquired prize balls during the big hit for the player. it can. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can produce a feeling of a winning ball for the player, and improve the satisfaction of the player.

  In the gaming machine 10, when the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time, the light emitting mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is set to the rainbow light emitting mode, but the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a short time. It is not limited to this as long as it can be distinguished from the light emission mode at that time. The gaming machine 10 turns off the light emission mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L when the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time, but emits light when the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time. It is not limited to this as long as it can be distinguished from the mode.

[Round decoration setting process]
Next, the in-round decoration setting processing for setting a decoration pattern on the main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit during the round of the special figure game in the big hit state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of round decoration setting processing in the effect control device according to the ninth embodiment. The decoration setting process during the round is a process executed by the control unit in step D91 of the decoration setting process shown in FIG.

[Step D201] The control unit sets a round decoration pattern on the light emitting units other than the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38).
[Step D202] The control unit determines the opening time of the special winning opening during the round. The control unit proceeds to Step D203 when the opening time during the round corresponds to a long time, and proceeds to Step D204 when the opening time during the round corresponds to a short time. The control unit can determine whether the opening time during the round corresponds to a long time or a short time by comparing a preset threshold value and the opening time during the round. Further, the control unit may determine whether the open time during the round corresponds to a long time or a short time by referring to information set in advance for each round.

  [Step D203] In order to clearly indicate to the player that the special winning opening is a target because the opening time during the round of the special winning opening corresponds to a long time, the control unit sets a special winning opening light emitting unit (special fluctuation). The rainbow light emission mode is set in the winning device light emitting unit 38L). After setting the rainbow-colored light emission mode in the special winning opening light emitting unit, the control unit ends the round decoration setting process.

  [Step D204] The control unit displays a special winning opening light emitting unit (special fluctuation) to clearly indicate to the player that the special winning opening is not a target because the opening time during the round of the special winning opening is short. The extinguishing device light emitting unit 38L) is set to turn off. After setting the large winning opening light emitting unit to turn off, the control unit ends the decoration setting process during the round.

  Thus, the control unit controls the big winning opening emitting unit for decorating winning opening in response to the opening time in the round of winning opening. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can provide game guidance that is beneficial to the player.

[Modification 1 of Ninth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 of a first modification of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 and 179. The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the ninth embodiment is identical in that the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit for decorating the special winning opening is changed corresponding to the opening mode of the special winning opening. The difference is that it is during the interval.

  First, the opening mode of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) during the big hit of the gaming machine 10 and the light emitting mode of the special winning opening light emitting unit (special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 178 is a view illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating an open state of a special winning opening during a big hit and a light emission mode of a special winning opening light emitting unit of a gaming machine according to a first modification of the ninth embodiment.

  In the gaming machine 10, the gaming state is a big hit state. In the state of the big hit, the gaming machine 10 opens a special winning opening for each round divided by an interval from the fanfare to the ending. The gaming machine 10 sets a big hit as a plurality of rounds, and sets an opening time for each round. For example, the gaming machine 10 can open the large winning opening for a long time in the first 10 rounds of the 16 rounds and open the large winning opening for a short time in the last 6 rounds.

  The timing T40 to the timing T41 indicate the fanfare time TS21 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened. The timing T41 to the timing T42 indicate the long opening time TS22 of the special variable winning device 38. The timing T42 to the timing T43 indicate the interval time TS23 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a long time. Further, a timing T45 to a timing T46 indicate a short opening time TS25 of the special variable winning device 38, and a timing T44 to a timing T45 indicate an interval time TS24 of the special variable winning device 38 before the short opening.

  In the gaming machine 10, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is set to emit white light in the fanfare time TS21 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a long time. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time in the first round after the fanfare. In the first round after the fanfare, when the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time, the gaming machine 10 turns off the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time in the first round after the fanfare.

  In the gaming machine 10, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is set to emit white light in the interval time TS23 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a long time. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time in the round after the interval. In the gaming machine 10, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is turned off in the interval time TS24 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a short time. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time in the round after the interval.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 guides the opening mode of the special variable winning device 38 in a fanfare or an interval before the round in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player with a sufficient time to aim at the special variable prize winning device 38 in the white light emission mode, that is, the special variable prize winning device 38 that opens for a long time. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player with sufficient time not to aim at the special variable prize device 38 when the light is turned off, that is, the special variable prize device 38 that opens for a short time.

  Such a gaming machine 10 further suppresses a player from wasting a game ball in a big hit in which an opening time is set for each round, and further increases the number of acquired prize balls during the big hit for the player. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with a more sense of ball-out and further improve the satisfaction of the player.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 sets the light emission mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L to the white light emitting mode when the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time, but when the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time. The light emission mode is not limited to this as long as it can be distinguished from the light emission mode. The gaming machine 10 turns off the light emission mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L when the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time, but emits light when the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time. It is not limited to this as long as it can be distinguished from the mode.

[Fanfare interior decoration setting processing]
Next, a fanfare decoration setting process for setting a decoration pattern in the main frame light emitting portion and the game board light emitting portion in the fanfare or interval before the round of the special figure game in the big hit state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the fanfare decoration setting process in the effect control device according to the first modification of the ninth embodiment. The decoration setting process during fanfare is a process executed by the control unit in step D90 of the decoration setting process shown in FIG.

[Step D211] The control unit sets the fanfare decoration pattern on the light emitting units other than the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38).
[Step D212] The control unit determines the opening time of the special winning opening during the round. The control unit proceeds to Step D213 when the opening time during the round corresponds to a long time, and proceeds to Step D214 when the opening time during the round corresponds to a short time.

  [Step D213] The control unit displays a special winning opening light emitting unit (special fluctuation) to clearly indicate to the player that the special winning opening is a target because the opening time during the round of the special winning opening corresponds to a long time. The white light emission mode is set in the winning device light emitting unit 38L). After setting the white light emission mode in the special winning opening light emitting unit, the control unit ends the fanfare decoration setting process.

  [Step D214] The control unit displays a special winning opening light emitting unit (special fluctuation) in order to clearly indicate to the player that the special winning opening is not a target because the opening time during the round of the special winning opening corresponds to a short time. The extinguishing device light emitting unit 38L) is set to turn off. After the control unit sets the special winning opening light emitting unit to be turned off, the control unit ends the fanfare decoration processing.

  As described above, the control unit controls the special winning opening light emitting unit that decorates the special winning opening according to the opening time during the round of the special winning opening during the fanfare or during the interval. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can provide game guidance that is beneficial to the player before opening the special winning opening.

[Modification 2 of Ninth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a second modification of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment of the ninth embodiment is different from the ninth embodiment in that the timing of ending the opening mode guidance of the special winning opening started during the fanfare or the interval is during the round of the special winning opening. This is different from the gaming machine 10 and the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the ninth embodiment.

  First, the opening mode of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) and the light emitting mode of the special winning opening light emitting unit (special fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 38L) during the jackpot of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 is a view illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating an open state of a special winning opening during a big hit of the gaming machine according to the second modification of the ninth embodiment and a light emission mode of the special winning opening light emitting unit.

  In the gaming machine 10, the gaming state is a big hit state. In the state of the big hit, the gaming machine 10 opens a special winning opening for each round divided by an interval from the fanfare to the ending. The gaming machine 10 sets a big hit as a plurality of rounds, and sets an opening time for each round. For example, the gaming machine 10 can open the large winning opening for a long time in the first 10 rounds of the 16 rounds and open the large winning opening for a short time in the last 6 rounds.

  The timing T50 to the timing T51 indicate the fanfare time TS31 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened. In the gaming machine 10, the special fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 38L is set to emit white light in the fanfare time TS31 before the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened for a long time. In addition, the gaming machine 10 continues the white light emission mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L until the timing T52 of detecting the winning of the special variable winning device 38 even after the start of the first round. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate to the player that the special fluctuation winning device 38 is open for a long time in the first round after the fanfare until the correctness of the aim is confirmed. Further, the gaming machine 10 detects the winning of the special variable winning device 38 and changes the light emitting mode of the special variable winning device light emitting portion 38L from the white light emitting mode to the rainbow light emitting mode, so that the aim is correct. Can be notified to the player.

  In addition, a timing T53 to a timing T54 indicate an interval time TS32 before the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened for a long time. The gaming machine 10 causes the special fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 38L to emit white light in the interval time TS32 before the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened for a long time. In addition, the gaming machine 10 continues the white light emission mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L until the timing T55 at which the special variable winning device 38 detects a winning even after the round starts. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate to the player that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time in the round after the interval until the correctness of the aim is confirmed. Further, the gaming machine 10 detects the winning of the special variable winning device 38 and changes the light emitting mode of the special variable winning device light emitting portion 38L from the white light emitting mode to the rainbow light emitting mode, so that the aim is correct. Can be notified to the player.

  Further, a timing T56 to a timing T57 indicate the interval time TS33 before the short-time opening of the special variable winning device 38, and a timing T57 to a timing T58 indicate the short-time opening time of the special variable winning device 38. The gaming machine 10 turns off the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L in the interval time TS33 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a short time. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time in the round after the interval. In the gaming machine 10, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is set to emit blue light during the short opening time of the special variable winning device 38. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time in the round after the interval.

  As described above, prior to the round in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened, the gaming machine 10 guides the opening mode of the special variable winning device 38 in a fanfare or an interval, and aims at the end of the guidance of the opening mode of the special variable winning device 38. Notify the player of the correctness.

  Such a gaming machine 10 further suppresses a player from wasting a game ball in a big hit in which an opening time is set for each round, and further increases the number of acquired prize balls during the big hit for the player. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with a more sense of ball-out and further improve the satisfaction of the player.

[Round decoration setting process]
Next, the in-round decoration setting processing for setting a decoration pattern on the main frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit during the round of the special figure game in the big hit state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of round decoration setting processing in the effect control device according to the second modification of the ninth embodiment. The decoration setting process during the round is a process executed by the control unit in step D91 of the decoration setting process shown in FIG.

[Step D221] The control unit sets a round decoration pattern on the light emitting units other than the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38).
[Step D222] The control unit determines the opening time of the special winning opening during the round. The control unit proceeds to Step D224 when the opening time during the round corresponds to a long time, and proceeds to Step D223 when the opening time during the round corresponds to a short time.

  [Step D223] The control unit displays a special winning opening light emitting unit (special fluctuation) to clearly indicate to the player that the special winning opening is not a target because the opening time during the round of the special winning opening corresponds to a short time. The blue light emission mode is set in the winning device light emitting unit 38L). After setting the blue light emission mode in the special winning opening light emitting unit, the control unit ends the round decoration setting process.

  [Step D224] The control unit determines whether or not a winning is detected in the special winning opening. The control unit proceeds to step D225 when there is no winning detection in the special winning opening, and proceeds to step D226 when there is a winning detection in the special winning opening.

  [Step D225] Since the opening time during the round of the special winning opening corresponds to a long time, the control unit continuously specifies from the fanfare or the interval to the player that the special winning opening will be an aim, so that the control unit determines The white light emission mode is set in the winning opening light emitting unit (the special fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 38L). After setting the white light emission mode in the special winning opening light emitting unit, the control unit ends the round decoration setting process.

  [Step D226] The control unit confirms that the special winning opening is a target by detecting a winning in the special winning opening, and informs the player of the correctness of the target by using a special winning opening light emitting unit (special). The iridescent light emission mode is set in the variable winning device light emitting unit 38L). After setting the rainbow light emission mode in the special winning opening light emitting unit, the control unit ends the round decoration setting process.

  As described above, the control unit continuously controls the special winning opening light emitting unit that decorates the special winning opening according to the opening time during the round of the special winning opening during the fanfare or during the interval. Note that the fanfare decoration setting processing executed during the fanfare or during the interval is the same as the fanfare decoration setting processing described in Modification Example 1 of the ninth embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can provide a game guide that is beneficial to the player before opening the special winning opening, and can continue the game guiding until the winning detection in the special winning opening. Further, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player of the correctness of the aim.

[Third Modification of Ninth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the ninth embodiment has a plurality of types of big hits. Each big hit differs in the number of round continuations (maximum number of rounds) for each big hit and the combination of the length of opening time of each round.

  A big hit of the gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 182 is a diagram illustrating an example of an opening mode of a special winning opening for each big hit type of the gaming machine according to the third modification of the ninth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the ninth embodiment has a plurality of types of big hits as shown in FIG. For example, the jackpot of the jackpot type 1 has a round continuation number of 16 (16R), and all rounds are in the long-time open mode (L). The jackpot of the jackpot type 2 has a round continuation number of 16 (16R), a round of 1R to 15R is a long-time opening mode (L), and a round of 16R is a short-time opening mode (S). In addition, the big hit of the big hit type 3 has a round continuation number of 15 (15R), and the round from 1R to 14R is a long-time open mode (L).

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 sets a plurality of types of big hits having different game values, and produces a sense of expectation for the big hits. In such a gaming machine 10, since the opening mode of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) changes for each round, it is easy for the player to consume waste balls. However, as described in the ninth embodiment (including Modification 1 and Modification 2), the game is guided by performing the game guidance in the light emission mode of the special winning opening light emitting unit (the special fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 38L). The machine 10 can prevent the player from consuming the game balls unnecessarily. Further, the gaming machine 10 can increase the number of acquired prize balls during a big hit for the player. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can produce a feeling of a winning ball for the player, and improve the satisfaction of the player.

The gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment (including the first to third modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a winning device (special fluctuation winning device 38), a winning device light emitting unit (special fluctuation winning device light emitting unit 38L), and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). Including. The winning device can be converted into a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) in which the game balls can easily win as compared to the first state. The winning device light emitting unit decorates the winning device in a light emitting mode. The control unit sets the winning device light emitting unit in the first light emitting mode (off, blue light emitting mode) when the winning device is in the first control state (open for a short time) in which the winning device is in the second state within the first time range. When a second control state (open for a long time) in which the winning device is controlled and the winning device is set in the second state within a second time period longer than the first time period (open for a long time), a second light emission mode (light off) different from the first light emission mode The prize device light-emitting unit is controlled in a rainbow light emission mode with respect to the blue light emission mode.

(2) The control unit of (1) controls the winning device light emitting unit in the first light emitting mode in the first control state, and controls the winning device light emitting unit in the second light emitting mode in the second control state.
(3) The control unit of (1) sets the first control state after controlling the winning device light emitting unit in the first light emitting mode, and sets the second control state after controlling the winning device light emitting unit in the second light emitting mode. I do.

(4) The control unit of (3) continues to control the winning device light-emitting unit in the first light-emitting mode in the first control state.
(5) The control unit of (3) continues to control the winning device light-emitting unit in the second light-emitting mode in the second control state.

(6) When detecting a winning in the winning device in the second control state, the control unit of (5) ends controlling the winning device light emitting unit in the second light emission mode.
(7) The control unit of (1) executes and controls a game state (big hit) including the first control state and the second control state based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (the big hit determination result is a big hit).

(8) The control unit of (7) executes and controls two or more big hits having different combinations of the first control state and the second control state.
(9) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a prize device (first prize device: special variable prize device 38) and a second prize device (starting prize port 36, normal variable prize device 37) different from the prize device (prize device). When decorating the device in the second light emission mode (enhanced light emission mode), the second winning device is decorated in the first light emission mode (non-emphasized light emission mode).

[Tenth embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 186. The gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment has two big winning ports and a board effect device, and guides the operating state of the two big winning ports by the board effect device. First, the gaming board 30 in the gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the tenth embodiment.

  The game board 30 includes a special variable winning device (first large winning port) 381 and a special variable winning device (second large winning port) 382. Each of the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 is a winning device that can switch between an open state and a closed state in relation to the result derived from the special figure game. Further, the special fluctuation winning devices 381 and 382 are both controlled by the game control device 100 and are controlled by the game control device 100 so as to be exclusively opened without being simultaneously opened. The special variable winning devices 381 and 382 are not equal value winning ports for the player. For example, the special variable winning device 382 is a winning port higher in value for the player than the special variable winning device 381. Such a difference in the value is that the special variable winning device 381 is arranged in the right area of the game board 30 and enables the game ball to be won with a small number of waste balls by right-handing. This is because it is arranged in the left area of the game board 30 and does not allow a game ball to be won with a small amount of useless balls even when left-handed. The difference between the value of the special variable winning device 381 and the value of the special variable winning device 382 is determined by the difference in the structure of the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 (for example, the size of the opening) and the difference in control (for example, opening). Time or the maximum number of winning balls).

  The game board 30 includes a board effect device (first board effect device) 441 and a board effect device (second board effect device) 442. The board effect devices 441 and 442 can move between the initial position and the position during the board effect without interfering with the game ball. The illustrated board effect devices 441 and 442 are both at the initial position and at positions where they do not interfere with the display area of the display device 41. The board effect device 441 is on the left side of the display area of the display device 41, that is, at a position corresponding to the special fluctuation winning device 381, and the board effect device 442 is on the right side of the display area of the display device 41, that is, the special fluctuation device. It is located at a position corresponding to the winning device 382.

  Next, the relationship between the operating states of the board effect devices 441 and 442 and the operating states of the special fluctuation winning devices 381 and 382 will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185. FIG. 184 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a large winning prize mouth notification to be opened in the gaming board according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 185 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of a special winning opening notification to be opened in the gaming board according to the tenth embodiment.

  Gaming board 30 shown in (1) shows the operating state of the board effect device 441 and 442 when the special variation winning device 381 is actuated state (shown by hatched). The board effect device 441 moves from the initial position to the position during the board effect, and the board effect device 442 maintains the initial position. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player that the special variable winning device 381 is in the operating state.

  The game board 30 shown in (2) shows the operating state of the board effect devices 441 and 442 when the special variable winning device 382 is in the operating state (indicated by parallel oblique lines). The board effect device 442 moves from the initial position to the position during the board effect, and the board effect device 441 maintains the initial position. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player that the special variable winning device 382 is in the operating state.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform a game guidance that is beneficial to the player by explicitly indicating the opening of any of the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 in the operating state of the board effect devices 441 and 442. . That is, the player can reduce the useless balls that do not win the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 by hitting the game balls according to the guidance of the gaming machine 10. In addition, the player can increase the chance of winning the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 by hitting the game balls according to the guidance of the gaming machine 10.

  Further, the gaming board 30 shown in (3) shows a board effect device 441, 442 Another operating state when the special variation winning device 381 is actuated state (shown by hatched). The board effect devices 441 and 442 move from the initial position to a position during the board effect. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player that one of the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 is in the operating state. Further, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable prize winning device 381 is in an operating state by setting the light emitting unit for decorating the special variable prize winning device 381 to have, for example, a blue light emitting mode.

  The gaming board 30 shown in (4) shows another operating state of the board effect devices 441 and 442 when the special variable winning device 382 is in an operating state (shown by parallel oblique lines). The board effect devices 441 and 442 move from the initial position to a position during the board effect. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player that one of the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 is in the operating state. Further, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 382 is in an operating state by setting the light emitting unit for decorating the special variable winning device 382 to have, for example, a rainbow light emission mode.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 informs the player which of the special variable prize winning devices 381 and 382 will be activated by the combination of the operation state of the board effect devices 441 and 442 and the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit. be able to. In addition, the gaming machine 10 decorates the board production devices 441 and 442 in place of the light emitting unit that performs the game guidance in combination with the operation state of the board production devices 441 and 442 and the light emission unit that decorates the special variable winning device 382. It may be a light emitting unit. In the gaming machine 10, the timing of switching the light emission mode of the light emitting unit may be the same as the timing of switching the operation state of the board effect devices 441 and 442, or may be delayed to improve the expectation of the light emission mode. You may.

  Next, the operating states of the board effect devices 441 and 442, the operating states of the special variable winning devices 381 and 382, and the light emitting modes of the light emitting units decorating the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the operating state of the board-producing device during the big hit and the light emitting state of the special winning opening of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 186, for convenience, the board effect device 441 is a board effect device (left), the board effect device 442 is a board effect device (right), the special variable winning device 381 is a large winning opening (left), a special variable winning. The device 382 is a special winning opening (right), a light emitting unit for decorating the special winning opening (left) is a special winning opening light emitting unit (left), and a light emitting unit for decorating the special winning opening (right) is a special winning opening light emitting unit (right). ).

  First, the guidance state shown in FIG. 184 (1) is shown from timing T10 to timing T11. At timing T10, the gaming machine 10 operates the board effect device (left) from the initial position to the effecting position, and keeps the board effect device (right) at the initial position. The gaming machine 10 switches the special winning opening (left) from the closed state to the open state, and keeps the special winning opening (right) in the closed state. In the gaming machine 10, the special winning opening light emitting unit (left) is set to emit blue light, and the special winning opening light emitting unit (right) is turned off. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to open the big winning opening (left). At timing T11, the gaming machine 10 returns the board effect device (left) to the initial position, switches the special winning opening (left) from the open state to the closed state, turns off the special winning opening light emitting unit (left), and sets the interval. The state is maintained in the middle (from timing T11 to timing T12).

  Next, the guidance state shown in FIG. 184 (2) is shown from timing T12 to timing T13. At timing T12, the gaming machine 10 operates the board effect device (right) from the initial position to the effecting position, and keeps the board effect device (left) at the initial position. The gaming machine 10 switches the special winning opening (right) from the closed state to the open state, and keeps the special winning opening (left) in the closed state. In the gaming machine 10, the special winning opening light emitting unit (right) is set to a rainbow light emission mode, and the special winning opening light emitting unit (left) is turned off. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to open the big winning opening (right). In addition, the gaming machine 10 can indicate that the value of the special winning opening (right) is higher than that of the special winning opening (left) by the light emitting mode of the special winning opening light emitting unit (right). At timing T13, the gaming machine 10 returns the board effect device (right) to the initial position, switches the special winning opening (right) from the open state to the closed state, turns off the special winning opening light emitting unit (right), and sets the interval. This state is maintained during the middle (from timing T13 to timing T14).

  Next, the guidance state shown in FIG. 185 (4) is shown from timing T14 to timing T15. At timing T14, the gaming machine 10 operates the board effect device (left) and the board effect device (right) from the initial position to the effecting position. Further, the gaming machine 10 switches the special winning opening (right) from the closed state to the open state, and keeps the special winning opening (left) in the closed state. In the gaming machine 10, the special winning opening light emitting unit (right) is set to a rainbow light emission mode, and the special winning opening light emitting unit (left) is turned off. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to open the big winning opening (right). In addition, the gaming machine 10 can indicate that the value of the special winning opening (right) is higher than the special winning opening (left) by the light emitting mode of the special winning opening light emitting unit (right). At timing T15, the gaming machine 10 returns the board effect device (left) and the board effect device (right) to the initial position, switches the special winning opening (right) from the open state to the closed state, and sets the special winning opening light emitting unit ( Right) is turned off. Although the description using the timing chart for the guidance state shown in FIG. 185 (3) is omitted, the guidance state can be the same as the guidance state shown in FIG. 185 (4).

[Modification Example 1 of Tenth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 187 is a view illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating a board production device operating state during a big hit and a winning state light emission state of the gaming machine according to the first modification of the tenth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 according to the first modification of the tenth embodiment may require time to switch the operation state of the board effect devices 441 and 442, and thus starts the next round after the operation of the board effect devices 441 and 442. It differs from the tenth embodiment in that it returns to the initial position by then. In order to describe differences between the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the tenth embodiment, the operating state of the board effect device (right), the operating state of the special winning opening (right), and the special winning opening light emitting section ( The light emission mode of (right) is included in the description.

  First, the guidance state shown in FIG. 184 (2) is shown from timing T20 to timing T21. At timing T20, the gaming machine 10 operates the board effect device (right) from the initial position to the effecting position. Also, the gaming machine 10 switches the special winning opening (right) from the closed state to the open state. In the gaming machine 10, the special winning opening light emitting portion (right) is set to a rainbow light emission mode. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to open the big winning opening (right).

  The timing T21 is a timing for detecting a predetermined number of winning balls in the special winning opening (right). For example, the timing T21 is a timing at which three winning balls are detected in the special winning opening (right). At this time, assuming that the number of winning balls detected as a blocking condition in the large winning opening (right) is 10, the time required for detecting the remaining seven winning balls is set as the initial position return time of the board effect device (right). Can be secured. In order to secure the initial position return time of the board effect device (right) even when there is no winning in the special winning opening (right), a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) elapses from the timing T20. The earlier of the detected timing or the predetermined number of winning ball detection timings in the special winning opening (right) is defined as timing T21.

  When the closing condition of the special winning opening (right) is satisfied at timing T22, the gaming machine 10 switches the special winning opening (right) from the open state to the closed state and turns off the special winning opening light emitting unit (right). As described above, the gaming machine 10 limits the operation time of the board effect device (right) to the time TS11 and secures the initial position return time TS12 of the board effect device (right), so that the board effect device ( (Right) to the initial position.

  The gaming machine 10 may include the interval time TS13 (from timing T22 to timing T23) in the initial position return time TS12. According to this, even when the return time of the board effect device (right) requires a long time, the gaming machine 10 can return the board effect device (right) to the initial position by the next round. .

In addition, although the securing of the return time of the board effect device (right) has been described, the same applies to the securing of the return time of the board effect device (right) for the board effect device (left).
[Modification Example 2 of Tenth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a second modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the state of the board effect device during the big hit and the light-emitting state of the special winning opening of the gaming machine according to the second modification of the tenth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 according to the second modification of the tenth embodiment is different from the tenth embodiment in that the operation state of the board effect devices 441 and 442 guides the game of the next round after the operation of the board effect devices 441 and 442. This is different from the embodiment (including the first modification). In order to describe differences between the gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the tenth embodiment, the operating state of the board effect device (right), the operating state of the special winning opening (right), and the special winning opening light emitting unit ( The light emission mode of (right) is included in the description.

  The special winning opening (right) switches from the closed state to the open state at timing T30, and switches from the open state to the closed state at timing T32. From timing T30 to timing T31, the board effect device (right) is at the initial position, and the special winning opening light emitting unit (right) is turned off. At timing T31, the gaming machine 10 operates the board effect device (right) from the initial position to the effecting position, and sets the special winning opening light emitting unit (right) to a rainbow light emission mode. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform the game guidance for the next round after the timing T34, not for the current round from the timing T30 to the timing T31. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can prepare a sufficient time for the player to aim for the big winning opening (right) in the next round.

  The board effect device (right) operates from the initial position to the effecting position after a delay time TS21 after the opening of the special winning opening (right) at timing T30. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate that the notification target of the board effect device (right) is not the current round. As the delay time TS21, a time sufficient to clearly indicate that the notification target is not the current round is secured. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the timing T30 is the timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed from the timing T30 or the timing of detecting a predetermined number of winning balls in the big winning opening (right). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 not only secures the delay time TS21, but also secures a round-round game guidance time TS22 sufficient for performing the game guidance of the next round during the current round.

  Further, the gaming machine 10, in case a round in a game guide time TS22 is insufficient, may be secured to the interval during a game guide time TS23 performing game guidance during the interval. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform the game guidance between the round game guidance time TS22 and the interval game guidance time TS23, that is, from the timing T31 to the timing T33. Further, the gaming machine 10 can ensure the operation time of the board effect device (right) and the initial position return time.

[Third Modification of Tenth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a third modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 is a front view showing an example of the game board according to the third modification of the tenth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the tenth embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 in that a board presentation device 443 performs game guidance instead of the board presentation devices 441 and 442.

  The game board 30 includes a board effect device 443. The board presentation device 443 has a training position (left) 443a and a training position (right) 443b as two operating states. When the special winning opening (left) (special fluctuation winning device 381) is activated, the gaming machine 10 moves the board effect device 443 to the exercise position (left) 443a, and the special fluctuation winning device 381 operates. It informs the player of the state.

  When the special winning opening (right) (special fluctuation winning device 382) is activated, the gaming machine 10 moves the board effect device 443 to the exercise position (right) 443b, and the special fluctuation winning device 382. Is informed to the player.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can guide which of the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 will be in operation, since one board presentation device 443 has two operation states.

The gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment (including the first to third modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a first prize device (special variable prize device 381), a second prize device (special variable prize device 382), a guide device (panel effect devices 441 and 442), and a control unit. (Game control device 100, effect control device 300). The first prize device and the second prize device can be converted into a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) in which the game balls can easily win compared to the first state. The guidance device is convertible between a first guidance state and a second guidance state. The control unit sets the guide device to the first guide state when the first winning device is in the second state, and sets the guide device to the second guide state when the second winning device is in the second state. Control.

  (2) The guide device of (1) includes a first guide device (panel effect device 441) and a second guide device (panel effect device 442). When the first winning device is in the second state, the control unit converts the first guiding device from the initial position to the guiding position (producing position) as the first guiding state, and the second winning device sets the first guiding device to the guiding position. When the second state is entered, the second guidance device is converted from the initial position to the guiding position (producing position) as the second guiding state.

  (3) The guide device (board rendering device 443) of (1) can be converted into an initial position, a first guiding position (443a), and a second guiding position (443b). When the first winning device is in the second state, the control unit converts the guiding device to the first guiding position as the first guiding state, and when the second winning device is in the second state, The guiding device is converted to the second guiding position as the second guiding state.

  (4) The control unit of (1) performs the first control state in which the first prize device is in the second state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (the big hit determination result is the big hit), and the second prize device is in the second control state. The game state (big hit) including the second control state that is the state is executed and controlled.

(5) The control unit of (1) sets the first guiding state when the first winning device is in the second state, and sets the second guiding state when the second winning device is in the second state. .
(6) When the first prize device or the second prize device is in the second state and the first prize device is in the second state when the first prize device or the second prize device is in the second state, the control unit of (1) sets the guide device to the first state. When the first prize device is in the second state after the first prize device or the second prize device in the second state is closed, the guide device is set to the first guide state, and in the second state, When the second winning device enters the second state after a certain first winning device or a second winning device is closed, the guiding device is set to the second guiding state.

(7) The control unit of (6) sets the guide device to the second guide state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first prize device or the second prize device became the second state.
[Eleventh embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment can capture a POP (Point Of Purchase) created in a game arcade and display a captured POP image.

  First, the gaming board 30 in the gaming machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the eleventh embodiment. Since the gaming machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment has substantially the same configuration as the gaming board 30 according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 2, differences will be described.

  The game board 30 includes a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) sensor 650 and a display device 41. The CMOS sensor 650 is provided on the front of the game board 30 in a direction capable of photographing the player facing the front. The CMOS sensor 650 is an image sensor forming one form of a photographing unit, and can be replaced with, for example, a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or the like. The CMOS sensor 650 may include necessary optical devices such as a lens and a filter. The display device 41 displays an image captured by the CMOS sensor 650. The display device 41 is an example of a captured image display unit. For example, the gaming machine 10 may display an image captured by the CMOS sensor 650 on a sub-display (not shown) instead of or in addition to the display 41. The sub display device may be provided on the game board 30 or may be provided on the front frame 12 and the like in addition to the game board 30.

  The game board 30 is provided with a board effect device 443 that performs a game effect by operating on the upper part of the center case 40. The board presentation device 443 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 190 toward the center of the display device 41. The CMOS sensor 650 is provided in the board effect device 443, and the imaging position can be changed according to the operation of the board effect device 443. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can photograph a photographing target (for example, a player or POP directly facing the display device 41) at a more suitable angle. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can photograph a photographing target at a plurality of angles with one CMOS sensor 650.

The CMOS sensor 650 is connected to the effect control device 300. Effect control device 300 inputs a captured image from CMOS sensor 650.
Next, a state of POP imaging by the CMOS sensor 650 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state of POP shooting in the gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment.

  Eleventh Embodiment gaming machine 10 of the glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 is assembled to the opening and closing pivotally outer frame (supporting frame) 11 via the front frame 12. The CMOS sensor 650 faces the front of the gaming machine 10 from a storage portion formed on the front side of the front frame 12.

  The gaming machine 10 permits POP shooting with the glass frame 15 opened. Since the gaming machine 10 is locked so that the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 cannot be opened, free shooting by the player is eliminated by setting the opening of the glass frame 15 as a condition for POP shooting.

  The gaming machine 10 performs POP shooting by receiving a shooting operation with the push button 25. At this time, the POP 660 to be photographed (subject) is held in the photographing range by the staff at the game hall. The gaming machine 10 has a live view function of displaying an image captured by the CMOS sensor 650 on the display device 41, thereby facilitating confirmation of a photographing timing of a photographed image to be stored and a photographing result.

  Next, the POP 660 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 is a diagram illustrating an example of the POP according to the eleventh embodiment. POP 660 is one form of advertising media. The POP 660 includes a POP area 661 and a setting area 662. The POP area is an area for displaying a notice or an advertisement (for example, character information such as “newly opened shop” or an image of a character) from the game arcade, and is an area where the POP display is to be performed on the display device 41. The setting area 662 is an area for displaying setting information used for setting the display timing of the POP area 661, and is an area that is not a target of the POP display on the display device 41.

  That is, the POP 660 includes a POP display target area that is a target of POP display on the display device 41 and a POP display non-target area that is not a target of POP display on the display device 41. The range of the POP display non-target area is defined by a two-dimensional barcode 663 which is one form of setting information, and the POP display target area is specified by a range excluding the non-display target area from the entire area.

  The two-dimensional barcode 663 includes, as setting information, specification information capable of specifying display timing or specification information capable of specifying the specification information held by the gaming machine 10 in advance. For example, the two-dimensional barcode 663 includes a QR (Quick Response) code (registered trademark). Note that the two-dimensional barcode 663 is an example of optically readable information, and may be a JAN (Japanese Article Number) code or a character string. The two-dimensional barcode 663 may be printed on the POP 660 or may be affixed to the POP 660 as a seal. The setting area 662 can be set to any position in the POP 660 according to the display position of the two-dimensional barcode 663.

  Next, display contents on the display device 41 based on the photographing result of the POP 660 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a diagram illustrating an example of a POP display on the display device according to the eleventh embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 displays the POP 660 photographed by the CMOS sensor 650 on the display device 41. The gaming machine 10 performs POP display on the display device 41 at a display timing set based on the two-dimensional barcode 663.

  The display device 41 displays a POP display and a display relating to a special map game in the display area 670. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform the POP display while executing the special map game.

  The display area 670 includes a POP display area 671 and a special figure game display area 672. The display device 41 displays a POP display in the POP display area 671 and displays a display relating to the special figure game in the special figure game display area 672. The special figure game display area 672 includes, for example, a special figure game game display 673, a reserved use display 674, a special figure 1 reserved number display 675, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 676.

  The positions of the POP display area 671 and the special figure game display area 672 in the display area 670 are determined by the setting area 662 in the POP 660. The special figure game display area 672 is determined as a position in the display area 670 corresponding to the position of the setting area 662 in the POP 660, and the POP display area 671 is determined as a remaining position in the display area 670. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can set the position of the POP display and the display timing only by photographing the POP 660. Further, the gaming machine 10 allows the position of the special figure game display area 672 to be confirmed by the setting area 662 in the POP 660, so that it is possible to prevent interference between the POP display and the display relating to the special figure game.

Next, a process regarding the POP setting executed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 197.
[POP setting condition monitoring processing]
First, the POP setting condition monitoring process for monitoring the conditions for performing the POP setting will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the POP setting condition monitoring processing in the effect control device of the eleventh embodiment. The POP setting condition monitoring process is a process executed by the control unit (control unit (CPU 311) of effect control device 300) during the hall / player setting mode process (step D20) of the main process (see FIG. 125).

  [Step D231] The control unit determines whether or not the gaming state is waiting for a customer. If the game state is waiting for a customer, the control unit proceeds to step D232, and if not waiting for a customer, the POP setting condition monitoring process ends. The determination in this step as to whether the gaming state is waiting for a customer is an example of a POP setting start condition relating to the gaming state. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform the POP setting only at a timing that does not hinder the progress of the game.

  [Step D232] The control unit determines whether or not the glass frame is being opened. The control unit proceeds to Step D233 if the glass frame is being opened, and ends the POP setting condition monitoring processing if the glass frame is not being opened. The determination of whether or not the glass frame is being opened in this step is an example of a POP setting start condition relating to the exclusion of the operation by the player. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform the POP setting only for the staff in the game arcade.

  [Step D233] The control unit determines whether or not a required operation (PB operation) by the push button 25 has been detected. When the PB operation is detected, the control unit proceeds to Step D234, and when the PB operation is not detected, the POP setting condition monitoring process ends. Note that the determination of the PB operation detection in this step is an example of a POP setting start condition relating to confirmation of a POP setting intention. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform the POP setting by confirming the intention of the POP setting.

  [Step D234] The control unit performs a POP setting process. The POP setting process is a process for performing settings related to POP display. The POP setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Control unit ends the POP setting condition monitoring process after the execution of POP setting process.

[POP setting processing]
The POP setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the POP setting processing in the effect control device of the eleventh embodiment. The POP setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D234 of the POP setting condition monitoring process.

  [Step D241] The control unit starts photographing with the CMOS sensor 650, displays the photographed image on the display device 41 using the live view function, and notifies the user that the preparation for POP photographing is ready by text display or voice. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can cause the staff in the game hall to post the POP 660 in front of the CMOS sensor 650 and adjust the posting position while checking the display of the POP 660 on the display device 41.

  [Step D242] The control unit waits for detection of a shooting operation, and proceeds to step D243 when detecting a shooting operation. For example, the control unit detects a pressing operation of the push button 25 by a clerk as a shooting operation.

[Step D243] The control unit acquires the POP660 shooting result based on the detection of the shooting operation.
[Step D244] The control unit executes a POP setting information detection process. The POP setting information detection process is a process of detecting setting information (POP setting information) related to POP display from a shooting result of the POP 660. The POP setting information detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D245] The control unit displays the POP setting information detected by the POP setting information detection process on the display device 41. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can cause the staff at the game arcade to check the POP setting information.

  [Step D246] The control unit confirms the POP setting information. Control unit proceeds to step D241 when the clerk of the game arcade is accepted resetting of POP setting information. The control unit ends the POP setting process when receiving the confirmation of the POP setting information from the staff of the game arcade.

[POP setting information detection processing]
The POP setting information detection processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 196 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the POP setting information detection processing in the effect control device of the eleventh embodiment. The POP setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D244 of the POP setting process.

  [Step D251] The control unit detects a setting area of the POP 660 from a shooting result of the POP 660. The control unit can extract the two-dimensional barcode 663 from the imaging result of the POP 660, and can detect the set area from the display position and the size of the extracted two-dimensional barcode 663.

[Step D252] The control unit sets the special figure game display area 672 in the display area 670 based on the detected setting area.
[Step D253] The control unit sets the POP display area 671 by excluding the special figure game display area 672 from the display area 670.

[Step D254] The control unit acquires the setting information from the two-dimensional barcode 663, and ends the POP setting information detection processing.
The effect control device 300 can hold the information input from the CMOS sensor 650 in the FeRAM 323. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can access the information input from the CMOS sensor 650 even when the power is shut off, and does not need to request the staff in the game arcade to perform a POP display operation every time the power is turned on. After turning on the power, the CPU 311 transfers image information related to POP display from the FeRAM 323 to the VDP 312. Accordingly, the VDP 312 can generate an image to be displayed on the display device 41 using the image information regarding the POP display.

  Next, the setting information acquired from the two-dimensional barcode 663 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 is a diagram illustrating an example of the setting information acquired from the two-dimensional barcode according to the eleventh embodiment.

  The control unit obtains setting information from the two-dimensional barcode 663. The setting information includes setting information relating to the special figure game display area occupying the display area 670 and setting information relating to the timing of performing the POP display. The setting information relating to the special figure game display area is detected based on the display position and size of the two-dimensional barcode 663. The control unit detects, for example, the x-coordinate (Xa) and the y-coordinate (Ya) of the reference point as the position of the special-figure game display area as setting information on the special-figure game display area, and determines the size of the special-figure game display area. As the (size), the size in the x direction (Xb) and the size in the y direction (Yb) are detected.

  The setting information relating to the timing of performing the POP display includes a setting relating to the periodic display (periodic display setting) and a setting relating to the irregular display (irregular display setting) as setting items. The periodic display setting is a setting relating to the timing of performing a POP display serving as a timer trigger, and the irregular display setting is a setting relating to the timing of performing a POP display serving as an event trigger.

  The periodic display setting includes a POP display start timing (periodic display start timing) and a POP display end timing (periodic display end timing) as setting items. The regular display start timing includes a display date, a display time, a displayable state, and whether or not the timing is adjusted. The display date is a date on which the POP display is performed, and may be uniquely identifiable, may be specified by a day of the week, the number of days elapsed since the start of operation, may be specified as a period, It may be specified as a day that satisfies the predetermined condition (for example, Saturday or Sunday between 20th and 30th every month). Note that the current date and time in the gaming machine 10 can be specified using the RTC 338.

  The display time is a start time of the POP display, and may be uniquely identifiable, or may be specified as a time that satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 15 minutes every hour). The displayable state is a game state in which POP display is permitted, and is specified from options prepared in advance. The timing adjustment presence / absence indicates whether or not the timing of the regular display start timing is adjusted, and is designated from options prepared in advance. The control unit immediately starts the POP display when there is no timing adjustment of the regular display start timing, and adjusts (delays) the regular display start timing according to the option when there is the timing adjustment of the regular display start timing. To start POP display. For example, when the option with the timing adjustment is the next variation start, the regular display start timing is adjusted to the next variation start time of the special figure game.

  In addition, time display start timing of the illustrated, for example, a display date "October 1, 2006 to October 7 days", the display time "every hour on the hour", the display state "JP diagram variably displayed in" timing adjustment The presence / absence is set as “Yes (the next fluctuation starts)”.

  The regular display end timing is a timing at which the POP display ends, and is designated from among options prepared in advance. Further, the illustrated regular display end timing is, for example, “symbol stop” as the end timing of the POP display. In addition to the event trigger, the regular display end timing may be a timer trigger such as “15 seconds have elapsed since the start of the POP display”. When the regular display end timing is used as the event trigger, the regular display end timing may be associated with the fact that the variable display game derives a specific result mode. According to this, even when the POP display is performed for a long period of time, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the possibility that the player will be dissatisfied with the POP display.

  The irregular display setting includes POP display display timing (irregular display timing) as a setting item. The irregular display timing includes a display condition. The display condition is a start condition of the POP display, and is specified from options prepared in advance. The irregular display timing shown in the figure is, for example, a specific effect (for example, a cut-in for effecting the degree of expectation) during the period “October 1 to October 7” and the time “18:00 to 19:00”. ) Is replaced when this occurs. According to this, even when the POP display is performed instead of the specific effect, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the possibility that the player will be dissatisfied, and the POP display can be one element of improving the interest.

[POP display processing]
Next, the POP display processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the POP display processing in the effect control device of the eleventh embodiment. The POP display process is a process for performing a POP display based on the setting information. The POP setting condition monitoring process is a process executed by the control unit during the effect display editing process (step D23) of the main process (see FIG. 125).

  [Step D261] The control unit determines whether or not POP is being displayed on the display device 41. When the POP display is not being performed on the display device 41, the control unit proceeds to Step D262. When the POP display is being performed, the control unit proceeds to Step D266.

  [Step D262] Since POP is not being displayed on the display device 41, the control unit obtains POP display start conditions (regular display start timing and irregular display timing).

  [Step D263] The control unit determines whether or not the POP display start condition is satisfied. If the POP display start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to Step D264. If the POP display start condition is not satisfied, the control unit proceeds to step D264. The POP display processing ends.

[Step D264] The control unit sets a POP display in the POP display area 671.
[Step D265] The control unit sets the special figure game display in the special figure game display area 672, and ends the POP display processing.

  [Step D266] Since the POP display is being performed on the display device 41, the control unit obtains POP display end conditions (regular display end timing and irregular display timing). Note that the POP display end condition includes acceptance of a POP display cancel operation by the player. The control unit receives a POP display cancel operation by the player by a POP display cancel process described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D267] The control unit determines whether or not the POP display end condition is satisfied. If the POP display end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to Step D268. If the POP display end condition is not satisfied, the control unit proceeds to step D268. The POP display processing ends.

[Step D268] The control unit resets the POP display area 671.
[Step D269] The control unit resets the special figure game display area 672, that is, returns to the state before the POP display, and ends the POP display processing.

[POP display cancel processing]
Next, the POP display cancel processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the POP display cancel processing in the effect control device of the eleventh embodiment. The POP display cancel process is a process of performing a POP display based on the setting information. The POP setting condition monitoring process is a process executed by the control unit during the effect button input process (step D19) of the main process (see FIG. 125).

  [Step D271] The control unit determines whether or not the player has performed an operation to cancel the POP display. For example, the control unit can accept a pressing operation of the push button 25 during the POP display as a canceling operation. The control unit proceeds to Step D272 when detecting a cancel operation of the POP display by the player, and terminates the POP display cancel process when the cancel operation is not detected.

  [Step D272] The control unit determines whether or not the special map game is deriving a specific result (for example, a big hit). The control unit proceeds to Step D273 when the special figure game is deriving the specific result, and proceeds to Step D274 when the specific result is not being derived.

  [Step D273] The control unit sets a change in the display mode of the POP display in the POP display area 671 and ends the POP display cancel processing. The change in the display mode of the POP display may be any mode that can be recognized by the player, and includes, for example, a change in color, enlargement, and reduction. In addition, the control unit edits the display mode of the changed POP display in the effect display editing process (step D23) based on the setting of the change of the display mode.

  [Step D274] The control unit sets the end of the POP display. That is, the control unit, as a POP display end condition in POP display processing, receives a POP display cancellation operation by the player. After setting the end of the POP display, the control unit ends the POP display cancel processing.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 associates the notice of the specific result derived in the special map game with the operation of canceling the POP display. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can produce a sense of expectation of the player for the operation of canceling the POP display. That is, the gaming machine 10 can give the player a sense of expectation for the POP display, which is a premise of the POP display cancel operation. Such a gaming machine 10 can reduce the annoyance that the player feels about the POP display, and can improve the notification effect expected by the gaming hall.

  Next, the display contents on the display device 41 based on the change of the display mode of the POP display set in step D273 of the POP display cancel process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 200 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in the display mode of the POP display on the display device according to the eleventh embodiment.

  The display area 670a includes a POP display area 671a and a special figure game display area 672a. The display device 41 displays the POP display with the display mode changed in the POP display area 671a, and displays a display relating to the special figure game in the special figure game display area 672a. The POP display area 671a replaces blue display with rainbow display in an area where a specific color such as blue is set, for example.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 can change the display mode of the POP display by image processing such as reduction, enlargement, and color change. Further, the gaming machine 10 may store the two or more POP displays in the storage unit in association with each other, and change the display mode of the POP displays by replacing the first POP displays with the second POP displays. In this case, in the gaming machine 10, the CMOS sensor 650 provided in the board effect device 443 displays two photographic images obtained by shooting one POP display at different positions of the board effect device 443 as the first POP display and the second POP image. Can be used as a POP display.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform a game effect using the POP display by changing the display mode of the POP display. Further, the gaming machine 10 is reducing the area of the special figure game display area 672a because the POP display is being performed, and cannot secure a sufficient area for performing the effect in the special figure game display area 672a. However, the gaming machine 10 can substitute a part of the effect function in the special figure game display area 672a by assigning a part of the effect to the POP display area 671a.

[Modification Example 1 of Eleventh Embodiment]
Next, a POP according to a first modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 is a diagram illustrating an example of a POP according to Modification 1 of the eleventh embodiment.

  The POP 660a shown in (1) defines a setting area 662a by two two-dimensional bar codes 663a and 663b. The setting area 662a is a rectangular area including the two-dimensional barcodes 663a and 663b in the area. Thus, the POP 660a can freely set the position and size of the setting area 662a based on the display positions of the two two-dimensional barcodes 663a and 663b. For example, the POP 660a can set the setting area 662a that does not interfere with the fan-shaped character strings by displaying the two two-dimensional barcodes 663a and 663b at the lower central portion that does not interfere with the fan-shaped character strings. Further, the two two-dimensional bar code 663a, 663 b, by defining the set region 662a, defining the POP area 661a serving as its remaining region.

  The POP 660b shown in (2) defines a setting area 662b by two two-dimensional barcodes 663c and 663d. The setting area 662b is a rectangular area including the two-dimensional barcodes 663c and 663d in the area. In this manner, the POP 660b can freely set the position and size of the setting area 662b based on the display positions of the two two-dimensional barcodes 663c and 663d. For example, the POP 660b displays two two-dimensional barcodes 663c and 663d on the lower right side that does not interfere with a character string lined up to the right, thereby setting a setting area 662b that does not interfere with a character line lined up to the right. Further, the two two-dimensional barcodes 663c and 663d define a setting area 662b, thereby defining a POP area 661b which is an additional area.

[Modification 2 of Eleventh Embodiment]
Next, a state of POP imaging by the CMOS sensor of the second modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 is a view illustrating an example of a state of POP shooting in a gaming machine of Modification Example 2 of the eleventh embodiment.

  In the gaming machine 10 shown in (1), a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 is assembled to an outer frame (supporting frame) 11 via a front frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. The CMOS sensor 650a is provided in a storage portion formed on the front side of the front frame 12 so as to face the plane direction of the glass frame 15 opened by an angle α. Gaming machine 10 permits the POP photographing in a state opening the glass frame 15 by an angle alpha. In the gaming machine 10, the POP 660a can be supported by the glass frame 15, and when the glass frame 15 is opened by the angle α, the POP 660a can be used as the front of the CMOS sensor 650a.

  The gaming machine 10 performs POP shooting by receiving a shooting operation with the push button 25. At this time, the POP 660a to be photographed (subject) is held in the photographing range by the glass frame 15. The gaming machine 10 has a live view function of displaying an image captured by the CMOS sensor 650a on the display device 41, and facilitates confirmation of a photographing timing of a photographed image to be stored and a photographing result.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform POP shooting without the staff of the game arcade supporting the POP 660a. In addition, since the display surface of the display device 41 is not shielded by the POP 660a during photographing, the gaming machine 10 facilitates confirmation of photographed contents.

  In the gaming machine 10 shown in (2), a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 via a front frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. CMOS sensor 650b is in a state opening the glass frame 15 by an angle β so as to face the front side of the front frame 12 is provided on the back surface side of the glass frame 15. The gaming machine 10 permits POP shooting in a state where the glass frame 15 is opened by the angle β. Gaming machine 10 is adapted to be supported by the front frame 12 (or game board 30) to POP660b, the POP660b when opening the glass frame 15 by an angle β may be the front of the CMOS sensor 650b.

  Gaming machine 10 performs POP shooting accepts imaging operation by the push button 25. At this time, the POP 660b to be photographed (subject) is held in the photographing range by the front frame 12. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform POP shooting without the staff of the game hall supporting the POP 660b.

[Modification 3 of Eleventh Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a gaming machine 10 according to a third modification of the eleventh embodiment. The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the eleventh embodiment can record an illegal situation by using the CMOS sensor 650.

[Illegal situation recording process]
Next, the fraud situation recording processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the unauthorized situation recording processing in the effect control device of the third modification of the eleventh embodiment. The fraudulent situation recording process is a process of recording a fraudulent situation photographed by the CMOS sensor 650 in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100. The improper situation recording process may be, for example, a process executed by the control unit (the control unit (CPU 311 of the effect control device 300)) after the launch information control process (step D30) of the main process (see FIG. 125). it can.

  [Step D281] The control unit determines whether or not special fraud is detected. The control unit proceeds to Step D282 when detecting special fraud, and ends the fraud situation recording processing when detecting no special fraud. The special fraud is an error that is recorded in the fraud situation among the errors detected by the gaming machine 10. For example, special fraud is an error related to fraudulent behavior of a player, such as magnet fraud or radio wave fraud. The control unit (effect control device 300) can receive a notification of special fraud from the game control device 100. Note that the control unit may detect a special fraud independently of the game control device 100. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may set all the frauds detected by the gaming machine as special fraud targets.

  [Step D282] The control unit uses the CMOS sensor 650 to photograph an illegal situation. For example, the CMOS sensor 650 can take a picture of a cheating person from the front. In addition, the CMOS sensor 650b according to the second modification of the eleventh embodiment can photograph an illegal act on a winning opening or the like. The control unit may be configured to capture one or more still images by the CMOS sensor 650, or may be configured to capture a moving image. Further, the control unit may be configured to take an image with the CMOS sensor 650 provided in the board effect device 443 at two or more timings at different positions of the board effect device 443.

  [Step D283] The control unit acquires unauthorized information. The fraudulent information may include information useful for grasping the situation at the time of error occurrence, such as the type of error and the time of occurrence of the error, such as the gaming state at the time of error occurrence.

  [Step D284] The control unit records, in a memory (for example, FeRAM 323), improper situation data obtained by pairing improper situation photographing data and improper information. Note that the fraudulent situation data recorded in the memory can be accessed from the hall / player setting mode process (step D20) of the main process (see FIG. 125), and the gaming machine 10 displays the fraudulent situation on the display device 41. can do. Incidentally, the game machine 10, which can be external memory connected to the attraction control apparatus 300 (e.g., USB (Universal Serial Bus) memory) may be used to record the incorrect status data to.

Such a gaming machine 10 suppresses fraudulent activities in a game arcade and contributes to maintaining a healthy gaming environment.
The gaming machine 10 of the above-described eleventh embodiment (including the first to third modifications) has the following features in one aspect.

  (1) The gaming machine 10 includes a photographing device (CMOS sensor 650) and a display device (display device 41), and includes an image setting unit and a display control unit. Image setting means, non-gaming state (e.g., in plying) predetermined photographing condition in (e.g., opening of the glass frame 15, a pressing operation of the push button 25) when is satisfied, the image photographed by the photographing apparatus (POP660 Is stored in the storage unit (FeRAM 323), and image display conditions (regular display setting, irregular display setting) are set. The display control means displays the image stored in the storage unit on the display device when the display condition is satisfied. The image setting means can be realized by the control unit executing a predetermined program. The display control means can be realized by the control unit executing a predetermined program.

  (2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a real-time clock (RTC 338), and the image setting means sets the output value of the real-time clock to a predetermined value (display date, display time, or display time in the periodic display setting) as an image display condition. (Display date, display time) of the display conditions in the irregular display setting.

  (3) The display control means of (1) or (2) converts the display area (display area 670) of the display device into a first partial display area (POP display area 671) and a second partial display area (special figure game). Display area 672), an image stored in the storage unit is displayed in the first partial display area, and a variable display game is displayed in the second partial display area.

(4) The image setting means of (1) to (3) specifies the display condition of the image from the identification information (two-dimensional barcode 663) included in the image.
(5) The image setting means of (1) to (4) divides the display area into a first partial display area and a second partial display area based on the display position of the identification information included in the image.

  (6) The gaming machine 10 of (1) to (5) has a game board (game board 30) detachably attached to the main body frame (front frame 12), and is rotatable with respect to the main body frame. And a transparent member holding frame (glass frame 15) that is attached to the shaft.

(7) The gaming machine 10 of (1) to (6) includes a photographing device on the main body frame or the game board with the transparent member holding frame facing the back side.
(8) The gaming machine 10 of (1) to (6) includes a photographing device in the transparent member holding frame so that the main body frame or the game board faces the front side.

(9) The image setting means of (7) or (8) sets one of the photographing conditions that the transparent member holding frame is open to the main body frame.
(10) The image setting means of (9) sets one of the photographing conditions that the transparent member holding frame is opened at a predetermined angle with respect to the main body frame.

(11) The gaming machine 10 of (1) to (10) includes a cancel unit that accepts a cancel operation (press operation of the push button 25) and cancels the display of the image.
(12) The canceling means of (11) cancels the cancel operation received in association with the result derived by the variable display game.

(13) The display control means of (12) changes the display mode of the image when canceling the cancel operation received by the cancel means.
(14) The gaming machine 10 of (1) has a movable portion (board effect device) on the game board, and the photographing device is provided in the movable portion.

  (15) In the gaming machine 10 of (14), the first photographing data photographed when the movable part is in the first position (for example, the initial position) and the movable part in the second position (for example, during the production) Position) and the second photographing data photographed when the camera is at the position).

(16) In the gaming machine 10 of (15), when the illegality is detected, the game machine 10 shoots an image.
[Twelfth embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 of a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the gaming machine shown in the twelfth embodiment, the effect display in the variable display game can be performed by using the push button (option setting unit) 25. First, the connection between the effect control device of the twelfth embodiment and the push button 25 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a diagram illustrating a connection example of the effect control device and the push buttons of the twelfth embodiment.

  The push button 25 includes a push button LED 25c, a touch sensor 25d, and a push button SW25e. The push button LED 25c is a nine-system full color LED. The touch sensor 25d can detect a player's touch operation in eight places. The push button SW25e can detect a pressing operation of the push button 25.

  The effect control device 300 and the push button 25 are electrically connected. Effect control device 300 outputs a control signal of push button LED 25c to push button 25, and inputs a detection signal of touch sensor 25d and a detection signal of push button SW 25e from push button 25.

  Here, the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b are signals detected by a combination of a detection signal of the touch sensor 25d and a detection signal of the push button SW25e. For example, a state in which the touch sensor 25d detects a touch operation at the left and right positions corresponding to the selection operation and a state in which the push button SW25e detects the push operation of the push button 25 corresponds to the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. The state where the touch sensor 25d detects the touch operation at the center position corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW25e detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b.

  Next, the arrangement of the push button LED 25c and the touch sensor 25d in the push button 25 of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 205 is a diagram illustrating an example of the arrangement of the push button LEDs and the touch sensors in the push button according to the twelfth embodiment.

  The push button 25 has a columnar shape that has a substantially circular top surface when the player looks down. The push button 25 has nine small circle portions 250 to 258 each having a size similar to a fingertip on the upper surface thereof, the small circle portion 250 is arranged at the center of the upper surface, and eight circles are formed on the circumference surrounding the small circle portion 250. Two small circle portions 251 to 258 are arranged.

  The small circle part 250 arranges one push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW4) within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 251 is located to the left of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one system of push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW1) within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 252 is positioned diagonally above and to the left of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one system of push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW2) within the circumference thereof. The small circle part 253 is located above the small circle part 250, and arranges one push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW3) within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 254 is positioned diagonally above and to the right of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one system of push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW5) within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 255 is located to the right of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one system of push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW6) within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 256 is located diagonally downward and to the right of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW7) within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 257 is located below the small circle portion 250, and arranges one system of push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW8) within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 258 is located diagonally downward and to the left of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c is arranged within the circumference thereof. Since the small circle portion 258 does not include the touch sensor 25d, the small circle portion 258 has a star-shaped polygonal design so as to be easily distinguished from the small circle portions 250 to 257 in which the touch sensor 25d is arranged. Further, since the small circle portion 258 does not dispose the touch sensor 25d, it can be a home position when the player operates the eight touch sensors 25d. When the push button 25 is in the center of the gaming machine 10 and the operation unit 24 is on the right side, the small circle part 258 is located on the near left side of the small circle parts 251 to 258 when viewed from the player side. This makes it easy for the player to treat the small circle portion 258 as the home position.

  In the push button 25, the touch sensor 25d is not arranged in the small circle portion 258, but the touch sensor 25d may be arranged in the same manner as in the small circle portions 250 to 257. Further, the push button 25 may include a touch panel capable of detecting the position coordinates of the touch operation of the player, instead of the touch sensor 25d. In this case, the effect control device 300 can detect a touch operation on the small circle portions 250 to 258 from the coordinates corresponding to the small circle portions 250 to 258 and the position coordinates detected on the touch panel.

  It will now be described with reference to FIG. 206 for the effect display in the variable display game using the push button 25. FIG. 206 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect display in the variable display game using the push buttons according to the twelfth embodiment of the twelfth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 has an RTC 338 in the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 monitors the output of the RTC 338, and performs a roulette display effect using the push button LED 25c of the push button 25 at a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) or at a predetermined time (for example, 12:00). The roulette display effect is a form of an announcement notification effect that is executed in association with the result mode derived from the variable display game (special figure game). Effect control unit 300 includes a is being variably displayed in the variable display games, the execution conditions of the roulette display effect that the output is a predetermined value from RTC338.

  The push button 25 shown in (1) indicates the light emission mode of the push button LED 25c after the start of the roulette display effect. The push button 25 sequentially switches on and off the nine push button LEDs 25c. This allows the gaming machine 10 to perform roulette display such that the lit location of the push button LED 25c moves clockwise. Note that the gaming machine 10 derives a display mode indicating the result of the roulette display effect after roulette display (moving display) for a predetermined time. The gaming machine 10 can also detect a pressing operation of the push button 25 and derive a display mode indicating a result of the roulette display effect.

  The push button 25 shown in (2) shows a state in which the push button LED 25c corresponding to the small circle portion 258 having a star-shaped polygonal design is turned on white, and the other push button LEDs 25c are turned off. Such a display mode is one of the display modes derived from the roulette display effect, in which the variable display game derives a special result mode (for example, a big hit) or the expected value for deriving the special result mode is Announce big (eg, extreme heat reach). It should be noted that the push button LED 25c corresponding to the small circle portion 258 may be illuminated in rainbow to notify that the variable display game derives a special result mode (for example, a big hit probability).

  The push button 25 shown in (3) shows a state in which the push button LED 25c corresponding to the small circle portion 252 having no star-shaped polygon is turned on white, and the other push button LEDs 25c are turned off. Such a display mode is one of the display modes derived from the roulette display effect, and notifies that the variable display game does not derive a special result mode (for example, a loss).

  Push button 25 is located in the hand of the player as shown in FIG. 1, it is easy check of the display mode to the player. On the other hand, the push button 25, for the third party other than the player, not easily confirm the display mode. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 determines the execution timing of the game effect using the RTC 338, so that even if the execution timing of the roulette display effect is coincident in a plurality of game machines, the game effect range of the game effect is Can be limited to

  Next, feedback of the result of the roulette display effect from the push button 25 to the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a diagram illustrating an example of feedback of a result of a roulette display effect from the push button to the display device according to the twelfth embodiment.

  The variable display screen 680 is a display content of the display device 41 when the result of the roulette display effect is fed back from the push button 25. The variable display screen 680 includes a hold digest display 664, a special figure 1 hold number display 667, a special figure 2 hold number display 668, a special figure game game display 671, a feedback display 682, and a hold storage display 6851. 6858. The feedback display 682 is a display for guiding the feedback of the result of the roulette display effect derived with the push button 25. The display for each hold storage 6851 to 6858 is a display column of each hold storage. The displays for storage-by-reservation 6851 to 6858 display the storages for which the display mode is updated based on the result of the roulette display effect. For example, the small circle portion 258 indicates that the result of the roulette display effect in which the emission color is derived from the rainbow color corresponds to the hold storage display 6857.

The push button 25 initializes (for example, turns off) the display of the small circle portions 250 to 258 by feeding back the result of the roulette display effect.
In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can clearly display the result of the roulette display effect derived with the push button 25 on the display device 41. Such a gaming machine can provide a novel effect to the player, and can also improve the playability.

The gaming machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a first display device (display device 41), a second display device (push button LED 25c), and a control unit (effect control device 300). The first display device can display a variable display game. The control unit notifies the second display device of a result mode derived from the variable display game (special figure game) on the second display device in advance when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

(2) The control unit of (1) includes a real-time clock (RTC 338), and one of the predetermined conditions is that the output value of the real-time clock is a predetermined value.
(3) The control unit in (2) sets one of the predetermined conditions that the variable display game is being executed.

(4) The second display device of (1) is provided on the operation unit (push button 25) of the main body frame (front frame 12).
(5) The control unit of (1) to (3) feeds back the result derived by the second display device to the first display device.

(6) The control unit of (5) changes the display mode of the start memory displayed by the first display device.
[Thirteenth embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 of a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment has a holding pedestal display function for specifying information on holding storage. The hold pedestal display function functions as a hold storage area display that specifies a display area related to hold storage, and in one aspect, functions as a background display of the display area related to hold storage. Note that the gaming machine 10 has two or more display patterns for the display of the holding pedestal, and at least some of the display patterns can be selected by the player. First, the stage configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a diagram illustrating an example of a stage configuration in the special figure game of the thirteenth embodiment.

  The illustrated table is a stage configuration table showing the stage configuration of each stage in the special figure game. The stage configuration table includes an item “stage”, an item “hold pedestal display”, and an item “mini-character”.

  The item “stage” indicates the type of stage. The stage is a display screen on which a predetermined display theme is set. The display mode of the display elements included in the display screen is determined according to the set display theme. The stages include, for example, a sea stage, a land stage, and an empty stage.

  The item “holding pedestal display” indicates a type of holding pedestal display that can be selected for each stage. The item “mini-character” indicates a mini-character associated with the type of the holding pedestal display. The mini-character is displayed on a part of the screen during normal display, and produces a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) or a hold notice. A mini character is one form of a character.

  For example, in stage 1, there are two types of holding pedestal display, pattern 1-1 and pattern 1-2. When the holding pedestal display of the pattern 1-1 is displayed on the stage 1, the mini-character is the character A. If the hold pedestal display pattern 1-2 is displayed at stage 1, the mini character is the character B.

  In stage 2, the pedestal display is pattern 2. When the pedestal display of the pattern 2 is displayed on the stage 2, the mini-character is the character C. In stage 3, the holding pedestal display is not displayed. In stage 3, no mini-character is displayed.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 has a stage (for example, stage 1) in which a plurality of patterns of the holding pedestal display can be selected. The gaming machine 10 allows the player to change the pattern setting of the holding pedestal display on the stage 1.

  The gaming machine 10 changes the mini-character along with the change of the pattern of the holding pedestal display. In the gaming machine 10, since the pattern of the holding pedestal display is associated with the mini-character on a one-to-one basis, the change status of the pattern of the holding pedestal display is also guided (notified) to the player based on the mini-character changing status. can do. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make the player more surely grasp the change state of the pattern of the holding pedestal display.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 only needs to be able to change the mini-character in accordance with each of the patterns of the holding pedestal display at the stage where the pattern of the holding pedestal display can be selected, and the mini-character is common to two or more stages. They may be associated with each other. For example, the character A may be shared by the pattern 1-1 for displaying the pedestal on the stage 1 and the pattern 2 for displaying the pedestal on the stage 2.

  The gaming machine 10 can also associate two or more mini-characters with one pattern of the holding pedestal display. In this case, the gaming machine 10 associates the mini-character with each of the patterns of the holding pedestal display so that the mini-characters do not overlap with each other on the same stage. It can be informed by the character. For example, gaming machine 10 may associate two mini-characters of character A1 or character A2 with pattern 1-1 and two mini-characters of character B1 or character B2 with pattern 1-2.

  The gaming machine 10 only needs to include a stage (for example, stage 1) capable of selecting a plurality of patterns of the holding pedestal display, and a stage (for example, stage 2) associated with one pattern of the holding pedestal display. Or a stage (for example, stage 3) to which no pattern of the holding pedestal display is associated. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 may be composed of only the stage 1 or, for example, may be composed of the stage 1 and the stage 2 or the stage 1 and the stage 3.

  In addition, when there is a stage change, the gaming machine 10 can store the hold base display selected in the stage before the change, and can set the hold base display in storage when the stage returns. Thus, the gaming machine 10 does not need to select the display of the holding pedestal each time the stage is changed. The gaming machine 10 may store the currently selected mini-character instead of storing the display of the holding pedestal selected at the stage before the change.

  Next, a screen display example in each stage will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 209 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen display on the stage 1 in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 210 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen display on stage 2 and stage 3 according to the thirteenth embodiment.

  A screen 700 shown in FIG. 209 (1) shows a screen display when the pedestal display on the stage 1 is the pattern 1-1. The screen 700 includes a special figure game game display 701, a background display 702, a pedestal display 703, a mini-character display 704, a special figure 1 reserved number display 705, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 706. .

The special figure game play display 701 displays the variable display state of the special figure variable display game using a decorative symbol. The background display 702 displays a background according to the display theme of the stage 1.
The hold pedestal display 703 specifies a display area related to hold storage as a base display of a display related to hold storage. The holding pedestal display 703 is displayed in a display mode (color, shape) according to the pattern 1-1. For example, the holding pedestal display 703 is displayed in a substantially rectangular shape with rounded corners. The reservation base display 703 includes a reservation storage area display 703a and a reservation digestion area display 703b.

  The hold storage area display 703a specifies the display range of the hold storage display 703c. For example, the reserved storage area display 703a displays eight rectangular frames arranged in the horizontal direction, and the reserved storage displays 703c are left-justified one by one in the frames from the first frame to the eighth frame. Make it displayable. The reserved storage area display 703a clearly indicates the number of reserved storage of the special figure variable display game by the display mode (for example, circular icon display) of the reserved storage display 703c, and notifies the degree of expectation for the game result for each reserved storage display 703c.

  For example, the display mode of the hold storage display 703c defaults to a circular icon, and displays a chance icon at the time of advance notice. The chance icon is capable of notifying the degree of expectation with a color such as green or red, and also notifying the degree of expectation with a higher degree of expectation by displaying a cherry tree pattern or a rainbow. Further, the display mode of the hold storage display 703c is not limited to the icon display, but may be a character display, etc., and may be determined by the theme of a boat race, a bicycle race, a horse race, or the like. "Strike", "V", etc. may be displayed. In addition, the display mode of the hold storage display 703c may be such that the degree of expectation is notified by combining a character display with a color, a cherry pattern, a rainbow display, or the like.

  The reserved digest display 703b specifies the display range of the reserved digest display 703d. For example, the reserved digest display 703b displays an octagonal frame, and allows one reserved digest display 703d to be displayed in the frame. The reserved digestion area display 703b indicates that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notifies the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode of the reserved digestion display 703d (for example, circular icon display). The display mode of the hold digest display 703d may be the same as the display mode of the hold storage display 703c, or may be a step-up display mode of the hold storage display 703c.

  The mini-character display 704 displays a character A corresponding to the reserved pedestal display 703 of the pattern 1-1. The character A is, for example, a boy character, and is arranged on a circular display that clearly indicates a mini-character display position. Gaming machine 10, when displaying the pending mount display 703 at stage 1, demonstrates that hold pedestal display pattern selected by displaying the character A is a pending mount display 703.

  The special figure 1 reserved number display 705 displays the reserved storage number (starting stored number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 reserved number display 706 displays the reserved number of special figure 2 games. The number of reserved storages displayed by the reserved storage area display 703a corresponds to the sum of the number of reserved storages displayed by the special figure 1 reserved number display 705 and the number of reserved storages displayed by the special figure 2 reserved number display 706. For example, when the special figure 1 hold number display 705 displays “1” and the special figure 2 hold number display 706 displays “0”, the hold storage area display 703a stores and holds one round icon. Indicates that the number is "1".

  A screen 710 shown in FIG. 209 (2) shows a screen display when the pedestal display in the stage 1 is the pattern 1-2. The screen 710 includes a special figure game game display 701, a background display 702, a reservation base display 713, a mini character display 714, a special figure 1 reservation number display 705, and a special figure 2 reservation number display 706 in the display contents. .

  The holding pedestal display 713 is displayed in a display mode (color, shape) according to the pattern 1-2. For example, the holding pedestal display 713 is displayed in a cloud-like manner. The holding base display 713 includes a holding storage area display 713a and a holding digestion area display 713b.

  Hold storage area display 713a exhibits at display range of pending memory display 713c. For example, the hold storage area display 713a displays eight octagonal frames arranged side by side, and the hold storage displays 713c are left-justified one by one in the frames from the first frame to the eighth frame. Make it displayable. The reserved storage area display 713a clearly indicates the number of reserved memories of the special figure variable display game by the display mode (for example, circular icon display) of the reserved storage display 713c, and notifies the degree of expectation for the game result for each reserved storage display 713c.

  The reserved digest display 713b specifies the display range of the reserved digest display 713d. For example, the reserved digest display 713b displays a star-shaped frame, and one reserved digest 713d can be displayed in the frame. The reserved digestion area display 713b indicates that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notifies the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode of the reserved digest display 713d (for example, circular icon display).

  The mini-character display 714 displays a character B corresponding to the reserved pedestal display 713 of the pattern 1-2. The character B is a girl character, for example, and is arranged on a circular display that clearly indicates a mini-character display position. When displaying the reserved pedestal display 713 on the stage 1, the gaming machine 10 displays the character B to clearly indicate that the pattern of the selected reserved pedestal display is the reserved pedestal display 713.

  Note that not only the display styles of the holding pedestal display 703 and the holding pedestal display 713 are different, but also the display styles of the constituent elements (holding storage area displays 703a and 713a and holding digestion area displays 703b and 713b) are different. Some or all of the components may be shared.

  A screen 720 shown in FIG. 210 (1) shows a screen display when the pedestal display in the stage 2 is pattern 2. The screen 720 includes a special figure game game display 701, a background display 722, a pedestal display 723, a mini character display 724, a special figure 1 reserved number display 705, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 706. . The background display 722 displays a background according to the display theme of the stage 2.

  The holding pedestal display 723 is displayed in a display mode (color, shape) according to the pattern 2. For example, the holding pedestal display 723 is displayed in a rectangular shape. Pending pedestal display 723 includes a reserved storage area display 723a, a pending digestion region display 723b.

  The hold storage area display 723a specifies the display range of the hold storage display 723c. For example, the hold storage area display 723a displays eight circular frames arranged in the horizontal direction, and the hold storage displays 723c are left-justified one by one in the frames from the first frame to the eighth frame. Make it displayable. The reserved storage area display 723a clearly indicates the number of retained reserves of the special figure variable display game by the display mode of the reserved storage display 723c (for example, star icon display), and reports the degree of expectation for the game result for each reserved storage display 723c. .

  The reserved digest display 723b specifies the display range of the reserved digest display 723d. For example, the reserved digest display 723b displays a circular frame, and allows one reserved digest 723d to be displayed in the frame. The reserved digestion area display 723b indicates that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notifies the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode of the reserved digestion display 723d (for example, star icon display).

  The mini-character display 724 displays a character C corresponding to the reserved pedestal display 723 of the pattern 2. The character C is, for example, a lion character. When displaying the reserved pedestal display 723 on the stage 2, the gaming machine 10 displays the character C to clearly indicate that the displayed reserved pedestal display pattern is the reserved pedestal display 723.

  Screen 730 shown in FIG. 210 (2) shows a screen display in the case of stage 3. The screen 730 includes a special figure game game display 701, a background display 732, a special figure 1 reserved number display 705, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 706 in the display content. The background display 732 displays a background according to the display theme of the stage 3. The gaming machine 10 enhances the player's attention to the special figure game game display 701 and the background display 732 by not including the holding pedestal display and the mini-character display on the screen 730.

  Here, setting items that allow the gaming machine 10 to accept setting changes from the player in each stage will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting item table according to the thirteenth embodiment.

  The setting item table is a table showing setting items at which the gaming machine 10 can accept setting changes from the player at each stage. The setting item table includes an item “stage” and an item “setting item”. The item “stage” indicates the type of stage. The item “setting item” indicates a setting item that can receive a setting change in each stage.

  For example, the setting item table indicates that in the stage 1, the gaming machine 10 can receive a change in setting of the holding pedestal display, volume, and options. The reservation pedestal display is, for example, a setting item for setting the reservation pedestal display 703 or the reservation pedestal display 713. The volume is, for example, a setting item for setting the volume of the speakers 19a and 19b. The option is, for example, a setting item for setting the brightness and brightness of the display device 41, the LED, the lamp, and the like.

  In addition, the setting item table indicates that the gaming machine 10 can receive a change in the volume and options in the stages 2 and 3. Note that the stages 2 and 3 do not include the holding pedestal display in the item “setting item” because there are no multiple patterns of holding pedestal display and there is no room for setting change.

  Next, operation guidance displayed on the display device 41 at the time of a setting change operation of a setting item will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen display displayed by the display device during a setting change operation according to the thirteenth embodiment.

  Screen 740 shown in FIG. 212 (1) shows a screen display at the time of setting change in stage 1. The screen 740 includes an operation guide display 741, a reservation base display 703, a mini-character display 704, a special figure 1 reservation number display 705, and a special figure 2 reservation number display 706 in the display contents.

  The operation guide display 741 includes a volume setting display 741a, a guide explanation display 741b, and an operation unit image display 741c. The volume setting display 741a initially displays the current volume setting value by a number or an icon, and displays the changed volume setting value by a number or an icon by receiving a setting operation. The guide explanation display 741b displays an operation guide and operation explanation of setting change corresponding to the setting items (mini-character (hold pedestal display), volume, option). The operation unit image display 741c displays an image of the push button 25 serving as an operation unit for setting change. For example, the operation unit image display 741c displays an image of the push button 25 in a display mode corresponding to the guidance explanation display 741b.

The screen 740 displays a holding pedestal display 703 and a mini-character display 704 in a mode being set on the stage 1.
Screen 750 shown in FIG. 212 (2) shows a screen display at the time of setting change in stage 2. The screen 750 includes an operation guide display 751, a reservation base display 723, a mini-character display 724, a special figure 1 reservation number display 705, and a special figure 2 reservation number display 706 in the display contents.

  The operation guide display 751 includes a volume setting display 751a, a guide explanation display 751b, and an operation section image display 751c. The volume setting display 751a initially displays the current volume setting value by a number or an icon, and displays the changed volume setting value by a number or an icon by receiving a setting operation. The guidance explanation display 751b displays an operation guidance or operation explanation for setting change corresponding to the setting item (volume, option). The operation unit image display 751c displays an image of the push button 25 serving as an operation unit for setting change. For example, the operation unit image display 751c displays an image of the push button 25 in a display mode corresponding to the guidance explanation display 751b.

The screen 750 displays a holding base display 723 and a mini-character display 724 in the manner of the stage 2.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays on the screen an operation guide display corresponding to the setting item whose setting can be changed. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player on how to change the setting of the setting item.

  By the way, the gaming machine 10 limits the timing at which the setting change of the setting item can be accepted in each stage. Here, the timing at which the gaming machine 10 can receive the setting change of the setting item will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 213 is a customer waiting state table (part 1) illustrating an example of timing at which the gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment can receive a setting change of a setting item. FIG. 214 is a customer waiting state table (part 2) illustrating an example of timing at which the gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment can receive a setting change of a setting item.

  The gaming machine 10 can receive a setting change of a setting item in each stage in a customer waiting state after receiving a customer waiting command. First, a customer waiting state when a customer waiting command is received after the fluctuation without reach will be described with reference to FIG. Since the gaming machine 10 changes the gaming state from the customer waiting state to the variable display state by receiving the variable display command, the customer waiting state will be described below assuming that the variable display command is not received.

  After receiving the customer waiting command, the gaming machine 10 sets the display state of the display device 41 to “wait”. The gaming machine 10 displays the display state of the display device 41 after “wait”, “customer waiting state A”, “customer waiting state B1”, “customer waiting movie”, “logo display”, “customer waiting state B2”, The transition is made in the order of "waiting movie" and "logo display". When the display state of the display device 41 transitions from the “customer waiting state B2” to the “logo display” via the “customer waiting movie”, the gaming machine 10 changes the “customer waiting state B2”, “customer waiting movie”, “logo display”. Is repeated.

  The display state “wait” is a total of 10 seconds in which the time value includes the first half 2 seconds and the second half 8 seconds. In the display state “Wait”, the symbols are stopped and displayed for 10 seconds, decorations during normal fluctuation (for example, lighting of an LED or a lamp) are continued, and sound output of normal fluctuation BGM (BackGround Music) is continued. In this way, the gaming machine 10 keeps the decoration and voice output during the normal fluctuation even if the fluctuation display in the special figure game is interrupted, so that the effect is consistent with the start winning prize during the display state “wait”. It can return to the variable display state.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 does not display the option display (for example, the operation guide display 741) in the display state “wait”, and turns off the push button 25. In the display state “wait”, the gaming machine 10 disables the function of pressing the push button 25 until the first two seconds elapse, and enables the function of pressing the push button 25 after the first two seconds elapse.

  The display state “customer waiting state A” has a time value of 5 seconds. In the display state “customer waiting state A”, decoration corresponding to the customer waiting state A is performed for 5 seconds. The display state “customer waiting state B1” is a total of 115 seconds in which the time value includes the first half 15 seconds and the second half 100 seconds. The display state "customer waiting state B1" performs decoration corresponding to the customer waiting state B1 for 115 seconds.

  The gaming machine 10 fades out the audio output of the normally varying BGM between the first half of the display state “customer waiting state A” and the display state “customer waiting state B1”. The gaming machine 10 silences the audio output after the latter half of the display state “customer waiting state B”, and switches the option display (for example, the operation guide display 741) from “none” to “present”. Note that, even when the option display is “none”, the gaming machine 10 changes the option display from “none” to “available” by detecting the press of the push button 25 at the timing when the push function of the push button 25 is enabled. Switch. Thereby, when the player cannot confirm the intention to change the setting, the gaming machine 10 displays the option unnecessarily and suppresses the effect display content from being limited.

  The state of the option display “None” at this timing corresponds to a state in which the option display can be called upon detection of the press of the push button 25 (setting change calling state). Then, the state of the option display “present” by the detection of the push button 25 being pressed corresponds to a state where the setting of the gaming machine 10 can be changed is clearly indicated to the player (a setting change explicit state).

  Further, the gaming machine 10 provides the option display “present” state (setting change explicit state) irrespective of the detection of the push button 25 being pressed, thereby clearly indicating to the player that the gaming machine 10 has the setting change function. it can.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 outputs a required voice (for example, the message “Ganbare”) when a touch (touch switch signal) on the operation unit (handle) 24 is detected from the display state “wait” to the display state “customer waiting state B1”. ) Is disabled, and is enabled after the display state “Movie waiting for customers”. Further, the gaming machine 10 displays a symbol animation as an effect using a decorative symbol on the display device 41 between the display state “customer waiting state A” and the display state “customer waiting state B1”.

  The gaming machine 10 is capable of accepting a setting change of a setting item during the latter 100 seconds of the display state “customer waiting state B1”. However, the gaming machine 10 may limit the setting change of the holding pedestal display and the mini-character display during the latter 100 seconds of the display state “customer waiting state B1”.

  The display state “movie waiting for customer” has a time value of 30 seconds. In the display state “movie waiting for customer”, decoration corresponding to the movie waiting for customer is performed for 30 seconds. In addition, the gaming machine 10, in between the display state "plying movie", is displayed on the display device 41 a movie production.

  The display state “logo display” has a time value of 3 seconds. In the display state “logo display”, decoration corresponding to the logo display is performed for three seconds. Further, the gaming machine 10 displays a maker logo, a reminder to immerse the game, and the like on the display device 41 during the display state of “logo display”. The gaming machine 10 does not display the symbol between the display state “Movie waiting for customer” and the display state “Logo display”.

  The display state “customer waiting state B2” is a total of 120 seconds in which the time value includes the first half 30 seconds and the second half 90 seconds. The display state “customer waiting state B2” performs decoration corresponding to the customer waiting state B2 for 120 seconds. The gaming machine 10 displays the symbol animation on the display device 41 during the display state “waiting for customer B2”. The gaming machine 10 sets the option display to “present” and turns on the push button 25 during the latter half of the display state “customer waiting state B2”. The gaming machine 10 is capable of accepting a setting change of a setting item during the latter 100 seconds of the display state “customer waiting state B2”. However, the gaming machine 10 may limit the timing at which the settings of the holding pedestal display and the mini-character display can be changed during the latter 90 seconds of the display state “customer waiting state B2”.

  Next, a customer waiting state when a customer waiting command is received after the fluctuation with reach will be described with reference to FIG. When the customer waiting command is received after the change with the reach, the gaming machine 10 performs an effect corresponding to the change with the reach until immediately before the reception of the command for the customer. If such an effect is continued until after the reception of the customer waiting command, the gaming machine 10 may give the player an unnecessary misunderstanding. Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 receives the customer waiting command after the fluctuation with the reach, the transition to the customer waiting state is specified without continuing the decoration and the voice output. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 performs the decoration corresponding to the customer waiting state A from the display state “wait”, and makes the sound output silent.

  Such a gaming machine 10 sets, in the customer waiting state, a setting changeable customer waiting state in which the setting can be changed and a setting change unavailable customer waiting state in which the setting cannot be changed. For example, configurable customer wait state is set to the timing, except for the first half of the display state "wait", set no changes allowed customers waiting state is set in the first half of the display state "Wait".

  Further, such a gaming machine 10 has a setting change calling state in which an option display can be called upon detection of the push button 25 being pressed in the setting changeable customer waiting state, and a setting change calling state in which the push button 25 is pressed. Set the setting change explicit state to display the option display. For example, the setting change call state is set at a timing excluding the first half of the display state “wait”, the second half of the display state “customer waiting state B1”, and the second half of the display state “customer waiting state B2”. The setting change explicit state is set in the second half of the display state “customer waiting state B1” and the second half of the display state “customer waiting state B2”.

  Next, a setting change operation of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting state transition according to a setting change operation of the thirteenth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 has a timing at which a setting change of a setting item can be received in a customer waiting state. The gaming machine 10 changes the gaming state from the customer waiting state to the variable display state by receiving the variable display command and receives a change display command even in the customer waiting state and receives a change display command.

  If the gaming machine 10 is in the setting change calling state even in the customer waiting state, the gaming machine 10 transitions to a setting change explicit state in which an operation guide display (option display) is displayed upon detection of the push button 25 being pressed.

  The gaming machine 10, if the setting change explicitly state even among the customers waiting state, accepts a setting operation by the push-button 25. The gaming machine 10 switches the operation guide display to the option setting change display by detecting the down button touch (for example, the touch of the TSW 8). The gaming machine 10 increases the volume in the volume setting by detecting a right button touch (for example, a touch of TSW6), and decreases the volume in a volume setting by detecting a left button touch (for example, a touch of TSW1). The display device 41 may enlarge the volume display when a right button touch operation or a left button touch operation is received. Accordingly, the display device 41 can enhance the visibility of the setting item whose setting is being changed, and can make the player more surely grasp the change status.

  In addition, if the gaming machine 10 is in the setting change explicit state and is staying on the stage where the hold pedestal display can be changed, the operation guide display is changed to the hold pedestal pattern setting change by detecting the upper button touch (for example, the touch of the TSW3). Switch to display.

Next, the display for changing the setting of the holding base pattern will be described. FIG. 216 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change display of a reserved pedestal pattern setting according to the thirteenth embodiment.
A screen 760 shown in FIG. 216 (1) is a display for changing the setting of the pedestal pedestal pattern in the stage 1, in which the display of the pedestal pedestal of the pattern 1-1 is selected. The screen 760 includes a holding base display 761, a selected mini-character display 762, a non-selected mini-character display 764, a guide explanation display 766, and an operation section image display 767 as display contents. The reservation pedestal display 761 displays the reservation pedestal display in a display mode (color, shape) according to the pattern 1-1. The guide explanation display 766 guides an operation method in the change setting display of the holding base pattern. The operation unit image display 767 displays the push button 25 in an image corresponding to the guidance in the guidance explanation display 766.

  The selected mini-character display 762 displays the character A corresponding to the reserved pedestal display 761. The non-selected mini-character display 764 displays a character B that can be an option but is not selected. In this case, the gaming machine 10, being selected mini character display 762 by the relative display mode of the character A and the character B (control display) is selected, the non-selected mini-character display 764 is nonselected To state clearly.

  For example, the gaming machine 10 emphasizes that the selected mini-character display 762 is being selected based on the facial expression, the motion, and the like of the character A (for example, a happy expression, an active state, and the like). In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a position (for example, ahead of the character B) and a size (for example, larger than the character B) of the character A, a luminance, a brightness, and a saturation (for example, a high contrast last than the character B). It is emphasized that the currently selected mini-character display 762 is being selected by an overlapping order (for example, overlapping on the front side of the character B). On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 emphasizes that the non-selected mini-character display 764 is not being selected due to the expression, movement, etc. of the character B (for example, a sad expression, a state of being down, a state of dropping the shoulder, etc.). I do. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a position (for example, behind the character A) and a size (for example, smaller than the character A) of the character B, luminance, brightness, saturation (for example, lower contrast than the character A), The non-selected mini-character display 764 is emphasized to be non-selected by the order of overlapping (for example, overlapping on the back side of the character A).

  The screen 760 on which the holding pedestal display of the pattern 1-1 is selected is switched to a screen display on which the holding pedestal display of the pattern 1-2 is selected by the gaming machine 10 receiving a selection operation. Screen 770 shown in FIG. 216 (2) is a holding pedestal pattern setting change displayed in Stage 1, showing a screen display of pending pedestal display pattern 1-2 is selected. The screen 770 includes a holding base display 771, a selected mini-character display 772, a non-selected mini-character display 774, a guide explanation display 766, and an operation section image display 767. The reservation pedestal display 771 displays the reservation pedestal display in a display mode (color, shape) according to the pattern 1-2.

  Selected mini character display 772 displays a character B corresponding to the hold pedestal display 771. The non-selected mini-character display 774 displays a character A that can be an option but is not selected.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 displays the currently selected holding base display 761 or the holding base display 771 in the holding base pattern setting change display, and the character A or the character B corresponding to the holding base display 761 or the holding base display 771. Is displayed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can display the selected mini-character display 762, even if the player cannot easily sense the selection target of the game effect only by the replacement display of the holding base display 761 and the holding base display 771. 772 allows the player to easily perceive the selection target. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the non-selected mini-character display 764, 774 in addition to the selected mini-character display 762, 772, so that the player can more easily perceive the selection target to the player. it can.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may simultaneously display the holding pedestal display 761 and the holding pedestal display 771 that can be selected as the holding pedestal display. However, instead of this, the gaming machine 10 displays the selected mini-character display 762, 772 and the non-selected mini-character display 764, 774 at the same time, so that the selection target can be clearly indicated to the player. Can be.

  Note that when detecting the pressing of the push button 25 in the holding base pattern setting change display, the gaming machine 10 determines the selection of the holding base display being selected. When the gaming machine 10 determines the selection of the holding pedestal display, the character corresponding to the selected holding pedestal display specifies the determination by a predetermined action. The gaming machine 10 may determine the selection of the currently selected pedestal pedestal display upon detecting a winning in the starting port in the pedestal pedestal pattern setting change display.

[Setting change display setting processing]
Next, a setting change display setting process for setting a setting change display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the setting change display setting process in the effect control device of the thirteenth embodiment. The setting change display setting process is a process executed by the control unit (the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300) in the hall / player setting mode process (step D20) of the main process (see FIG. 125).

  [Step D301] The control unit determines whether or not the setting changeable period is reached. The control unit proceeds to step D302 when the setting changeable period is reached, and ends the setting change display setting process when the setting changeable period is not reached.

  [Step D302] The control unit determines whether or not it is in a setting change calling state. When the control unit is in the setting change calling state, the process proceeds to step D304. When the control unit is not in the setting change calling state, the process proceeds to step D303.

  [Step D303] The control unit determines whether or not the press of the push button (PB) 25 is detected. The control unit proceeds to Step D304 when the push button 25 is detected to be pressed, and ends the setting change display setting process when the push button 25 is not detected.

[Step D304] The control unit sets a setting change explicit state.
[Step D305] The control unit determines whether the setting change operation target is a player. The control unit proceeds to Step D307 when the operation target of the setting change is a player, and proceeds to Step D306 when the operation target of the setting change is not a player, that is, when the operation target of the setting change is a hall clerk. For example, the control unit can determine the operation target of the setting change based on the open state of the glass frame 15. The control unit can determine that the operation target is a hall clerk when the glass frame 15 is open, and can determine that the operation target is a player when the glass frame 15 is closed.

[Step D306] The control unit sets the setting change display for the hall, and ends the setting change display setting process.
[Step D307] The control unit determines whether or not the staying stage is the stage 1, that is, whether or not the holding pedestal pattern can be selected. The control unit proceeds to Step D308 when the staying stage is stage 1, and proceeds to Step D309 when the staying stage is not stage 1.

[Step D308] The control unit sets the setting change display with the holding pedestal pattern setting change display, and ends the setting change display setting process.
[Step D309] The control unit sets the setting change display without the hold pedestal pattern setting change display, and ends the setting change display setting process.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described thirteenth embodiment has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display device 41, a receiving unit (push button 25), and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display device 41 specifies the first storage storage area display (holding pedestal display 761) that specifies the storage storage display area related to the storage of the variable display game in the first mode, or specifies the storage storage display area in the second mode. A second hold storage area display (hold pedestal display 771) can be displayed. The receiving means is capable of receiving an operation (selection operation) by the player. The control unit causes the display device to display the first hold storage area display or the second hold storage area display based on the operation.

  (2) The control unit of (1) corresponds to a first character display (selected mini-character display 762) corresponding to the first reserved storage area display and a second reserved storage area display based on the operation. A display for switching to the second character display (the selected mini-character display 772) is displayed on the display device 41.

  (3) The control unit of (2) simultaneously displays the first character display and the second character display on the display device 41 in the switching display (the selected mini-character display 762 and the non-selected mini-character display 764, Alternatively, the selected mini-character display 772 and the non-selected mini-character display 774 are performed.

(4) When the character being selected is the first character, the control unit in (3) causes the first character display to be displayed so as to overlap the front side of the second character display.
(5) When the character being selected is the first character, the control unit of (3) switches the display mode of the first character to a contrast display mode that is emphasized as compared with the second character display.

(6) When the character being selected is the first character, the control unit of (3) switches the display mode of the second character to a contrast display mode that emphasizes the first character display.
(7) The reserved storage display areas (1) to (6) include a reserved storage area (reserved storage area display 703a) corresponding to the pending storage and a reserved digest area (reserved digested area) corresponding to the digested storage. Display 703b).

  (8) (2) The control unit of a first stage in which the first display theme in relation to the progress of the variable display game is set (stage 1), the second in relation to the progress of the variable display games The display device 41 selectively displays the second stage (stage 2) in which the display theme is set, and permits the switching display between the first character display and the second character display in the first stage. In the second stage, switching between the first character display and the second character display is not permitted.

  (9) The control unit of (8) stores the character display being selected (the first character display or the second character display) when switching from the first stage to the second stage, and stores the second character display. When returning from the stage to the first stage, switching between the first character display and the second character display is performed according to the selected character display.

[Fourteenth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment can display a video (for example, a movie video or a streaming video, hereinafter referred to as an independent video) independent of the progress of the variable display game during the execution of the variable display game. .

  First, a screen display displayed by the display device 41 in the gaming machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen display according to the fourteenth embodiment.

  The screen 800 shows a state during the execution of the variable display game. The screen 800 includes a special figure game game display 801, a background display 802, a reservation base display 803, a mini character display 804, a special figure 1 reservation number display 805, a special figure 2 reservation number display 806, and an independent video display. 807 and an independent video area display 808 are included in the display content.

  The special figure game game display 801 corresponds to the special figure game game display area in the display area, and displays the variable display state of the special figure game using a decorative symbol. The background display 802 displays a background according to the display theme of the special figure game. The hold pedestal display 803 specifies a display area related to hold storage as a base display of a display related to hold storage. The reservation base display 803 includes a reservation storage display and a reservation digest display. The mini-character display 804 displays a character corresponding to the display theme, and performs effects such as guidance on the progress of the game and notification of the advance notice. The special figure 1 reservation number display 805 displays the storage number (starting storage number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 reserved number display 806 displays the reserved number of special figure 2 games.

  The independent video display 807 is a video display independent of the progress of the variable display game, and is, for example, a movie video or a streaming video. The video content in the independent video display 807 may be related to the theme of the gaming machine 10 or may be unrelated. For example, when an animation with a theme of the gaming machine 10 is used as a motif, the independent video display 807 can be a video of the animation. Where a single variable display progresses in a time unit of several seconds to several tens of seconds, the independent video display 807 may be several minutes to several tens of minutes depending on the video content, or several hours for a long one. In addition, it is desirable that the independent video display 807 has a story nature in order to keep the player interested even for a long time display. Further, the independent video display 807 is not limited to one video content, and may be composed of two or more video contents.

  The independent video area display 808 is a display for separating the independent video display 807 from other display areas, and has, for example, a frame shape. After generating the video relating to the variable display game, the gaming machine 10 can generate the screen 800 by superimposing the independent video display 807 on the independent video area display 808.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can further enhance the interest in the game by displaying an image independent of the progress of the variable display game.
Next, an independent image prepared by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 is a diagram illustrating an example of an independent video pattern table according to the fourteenth embodiment.

  The independent image pattern table shown in FIG. 219 shows a list of independent images prepared by the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 prepares 50 independent videos from the independent video pattern 1 to the independent video pattern 50. The independent video pattern 1 corresponds to predetermined video content, for example, the first episode of an animation composed of 50 episodes. Similarly, the independent video patterns 2 to 50 correspond to the second to 50th episodes of the animation, respectively. The gaming machine 10 can sequentially reproduce the independent video patterns 1 to 50.

  Further, the independent video patterns 1 to 25 belong to the independent video group 1, and the independent video patterns 26 to 50 belong to the independent video group 2. The gaming machine 10 can also sequentially reproduce independent video patterns in groups. For example, under the first condition, the gaming machine 10 can play back the independent video pattern belonging to the independent video group 1 and sequentially play the range from the independent video pattern 1 to the independent video pattern 25. In the second condition, the gaming machine 10 may be a separate image patterns belonging to independently GoP 2 reproduced, sequentially reproduces the scope of the independent video pattern 50 independent image pattern 26.

  It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 can hold the independent video by compressing it in the image ROM 325 in advance or uncompressing it. The gaming machine 10 can generate a display image by reading an independent image from the image ROM 325 and combining it with another image by the VDP 312. Further, the gaming machine 10 may be configured to acquire independent images from the outside as such as streaming video. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may reproduce broadcast content or content on the Internet. For example, the content on the net may be a video provided for a fee or free from a server, or may be a live video from a web camera or the like.

  Next, a description will be given of a game effect display performed in the independent video area display 808 in association with the progress of the variable display game during the independent video reproduction with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 can switch the independent video in the independent video area display 808 to the expected degree notification video during the reproduction of the independent video. The expected degree notification image is an image for notifying the degree of expectation for the result of the variable display game that is in progress or is going to be performed in the future. Gaming machine 10, while the switch to expectation broadcast video from an independent video, inserting an independent video switching effect display.

  FIG. 220 is a diagram illustrating an example of the independent video switching effect display and the expected degree notification video display of the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 220 (1) shows one form of the independent video switching effect display, and shows a state where the independent video being reproduced is blacked out. The display shown in FIG. 220 (1) is a display indicating that the reproduction of the independent video is interrupted. FIG. 220 (2) shows one form of the independent video switching effect display, and shows a state covered with noise. The display shown in FIG. 220 (2) is a display indicating that there is no effect display after the reproduction of the independent video is interrupted. FIG. 220 (3) shows an example of an independent video switching effect display, and shows a countdown state. In FIG. 220 (3), the number “3” is displayed, and thereafter, the countdown proceeds to “2”, “1”, and “0”. The display illustrated in FIG. 220 (3) is a display indicating a sense of expectation of the development to the effect display after the suspension of the reproduction of the independent video. FIG. 220 (4) shows an example of the expected degree notification image display, and shows a predetermined expected degree notification image.

  Next, an independent video switching effect prepared by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 is a diagram illustrating an example of the independent video switching effect pattern table according to the fourteenth embodiment.

  The independent video switching effect pattern table shown in FIG. 221 shows a list of independent video switching effects prepared by the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 prepares five independent video switching effects from an independent video switching effect pattern 1 to an independent video switching effect pattern 5. The independent video switching effect pattern 1 is for continuing the reproduction of the independent video. When the independent video switching effect pattern 1 is selected, the gaming machine 10 does not switch to the expected degree notification video. Therefore, the independent video switching effect pattern 1 is prepared as a default function in which the gaming machine 10 continues to play the independent video.

  The independent video switching effect pattern 2 displays a noise video (FIG. 220 (2)) after blacking out the independent video being reproduced (FIG. 220 (1)). Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 returns to the reproduction of the independent video without switching to the expected degree notification video. Therefore, the independent video switching effect pattern 2 is prepared as a gasket function that only excites the expectation without causing the expected degree notification image to appear.

  In the independent video switching effect pattern 3, a noise video (FIG. 220 (2)) is displayed after the gray character countdown video (FIG. 220 (3)) is displayed. Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 returns to the reproduction of the independent video without switching to the expected degree notification video. Note that the independent video switching effect pattern 3 is provided as a function that does not cause the expected degree notification video to appear but informs of the reach development with a relatively low probability.

  The independent video switching effect pattern 4 displays a countdown video (FIG. 220 (3)) of the gray character until the time is up, and is connected to the display of the title character as the expected degree notification video. The independent video switching effect pattern 4 is provided as a function for notifying the reach development with a relatively high probability.

  Independent video switching effect pattern 5, and display a countdown image of red string until the time is up (Fig. 220 (3)), connects to the display of the title character as expectations broadcast the video. The independent video switching effect pattern 5 is prepared as a function for notifying the development of the super reach having higher expectation of big hit than the normal reach (FIG. 220 (4)).

Next, the expected degree notification video prepared by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 is a diagram illustrating an example of the expected degree notification video pattern table according to the fourteenth embodiment.
The expected degree notification image pattern table shown in FIG. 222 shows a list of expected degree notification images prepared by the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 prepares five expected degree information videos from the expected degree information image pattern 1 to the expected degree information image pattern 5. Expectation notification video pattern 1 displays the title character “Go to the mountains!”. The expected degree notification image pattern 1 displays a title character using an image of a specific scene of the first episode. The video of the specific scene of the first episode is prepared in advance separately from the independent video pattern 1 as a partial video of the independent video pattern 1. The expected degree notification image pattern 1 is provided as a function for notifying the reach development at a relatively low probability.

  The expectation notification video pattern 2 displays the title character “Go to the sea!” Using the video of the specific scene of the seventh episode. The expectation notification video pattern 2 is provided as a function of notifying the reach development with a relatively high probability. The expectation notification video pattern 3 displays the title character “I'm going to the country!” Using the video of the specific scene of the 25th episode. The expectation notification video pattern 4 displays the title character “Go to town!” Using the video of the specific scene of the 33rd episode. The expected degree notification image patterns 3 and 4 are prepared as a function for notifying the development of the super reach. Expectations broadcast video pattern 5 displays the title character "We're Gonna Go to heaven!" Using the image of a particular scene of the first 50 episodes. The expectation notification image pattern 5 is prepared as a heat pre-warning function for notifying that the big hit expectation is extremely high.

  Next, the switching of the image to be displayed in a separate display area will be described with reference to FIG. 223. FIG. 223 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating switching timing of the video displayed in the independent video display area according to the fourteenth embodiment.

  [Timing T10] In the special figure game, the variable display number “n” times is ended, and the variable display number “n + 1” times is started. At this time, the gaming machine 10 is playing back the independent video of the independent video pattern 2 across the “n” times of variable display and the “n + 1” times of variable display. That is, the display of the independent video in the independent video display area is independent of the progress of the special figure game.

  [Timing T11] The gaming machine 10 ends the independent video reproduction of the independent video pattern 2 and starts the independent video reproduction of the independent video pattern 3. At this time, the gaming machine 10 switches the independent video from the independent video pattern 2 to the independent video pattern 3 in the middle of the variable display number “n + 1” times. That is, the display of the independent video in the independent video display area is independent of the progress of the special figure game.

  [Timing T12] In the special figure game, the variable display number “n + 1” times of the variable display ends, and the variable display number “n + 2” times of the variable display starts. At this time, the gaming machine 10 is playing the independent video of the independent video pattern 3 over the variable display number “n + 1” and the variable display number “n + 2”.

  [Timing T13] The gaming machine 10 displays the independent video switching effect (independent video switching effect pattern 5) on the independent video in the independent video display area in relation to the progress of the special figure game. Note that the gaming machine 10 can determine a display trigger (including the presence or absence of display) of the independent video switching effect based on a reception command received from the game control device 100 by the effect control device 300. Receiving commands that can be used for a display trigger for independent video switching effect is, for example, variation command received for each variable display, prefetch system command received prior to the variable display (preread variation-commands, and read-ahead symbol-based command) or the like There is.

  [Timing T14] The gaming machine 10 ends the display of the independent video switching effect, and superimposes the expected degree notification image (the expected degree notification image pattern 4) on the independent image in the independent image display area in relation to the progress of the special figure game. Until the timing T15.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 displays the independent video in the independent video display area until the timing T13, displays the independent video switching effect from the timing T13 to the timing T14, and displays the expected degree notification video from the timing T14 to the timing T15. And an independent image is displayed after timing T15.

  The gaming machine 10 cannot display the independent video from the timing T13 to the timing T15, but the processing load can be reduced because it is not necessary to suspend and restart the independent video reproduction. Further, the gaming machine 10 does not need to suspend and restart the reproduction of the independent video, so that a video (for example, broadcast content) that cannot be interrupted can be used as the independent video.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 can suspend the independent video reproduction in a gaming state in which independent video reproduction is not required, such as a power cutoff, a power failure, or a customer waiting state. When interrupting the independent video playback, the gaming machine 10 generates playback interrupt information for resuming the independent video playback. For example, when independent video reproduction can be performed from the interruption point, the reproduction interruption information includes information capable of specifying the interruption point. Also, when independent video reproduction can not be performed from the interruption point, playback interruption information, when suspended in the middle of reproducible information (for example, any of the independent image pattern subsequent interruption point, to identify any independent image pattern reproduction Possible information).

[Independent video playback processing]
Next, an independent video reproduction process for reproducing an independent video will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 224 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the independent video reproduction process in the effect control device of the fourteenth embodiment. The independent video reproduction process is a process executed by the control unit (control unit (CPU 311) of effect control device 300) at any timing in the processing loop from step D18 to step D30 of the main process (see FIG. 125). .

  [Step D311] The control unit determines whether or not the independent video reproduction is possible. If the independent video playback is possible, the control unit proceeds to step D312. If not, the control unit ends the independent video playback processing. The independent video reproducible state is a state in which an independent video can be reproduced, and for example, is defined in advance as an independent video reproducible state when a special map game is being displayed in a variable manner.

  [Step D312] The control unit determines whether or not there is reproduction suspension information. When there is no reproduction interruption information, the control unit proceeds to step D313, and when there is reproduction interruption information, the control unit proceeds to step D315.

[Step D313] The control unit obtains RTC information (time information) from the RTC 338.
[Step D314] The control unit acquires the reproduction condition. The reproduction condition is a condition for restricting an independent video that can be reproduced based on the RTC information.

[Step D315] The control unit obtains reproduction suspension information.
[Step D316] If there is no reproduction interruption information, the control unit specifies an independent video pattern to be reproduced based on the RTC information and the reproduction conditions.

  For example, the playback conditions limit the playback of the independent video patterns belonging to the independent video group 1 to even months and the playback of the independent video patterns belonging to the independent video group 2 to odd months. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the opportunity to reproduce the independent video pattern belonging to the specific group during the predetermined period. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can provide motivation for a game in a period in which an independent video reproducible for a player is different. Further, the gaming machine 10 may play back an independent video pattern located at the head of the independent video group (for example, the independent video pattern 1 in the independent video group 1). The gaming machine 10 may select any of the independent video patterns belonging to the independent video group as a playback target at random or according to a predetermined condition.

  Further, when there is the reproduction interruption information, the control unit specifies the independent video pattern to be reproduced based on the reproduction interruption information. When there is the reproduction interruption information, the gaming machine 10 can continuously reproduce the independent video from the independent video pattern before the interruption.

[Step D317] The control unit starts reproducing the specified independent video pattern and ends the independent video reproduction process.
[Independent video interruption processing]
Next, an independent video interruption process for interrupting the reproduction of an independent video will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 225 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the independent video interruption process in the effect control device of the fourteenth embodiment. The independent video interruption process is a process executed by the control unit at any timing in the processing loop from step D18 to step D30 of the main process (see FIG. 125).

  [Step D321] The control unit determines whether or not the independent video reproduction is possible. The control unit proceeds to Step D322 if the independent video is not reproducible, and ends the independent video suspending process if the independent video is reproducible.

  [Step D322] The control unit determines whether or not the independent video is being reproduced. If the independent video is being reproduced, the control unit proceeds to step D323, and if not, the independent video interruption process ends.

[Step D323] The control unit generates reproduction interruption information and stores it in a storage unit (for example, the RAM 322 or the FeRAM 323).
[Step D324] The control unit suspends the reproduction of the independent video, and ends the independent video suspension process.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can play and suspend the independent video.
[Modification 1 of Fourteenth Embodiment]
Next, a first modification of the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 according to the first modification of the fourteenth embodiment has a function of temporarily stopping the reproduction of an independent video. Switching of the video displayed in the independent video display area will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating a switching timing of an image displayed in an independent image display area according to Modification Example 1 of the fourteenth embodiment.

  [Timing T20] The gaming machine 10 pauses the display of the independent video pattern 3 in the independent video display area in relation to the progress of the special map game, and switches the independent video switching effect (independent video switching effect pattern 5) to the independent video. Is displayed superimposed on.

  [Timing T21] The gaming machine 10 ends the display of the independent video switching effect, and superimposes the expected degree notification image (the expected degree notification image pattern 4) on the independent image in the independent image display area in relation to the progress of the special figure game. Until the timing T22.

[Timing T22] The gaming machine 10 resumes the reproduction display of the independent video pattern 3 which has been paused, in relation to the progress of the special figure game.
Thereby, the gaming machine 10 displays the independent video in the independent video display area until the timing T20, displays the independent video switching effect from the timing T20 to the timing T21, and displays the expected degree notification video from the timing T21 to the timing T22. And an independent video is displayed after timing T22.

  Although the gaming machine 10 cannot display the independent video from the timing T20 to the timing T22, the processing load can be reduced by the pause function instead of suspending and resuming the independent video reproduction.

[Modification 2 of Fourteenth Embodiment]
Next, a second modification of the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 according to the second modification of the fourteenth embodiment has a function of changing a display area of an independent video. Screen display displayed by the display device 41 in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen display of Modification 2 of the fourteenth embodiment.

  The screen 800a shows a state after the display area of the independent video display 807 on the screen 800 (see FIG. 218) has been changed. The screen 800a includes a special figure game game display 801a, a background display 802, a hold base display 803, a mini character display 804, a special figure 1 hold number display 805, a special figure 2 hold number display 806, and an independent video display. 807a and an independent video area display 808a are included in the display content.

  The special figure game game display 801a is changed to a position corresponding to the independent image display 807 and the independent image area display 808 (moved to the peripheral portion), and the display size is also changed (reduced). The independent video display 807a and the independent video area display 808a are changed (moved to the center) corresponding to the independent video display 807 and the special figure game game display 801, and the display size is also changed (enlarged).

  Thus the gaming machine 10 is able to control the player's attention to the change display independent image special symbol game. In the independent video, the gaming machine 10 changes the display area of the independent video on the display device 41. However, the gaming machine 10 includes two or more display devices and changes the display area of the independent video from one display device to another display device. It may be something. For example, the gaming machine 10 may change the display area of the independent video from the display device 41 provided on the game board 30 to the display device (not shown) provided on the glass frame 15.

[Modification 3 of Fourteenth Embodiment]
Next, a third modification of the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 according to the third modification of the fourteenth embodiment has a function of receiving a setting operation by a player and updating an independent video to be played.

  The gaming machine 10 can receive a setting operation by the player with the push button 25, and can generate setting information based on the received setting operation. For example, setting information includes information for specifying the independent video player desires to play (e.g., separate image pattern). Note that, when the gaming machine 10 receives an independent video desired to be played from a player, the gaming machine 10 can present a reproducible independent video as an option. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may limit the options of the independent video that can be reproduced in accordance with a predetermined condition (for example, the gaming state is in a predetermined state, the RTC information is at a predetermined value, and the like).

[Independent video playback position setting processing]
Here, the independent video playback position setting processing for setting the playback position of the independent video will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 228 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the independent image reproduction position setting processing in the effect control device according to the third modification of the fourteenth embodiment. The independent video playback position setting process is a process executed by the control unit in the hall / player setting mode process (step D20) of the main process (see FIG. 125).

[Step D331] The control unit acquires the setting information generated based on the received setting operation.
[Step D332] The control unit generates reproduction interruption information from the setting information.

[Step D333] The control unit updates the stored reproduction interruption information with the reproduction interruption information generated from the setting information, and ends the independent video reproduction position setting processing.
Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can reproduce the independent video that the player desires to reproduce.

[Modification 4 of Fourteenth Embodiment]
Next, a fourth modification of the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 shown in Modification 4 of the fourteenth embodiment can output audio corresponding to an independent video, and supports an independent video instead of the audio output in connection with the effect of the variable display game. It has the function of outputting audio.

[Sound mode switching process]
Here, the audio mode switching processing for setting the playback position of the independent video will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the sound mode switching process in the effect control device of the fourth modification of the fourteenth embodiment. The sound mode switching process is a process executed by the control unit in the sound control process (step D27) of the main process (see FIG. 125).

  [Step D341] The control unit determines whether or not it is in the specific effect state. The control unit proceeds to Step D342 when in the specific effect state, and proceeds to Step D343 when not in the specific effect state. The specific effect state here in advance refers to the state defined for the voice mode switching, for example, state in which the expectation of notification in connection with the progress of the variable display games, there is a state like that is selected by the player.

[Step D342] The control unit sets the audio corresponding to the independent video to the main audio (independent video main audio mode), and ends the audio mode switching process.
[Step D343] The control unit sets the voice corresponding to the variable display game to the main voice (variable display game main voice mode), and ends the voice mode switching process.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may have no sound among the sound corresponding to the independent video and the sound corresponding to the variable display game and not set as the main sound, or may have a lower volume than the main sound. It may be sound. Further, since the gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of speakers, a speaker (independent video-compatible speaker) that outputs audio corresponding to an independent video according to the audio mode, and a speaker that outputs audio corresponding to the variable display game (variable display) Game-compatible speaker). For example, in the gaming machine 10, in the independent video main audio mode, the upper speaker 19a can be used as a variable display game compatible speaker, and the lower speaker 19b can be used as an independent video compatible speaker. Further, in the gaming machine 10, in the independent video main audio mode, the lower speaker 19b can be used as a variable display game compatible speaker, and the upper speaker 19a can be used as an independent video compatible speaker.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can output the audio corresponding to the independent video as the main audio. Further, the gaming machine 10, game effects associated with independent video by performing the speech, it is possible to increase player's interest in the game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can further enhance the interest of the independent video by outputting a sound corresponding to the independent video according to the setting operation of the player.

[Modification Example 5 of Fourteenth Embodiment]
Next, a fifth modification of the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth modification of the fourteenth embodiment has a function of changing the display mode of the independent video area display 808 (see FIG. 218) described in the fourteenth embodiment. The changed display mode of the independent video area display 808 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 is a diagram illustrating an example of the independent video switching effect display of the fifth modification of the fourteenth embodiment.

  The independent video area display 8081 shown in FIG. 230 (1) is obtained by changing the color, pattern, and the like of the frame of the independent video area display 808. The gaming machine 10 can notify the degree of expectation in relation to the progress of the variable display game by the color and the pattern of the frame-shaped frame of the independent video area display 8081. For example, when the color of the frame-shaped frame of the independent image area display 8081 is set to blue as a default, the gaming machine 10 shows a reach notice in red, a super reach notice in silver, and a guess in gold. Can be. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can show intense heat with a cherry pattern when the frame-shaped frame of the independent image area display 8081 has a plain plain color as a default.

  The independent image area display 8082 shown in FIG. 230 (2) is obtained by changing the shape of the frame of the independent image area display 808. The gaming machine 10 can notify the degree of expectation in relation to the progress of the variable display game by the shape of the frame-shaped frame of the independent image area display 8081. For example, when the frame shape of the frame of the independent image area display 8082 has a rectangular shape as a default, the gaming machine 10 can show the reach notice in a wave shape.

  Independent video area display 8083 shown in FIG. 230 (3) is obtained by changing the size of the frame-shaped frame body of the independent video area display 808. The gaming machine 10 can notify the degree of expectation in relation to the progress of the variable display game by the size of the frame-shaped frame of the independent video area display 8083. For example, when the gaming machine 10 is enlarged in multiple stages with respect to the default size of the frame-shaped frame of the independent image area display 8083, the degree of expectation can be indicated according to each stage.

  The independent image area display 8084 shown in FIG. 230 (4) is obtained by changing the inclination of the frame-shaped frame of the independent image area display 808. The gaming machine 10 can notify the degree of expectation in relation to the progress of the variable display game by the inclination of the frame-shaped frame of the independent video area display 8084. For example, gaming machine 10 may indicate when tilted in multiple steps for the default inclination of frame-shaped frame body of the independent video area display 8084, the size of the expected degree according to each inclination.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can notify the degree of expectation in relation to the progress of the variable display game by changing the display mode of the independent video area display. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can direct the player to pay attention to the progress of the variable display game by changing the display mode of the independent video area display, and can improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described fourteenth embodiment (including the first to fifth modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display device 41 and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display device 41 includes a first display area (a special figure game game display 801) for displaying a variable display game, and a second display area for displaying a first image (independent image) independent of the progress of the variable display game. (Independent video display 807, independent video area display 808). The control unit displays a first image displayed in the second display area in association with the progress of the variable display game, and a second image (independent video switching effect display, expectation degree notification) for notifying the progress of the variable display game. Switch to video display).

  (2) When switching the first video displayed in the second display area to the second video, the control unit in (1) displays the second display area in a display mode (independent video area display 8081, 8082, 8083, 8084).

(3) The control unit in (1) selects one video pattern from a plurality of video patterns that can be displayed as the first video and displays the selected video pattern as the first video.
(4) The control unit of (2) sequentially selects one video pattern from the plurality of video patterns.

  (5) The control unit according to (3) or (4) selects one video pattern from a group selected according to a predetermined condition from a video pattern belonging to the first group and a video pattern belonging to the second group. I do.

(6) When switching the first video displayed in the second display area to the second video, the control unit in (1) displays the second video superimposed on the first video.
(7) The control unit of (1) suspends the display of the first video when switching the first video displayed in the second display area to the second video.

(8) The control unit of (1) generates interruption information used for resuming the display of the first video when the display is interrupted, and restarts the display of the first video based on the interruption information.
(9) The control unit of (1) is capable of outputting a sound corresponding to the first video, and the sound corresponding to the first video instead of the voice output in connection with the effect of the variable display game. Is output.

  (10) The control unit of (1) converts the command received by the effect control device 300 from the game control device 100 (for example, a change command received for each change display, a look-ahead command received prior to the change display). Based on this, the display timing of the independent video switching effect is determined.

[Fifteenth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment can suggest an increase in the degree of expectation by changing the background display according to the number of symbol actions. FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect flow of the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 232 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 234 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 3) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 235 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 4) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fifteenth embodiment.

  [Production Flow F1] The gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols from a state in which three symbols (decorative symbols) are stopped. A screen display example of the symbol variation is shown on a screen 900 in FIG. 232 (F1). The screen 900 shows a state in which three symbols are changing. When the gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F2.

  [Production Flow F2] The gaming machine 10 displays a production entry logo. A screen display example of the effect entry logo is shown on a screen 910 in FIG. 232 (F2). The screen 910 displays an effect entry logo. The effect entry logo indicates that the effect (for example, a rank-up zone) has been entered. After displaying the effect entry logo 911 for a predetermined time, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F3.

  [Effect Flow F3] The gaming machine 10 displays a predetermined number (for example, four) of pseudo fluctuations (pseudo runs). The pseudo fluctuation includes a fluctuation display of the high-speed rotation of the symbol (the screen 920 in FIG. 232 (F3a)) and a temporary stop (FIG. 232 (F3b)) as if one fluctuation display is a plurality of fluctuation displays. Screen 930). The symbols are grouped for each symbol type, and the color corresponding to the group clearly indicates to which group the symbol belongs. For example, the symbols "1" and "5" are green, the symbols "2", "4", and "6" are blue, and the symbols "3" and "7" are red. For example, the symbol group shown in red is the most valuable symbol composed of probability change symbols, and the symbol group shown in blue is the second most valuable symbol composed of time saving symbols. There is a symbol group shown in green, which is a symbol having a relatively low value, which is usually composed of symbols. Then, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops two or more of the three symbols in the pseudo series with the same color, and makes the symbols constituting the temporary stop more valuable each time the temporary stops are repeated in the predetermined number of pseudo series. Change to a symbol composed of a higher symbol group. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 produces an expectation of a temporary stop in the reach type. When the gaming machine 10 repeats the pseudo repetition a predetermined number of times, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F4.

  [Direction Flow F4] The gaming machine 10 performs a tempering. A screen display example of the tempering is shown on a screen 940 in FIG. 233 (F4). The screen 940 shows the tempering that produces an expectation as to whether or not the stop symbol forms a reach shape. The screen 940 shows a state in which the left symbol stops at symbol “1”, the middle symbol is changing, and the right symbol is about to stop at symbol “1” or symbol “2”.

  The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F5 when the stop symbol forms a reach shape after the tempai fanning. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F6 if the stop symbol does not form the reach shape after the tempai fanning.

  [Direction Flow F5] The gaming machine 10 performs a tempai symbol action. The tempai symbol action is an action (effect) that notifies that the stop symbol has formed a reach shape. A screen display example of the tempai symbol action is shown in a screen 950 of FIG. 233 (F5). Screen 950, showing a state of informing that the stop symbols formed a reach form by character. When the gaming machine 10 ends the tempai symbol action, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F13.

  [Effect Flow F6] The gaming machine 10 performs an effect of changing the background. A screen display example of the background change is shown on a screen 960 in FIG. 233 (F6). The screen 960 shows a background change and an effect using a character performed in conjunction with the background change. The gaming machine 10 suggests an increase in the degree of expectation due to the background change. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F7 after displaying the changed background for a predetermined time.

  [Production Flow F7] The gaming machine 10 repeats the pseudo-ream a predetermined number of times. A screen 970 of FIG. 234 (F7a) and a screen 980 of FIG. 234 (F7b) show the state of the pseudo run after the background change. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F8 after repeating the pseudo-run a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times).

  [Direction Flow F8] The technical machine 10 performs a tempai blow. A screen display example of the tempering screen is shown on a screen 990 in FIG. 234 (F8). The screen 990 shows a state in which the left symbol is stopped at symbol “1”, the middle symbol is changing, and the right symbol is about to stop at symbol “1” or symbol “2”.

  The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F9 when the stop symbol forms a reach shape after the tempai fanning. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F10 when the stop symbol does not form the reach shape after the tempai fanning.

  [Direction Flow F9] The gaming machine 10 performs a tempai symbol action. A screen display example of the tempai symbol action is shown on a screen 1000 in FIG. 234 (F9). The screen 1000 shows a state in which the stop symbol has formed a reach shape by the character together with the background after the change. When the gaming machine 10 ends the tempai symbol action, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F13.

  [Effect Flow F10] The gaming machine 10 performs a second background change effect. A screen display example of the second background change is shown on a screen 1010 in FIG. 235 (F10). The screen 1010 shows a second background change and an effect using the character that is performed in conjunction with the background change. The gaming machine 10 suggests a further increase in the degree of expectation due to the second background change. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F11 after displaying the changed background for a predetermined time.

  [Production Flow F11] The gaming machine 10 repeats the pseudo-ream a predetermined number of times. A screen 1020 in FIG. 235 (F11a) and a screen 1030 in FIG. 235 (F11b) show the state of the pseudo-run after the background change. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F12 after repeating the pseudo-run a predetermined number of times (for example, 12 times). Note that the gaming machine 10 may increase the symbol feed speed at the time of fluctuation in the pseudo-run so that the pseudo-run continues. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can indicate to the player that the sense of expectation is improved, and can realize a quick progress of the game.

  [Direction Flow F12] The gaming machine 10 performs a tempai symbol action. A screen display example of the tempai symbol action is shown on a screen 1040 in FIG. 235 (F12). The screen 1040 shows a state in which the stop symbol has formed a reach shape by the character together with the background after the second change. When the gaming machine 10 ends the tempai symbol action, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F13.

  [Production Flow F13] The gaming machine 10 performs a reach production. The gaming machine 10 performs an effect with a different degree of expectation according to a reach reaching route in the effect (for example, a rank-up zone). For example, the gaming machine 10 has a reach reaching route from the effect flow F5 to the effect flow F13, a reach reaching route from the effect flow F9 to the effect flow F13, and a reach reaching route from the effect flow F12 to the effect flow F13. , Perform high-expected reach production.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can suggest an increase in the degree of expectation in accordance with the number of symbol actions (pseudo-runs). In addition, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate an increase in the degree of expectation by changing the background display according to the number of symbol actions (pseudo reams), so that the player can count the number of symbol actions (pseudo reams). It is not necessary, and it is possible to suggest an increase in the degree of expectation to a player who has missed a game effect on the way.

[Sixteenth embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment executes an effect that can enhance interest.

  FIG. 236 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect flow of the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 237 is a diagram illustrating an example (1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the sixteenth embodiment. Figure 238 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of a screen display device of the sixteenth embodiment is displayed. Figure 239 is a diagram showing an example (Part 3) of a screen display device of the sixteenth embodiment is displayed. FIG. 240 is a diagram illustrating an example of the Hit number table according to the sixteenth embodiment.

  [Production Flow F21] The gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols from a state where three symbols (decorative symbols) are stopped. A screen display example of the symbol variation is shown on a screen 1100 in FIG. 237 (F21). The screen 1100 shows a state where three symbols are changing. When the gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F22.

  [Effect Flow F22] The gaming machine 10 displays an effect entry logo display indicating entry into the effect (eg, Tiger JUMP effect) step by step. The gaming machine 10 partially displays the effect entry logo as a first step. A screen display example of the first step is shown on a screen 1110 in FIG. 237 (F22a). Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F23 when the effect entry logo display is not stepped up. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 partially displays the effect entry logo as a second step when stepping up the effect entry logo display. A screen display example of the second step is shown on a screen 1120 in FIG. 237 (F22b). Screen 1110 displays effect entry logo (first step) 1111. Screen 1120 displays effect entry logo (second step) 1121. The effect entry logo (second step) 1121 includes the display range of the effect entry logo (first step) 1111 and indicates that the sense of expectation to enter the effect is large. Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F23 when the effect entry logo display is not stepped up, and proceeds to the effect flow F24 when the effect entry logo display is stepped up.

[Effect Flow F23] The gaming machine 10 does not enter the effect and continues normal fluctuation (variation display).
[Effect Flow F24] The gaming machine 10 displays the entire effect entry logo to clearly indicate entry into the effect. A screen display example of the effect entry logo is shown on a screen 1130 in FIG. 238 (F24). Screen 1130 displays the entire effect entry logo 1131. After displaying the effect entry logo 1131 for a predetermined time, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F25.

  [Production Flow F25] The gaming machine 10 displays the left and right symbols in a stopped state (temporary stop) and displays a reach state in which the middle symbol is changing. A screen display example of the reach state is shown on a screen 1140 in FIG. 238 (F25). Upon displaying the reach state, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F26.

  [Production Flow F26] The gaming machine 10 performs the production (Tiger JUMP production). The tiger JUMP effect is a form of an effect in which a character such as a tiger fluctuates in design due to symbol destruction. In the gaming machine 10, the board effect device 44a may be linked with the timing of breaking the symbol in order to further enhance the interest.

  A screen display example of symbol destruction is shown on a screen 1150 in FIG. 238 (F26). The screen 1150 shows a state where the character is destroying the design. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the screen 1150 on the display device 41 and activates the board effect device 44a. The screen 1150 indicates that the character is performing a predetermined action on the right symbol. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F27 after the effect of symbol destruction.

  [Production Flow F27] The gaming machine 10 displays the Hit number based on the production of the symbol destruction. A predetermined number is added to the Hit number each time the effect of symbol destruction is performed in the effect flow F26 with the initial value being “0”. Here, the relationship between the Hit number and the destruction pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Hit number table indicates the Hit number to be added according to the destruction pattern of the symbol. The Hit number table includes an item “destruction pattern” and an item “addition number”. The item “destruction pattern” indicates the type of effect of the symbol destruction performed in the effect flow F27. The item “addition number” indicates the number of hits to be added according to the type of symbol destruction.

  For example, the Hit number table indicates that when the symbol destruction is performed in pattern 1 (for example, Lariat), the Hit number “1” is added, and when the symbol destruction is performed in pattern 2 (for example, body press). , The Hit number “5” is added, and when the symbol destruction is performed in the pattern 3 (eg, Tarzan), the Hit number “10” is added. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest in the effect of the player by adding a different addition number to the Hit number in accordance with the destruction pattern for each effect of symbol destruction. A screen display example of the Hit number display is shown in a screen 1160 in FIG. 239 (F27a) and a screen 1170 in FIG. 239 (F27b). Screen 1160 displays the number of hits.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 can repeatedly perform the effect of symbol destruction, and can cumulatively add the number of Hits by the effect of symbol destruction a plurality of times. The gaming machine 10 reports the expectation of the game progress according to the size of the Hit number. For example, when the Hit number reaches an upper limit value (eg, the Hit number “100”), the expectation of the game progress becomes intense. Notify that.

  The screen 1170 indicates that the background changes according to the number of hits. For example, the background display in the Tiger JUMP production has a blue background when the hit number is “1” to “20”, a green background when the hit number is “21” to “50”, and a hit number “51”. From "100" to a red background. In this way, the gaming machine 10 produces a sense of expectation for the progress of the game by changing the background display according to the number of hits.

  The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F25 when continuing the effect of the second or third symbol destruction, and proceeds to the effect flow F28 when ending the effect of the third symbol destruction. In the case where the gaming machine 10 ends the symbol destruction effect without reaching the third symbol destruction effect, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F29.

  [Production Flow F28] The gaming machine 10 cuts-in and displays the character. A screen display example of the character cut-in is shown on a screen 1180 in FIG. 239 (F28). The screen 1180 informs again that the player has entered the reach effect after the third symbol destruction effect, that is, that the player has a high expectation for the progress of the game. After displaying the cut-in character for a predetermined time, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F29.

  [Production Flow F29] The gaming machine 10 performs a reach production. The gaming machine 10 performs a reach effect with a different degree of expectation depending on the Hit number of the effect. For example, the gaming machine 10 performs a reach effect with a high degree of expectation as the number of Hits increases. In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs a big jackpot-determined reach effect when the Hit number has reached the upper limit value.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can indicate an increase in the degree of expectation by displaying the Hit number added according to the effect of symbol destruction. Further, the gaming machine 10 can further enhance the interest in symbol fluctuation by linking the character display and the board effect device 44a in the symbol destruction effect.

[Seventeenth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment urges a player to pay attention to a game effect, and executes an effect that can further enhance interest.

  Drawing 241 is a figure showing an example of the production flow of the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 242 is a diagram illustrating an example (1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 243 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 244 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 3) of a screen displayed by the display device of the seventeenth embodiment.

  [Production Flow F31] The gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols from a state in which three symbols (decorative symbols) are stopped. A screen display example of the symbol variation is shown on a screen 1200 in FIG. 242 (F31). The screen 1200 shows a state where three symbols are changing. When the gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F32.

  [Production Flow F32] When the design change direction is from top to bottom, the gaming machine 10 causes the character to appear from bottom to top, which is the opposite direction to the design change direction. A screen display example of a character appearance is shown in a screen 1210 of FIG. 242 (F32a), a screen 1220 of FIG. 242 (F32b), a screen 1230 of FIG. 243 (F32c), and a screen 1240 of FIG. 243 (F32d).

  Screens 1210, 1220, 1230, and 1240 show how characters appear. The screen 1210 shows the character appearing in the direction opposite to the direction in which the symbol fluctuates, that is, from below. Screen 1220 shows the appearance of the character up to the lower half of the screen. Screen 1230 shows the appearance of the character in the entire screen. At this time, the character is zoomed up and displayed so as to cover the entire screen. Screen 1240 shows a state in which the character that appeared after zooming up has been zoomed out. The screen 1240 displays the character 1241 that has been zoomed out. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can give the player a sense of strangeness and a sense of surprise by causing the character 1241 to appear from the direction opposite to the direction in which the symbols change. Further, since the character 1241 that has appeared in this way is differentiated from other display elements (other characters, background display, etc.), the gaming machine 10 uses the character 1241's high alerting effect 1241 can be given a special notification effect. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F33 with the character 1241 appearing.

  [Production Flow F33] The gaming machine 10 guides the player to participate in the game production. As an example of the screen display, the screen 1250 of FIG. 243 (F33) displays an image of the push button 25 to be operated, together with a description of participation in the game effect “Press!”. When detecting the pressing operation of the push button 25, the gaming machine 10 determines whether the effect is successful, and proceeds to the effect flow F34 when the effect is successful, and proceeds to the effect flow F36 when the effect is unsuccessful. The success or failure of the effect may be determined in advance based on the result mode of the game progress, or may be determined based on the result mode of the game progress and detection of the pressing operation of the push button 25. Is also good.

  [Production Flow F34] The gaming machine 10 notifies the success of the production by a display mode, a sound, a light emission mode of a lamp or an LED, or the like. For example, the gaming machine 10 notifies the success of the effect by highlighting the character, displaying a rainbow color, lighting a patrol lamp, and sounding a fanfare. A screen display example is shown on a screen 1260 in FIG. 244 (F34). Screen 1260 shows a state of notifying the success of the effect. For example, the target of the notification of the success of the effect includes a certainty indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit, a fever with a very high expectation of the big hit, and the like. The gaming machine 10, and finishes notifying the success of the performance, proceed to the production flow F35.

[Production Flow F35] The gaming machine 10 performs a reach production or the like corresponding to the notification target.
[Effect flow F36] The failure of the effect is notified by the display mode, the sound, the light emission mode of the lamp or the LED, or the like. For example, the gaming machine 10 notifies the failure of the effect by causing the character to exit, displaying in monotone, turning off the patrol lamp, muting the sound, and the like. A screen display example is shown on a screen 1270 in FIG. 241 (F36). Screen 1270 shows a state in which an effect failure is notified. Screen 1270 shows a state in which the character is sent down. When the gaming machine 10 leaves the character, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F37.

  [Production Flow F37] The gaming machine 10 continues to display the fluctuation. Note that the gaming machine 10 may derive the same result as in the case of notifying the success of the effect via a later effect, even when notifying the failure of the effect.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can call attention to the game effect to the player, and can execute the effect that can further enhance the interest.
[Eighteenth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 of an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the eighteenth embodiment notifies a pseudo-sequence that performs a pseudo-sequence after notifying the start of a pseudo-sequence accompanied by the operation of the board effect device 44 at the start of a change, and notifies a pseudo-sequence start after the start of a change. After performing the pseudo-run from, the pseudo-run can be executed.

  FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect flow of the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 246 is a diagram illustrating an example (1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 247 is a diagram illustrating an example (2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 248 is a diagram illustrating an example (3) of a screen displayed by the display device of the eighteenth embodiment.

  [Production Flow F41] The gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols from a state where three symbols (decorative symbols) are stopped. A screen display example of the symbol variation is shown on a screen 1300 in FIG. 246 (F41). The screen 1300 shows a state in which three symbols are changing symbols. When the gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F42.

  [Director Flow F 42] gaming machine 10 stops the left symbol. A screen display example of the left symbol stop is shown on a screen 1310 in FIG. 246 (F42). The screen 1310 shows a state where the left symbol is stopped at “2”. When the gaming machine 10 stops the left symbol, it proceeds to the effect flow F43.

  [Production Flow F43] The gaming machine 10 stops the right symbol. A screen display example of stopping the right symbol is shown on a screen 1320 in FIG. 246 (F43). The screen 1320 shows that the right symbol is stopped at “2”. When the right symbol stops at the same number as the left symbol, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the right symbol without stopping completely (for example, temporarily stops or stops in a swinging state).

  The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F44 when the right symbol stops at the same number as the left symbol, that is, when the stopped symbol forms a reach shape and stops. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F46 when the right symbol stops at a different number from the left symbol, that is, when the stop symbol stops without forming a reach shape.

  [Production Flow F44] The gaming machine 10 swings the left and right symbols. A screen display example of left and right symbol shaking is shown on a screen 1330 in FIG. 246 (F44). The screen 1330 shows a state where the right symbol “2” and the left symbol “2” are swinging. In this way, the gaming machine 10 produces a feeling of expectation that the game will shift to the reach effect by the effect of swinging the symbol when the left symbol and the right symbol have the same number.

  The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F45 when shifting to the reach effect (when the right symbol and the left symbol stop at the same number). On the other hand, when the gaming machine 10 does not shift to the reach effect (when sliding the right symbol), the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F48.

[Production Flow F45] The gaming machine 10 performs a reach production.
[Effect Flow F46] The gaming machine 10 performs a stir effect using the board effect device 44. The gaming machine 10 activates the board effect device 44 and uses the board effect device 44 to perform a stir effect. For example, the gaming machine 10 causes the board effect device 44 to vibrate, or outputs sound in accordance with the movement of the board effect device 44 to perform a flirting effect. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the interest of the player by performing an effect using the board effect device 44.

  A screen display example of a fanning effect using the board effect device 44 is shown in a screen 1340 of FIG. 247 (F46a) and a screen 1350 of FIG. 247 (F46b). The screen 1340 shows a state in which a part of the front side (player side) of the screen interferes with the board effect device 44b and the board effect device 44c as a result of the gaming machine 10 operating with the board effect device 44b and the board effect device 44c. . The screen 1350 shows that as a result of the gaming machine 10 returning the board effect device 44b and the board effect device 44c from the operating position (interference position), a part of the front side (player side) of the screen is the board effect device 44b and the board effect. It shows a state in which the device has returned from a state of interfering with the device 44c to a state of no interference.

The game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F47 when the left and right symbols are shaken after the fanning effect. When stopping the middle symbol after the fanning effect, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F50.
[Production Flow F47] The gaming machine 10 swings the left and right symbols. A screen display example of right and left symbol shaking is shown on a screen 1360 in FIG. 247 (F47). The screen 1360 shows a state where the right symbol “4” and the left symbol “2” are swinging. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F48 after swinging the left and right symbols.

  [Production Flow F48] The gaming machine 10 slides the right symbol. The gaming machine 10 displays the right board effect device and activates the board effect device 44b in accordance with the timing at which the right symbol slides, thereby producing an effect as if the symbol is being moved by the board effect device 44b. Further, the gaming machine 10 shakes the screen in accordance with the operation of the board effect device 44b and outputs a predetermined sound.

  A screen display example of the right symbol slip is shown on a screen 1370 in FIG. 247 (F48). The screen 1370 shows a state where the right symbol is changed in synchronization with the operation of the board effect device 44 in the downward direction. In this way, the gaming machine 10 produces an effect as if the symbol was slipped by the board effecting device 44b by linking the movement of the board effecting device 44b with the fluctuation of the symbol. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F49 after sliding the right symbol.

  [Effect Flow F49] The gaming machine 10 stops the pseudo-sequence symbol in the middle symbol, and shifts to the preceding pseudo-sequence effect. A screen display example in which the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is shown on a screen 1375 in FIG. 248 (F49). The screen 1375 displays a pseudo continuous symbol (for example, a symbol with a star mark different from a normal decorative symbol) on a medium symbol. The gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the transition to the first pseudo continuous production by stopping and displaying the pseudo continuous symbol on the middle symbol. Thereafter, game machine 10 performs a pseudo continuous presentation (previous pseudo continuous second round) by re fluctuations. In addition, the gaming machine 10 develops into a reach effect when the pseudo symbol is not stopped again in the middle symbol, and performs the first pseudo consecutive effect in the third lap when the pseudo symbol is stopped again in the middle symbol. In the same manner, the gaming machine 10 can execute the pseudo consecutive production up to the fourth week. The gaming machine 10 selects a pre-simulated continuous production in which the number of laps increases as the degree of expectation for the progress of the game increases.

  [Director Flow F50] gaming machine 10 stops the middle symbol. A screen display example of the middle symbol stop is shown on a screen 1380 in FIG. 248 (F50). Screen 1380 shows a state in which the middle symbol is stopped at “7”. In addition, the middle symbol does not completely stop but temporarily stops. After stopping the middle symbol, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F51.

  [Production Flow F51] The gaming machine 10 swings three symbols. A screen display example of the three symbol shaking is shown on a screen 1390 in FIG. 248 (F51). The screen 1390 shows a state where the right symbol “4”, the middle symbol “7”, and the left symbol “2” are swinging. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F52 after swinging the three symbols.

  [Production Flow F52] The gaming machine 10 completely stops the three symbols and notifies the player of the loss. A screen display example of the outlier is shown on a screen 1400 in FIG. The screen 1400 shows that the right symbol "4", the middle symbol "7", and the left symbol "2" are completely stopped. The screen 1400 also indicates that the special figure change display game corresponding to the hold storage displayed on the hold release display has ended, and the hold storage displayed on the hold release display has been used.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the fluctuation effect of the symbol by performing the pseudo continuous effect in which the symbol fluctuation and the board effect device 44 are linked.
[Nineteenth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. There is a reservation look-ahead notice that changes the display mode of the reservation storage display (startup storage display) and gives a preview of the progress of the variable display game before the reservation is consumed. The gaming machine 10 shown in the nineteenth embodiment informs the player of the change in the display mode of the hold storage display in the hold look-ahead notice in an easy-to-understand manner, and also enhances the interest.

  FIG. 249 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect flow of the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 250 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 251 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the nineteenth embodiment.

  [Effect Flow F61] The gaming machine 10 starts a reserved prefetch notice effect. An example of a screen display at the start of the reservation pre-reading notice is shown on a screen 1500 in FIG. 250 (F61). Screen 1500 shows that the prefetch notice effect is started. The screen 1500 displays, on the message display 1501, a condition for success of the prefetching of the reservation pre-reading, "change in the reservation due to victory of character A!" In other words, the gaming machine 10 has a function of notifying the start of the prefetching reservation advance notice and a function of guiding the success condition of the prefetching reservation advance notice. Also, the screen 1500 displays the mini-character display 1502 in a display mode for guiding the success condition of the reservation pre-read notice. That is, the gaming machine 10 also realizes the success condition guidance function of the reservation pre-read notice by the mini character display 1502. When starting the reservation notice, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F62.

  [Production Flow F62] The gaming machine 10 displays the character's game. A screen display example showing the character's game is shown on a screen 1510 in FIG. 250 (F62). Screen 1510 shows a state in which character A displayed on character display 1511 and character B displayed on character display 1512 are competing. For example, the character A is a character corresponding to the mini-character (see the thirteenth embodiment), that is, a character previously selected by the player. For example, the gaming machine 10 selects a character previously selected by the player as the character A, and selects one character as the character B from a plurality of types of characters according to the degree of expectation of the effect. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can produce a sense of expectation for the progress of the game by changing the battle character in accordance with the degree of expectation.

  Also, the screen 1510 displays the mini-character display 1502 in a display form for guiding the success condition of the pre-reading advance notice. The screen 1510 displays the mini-character display 1502 in the same display mode as the character display 1511, thereby guiding that the character previously selected by the player is the character A by the mini-character display 1502 and the character display 1511. This allows the gaming machine 10 to change the display mode of the character display 1511 in the course of a game effect (for example, a battle effect), change to a display mode that cannot be directly sensed, or become non-display mode. Also, the mini-character display 1502 can clearly indicate to the player that the character selected by the player in advance is the character A.

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F63 after displaying the game between the character A and the character B.
[Production Flow F63] The gaming machine 10 displays the result of the game of the character. Screen display examples for displaying the game result are shown in a screen 1520 in FIG. 250 (F63a) and a screen 1530 in FIG. 250 (F63b). The screen 1520 indicates that the character A has been defeated (holding prefetch notice has failed). The character display 1521 clearly indicates that the character A has been defeated by a facial expression (for example, a crying face) or an action (for example, a drooping posture). The character display 1522 clearly indicates that the character B has won by facial expressions, actions, and the like.

  The screen 1530 indicates that the character A has won (successful pre-reading notice has succeeded). The character display 1531 clearly indicates that the character A has won by a facial expression (for example, a smiling face) or an action (for example, a posture of stretching a chest). The character display 1532 clearly indicates that the character B has been defeated by a facial expression, a motion, or the like.

  Also, the screen 1520 displays the mini-character display 1523 in a display mode for guidance (result guidance) of the result of the reservation pre-read notice. The screen 1520 displays the mini-character display 1523 in the same display mode as the character display 1521, thereby guiding that the character previously selected by the player has been defeated by the mini-character display 1523 and the character display 1521. The screen 1530 displays the mini-character display 1533 in a display mode for guidance (result guidance) of the result of the reservation look-ahead preview. The screen 1530 displays the mini-character display 1533 in the same display mode as the character display 1531, thereby indicating that the character previously selected by the player has won by the mini-character display 1533 and the character display 1531.

When the character A has won, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F64, and when the character A has been defeated, the reservation pre-read notice ends.
[Production Flow F64] The gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the hold storage. A screen display example showing a change in the display mode of the possession storage is shown in a screen 1540 in FIG. The screen 1540 indicates that the character B displayed on the character display 1542 is performing a predetermined action on the hold storage display 1544 located at the fourth position in the hold storage display area 1543. The screen 1550 indicates that the display mode of the hold storage has been changed to the hold storage display 1551 as a result of the predetermined action by the character B displayed on the character display 1542. In the gaming machine 10, the character A displayed on the character display 1541 may perform a predetermined action on the hold storage display 1544. When the display mode of the hold storage is changed from the hold storage display 1544 to the hold storage display 1551, the gaming machine 10 ends the hold notice.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 can also perform the effect with respect to the pending storage displayed during the pending digest display. Further, the gaming machine 10 may have different display modes of pending memory display 1544 according to the type of a plurality of types of character B selected in accordance with the expectations of the effect from among the characters (selected character). Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the position and the number of the hold storage display for changing the display mode according to the type of the selected character.

  Further, the gaming machine 10, the switching timing from the mini character display 1502 to the mini character display 1523 or mini character display 1533, sets the time lag with respect to the switching timing from the character display 1511 to the character display 1521 or character display 1531 Is also good. The time lag may be such that the switching timing of the character display is delayed from the switching timing of the mini-character display, or the switching timing of the mini-character display may be delayed from the switching timing of the character display. good. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform the advance notification of the success / failure result of the reservation pre-reading notice and the replacement notification of the success / failure result of the reservation pre-reading notice once indicated (the resurrection notice) at the switching timing of the mini-character display.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can easily notify the player of the success / failure result of the pending prefetch notice by performing the effect of the prefetch notice in the screen (the center part of the screen). In addition, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with guidance on the success condition of the reservation pre-reading notice and the result of success or failure in the display of the character in the screen (the central part of the screen) and the display of the mini-character in the peripheral part of the screen. Can be easily informed. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player with respect to the reserved look-ahead notice.

  The game format of the characters (the effect of the preliminary look-ahead notice) may be a race between the characters. In this case, the gaming machine 10 can notify the start of the race (preliminary advance notice) by displaying a part of the course (for example, a turn mark of a boat race). In addition, the gaming machine 10 can display a goal line and display a state in which a competing character is passing the goal line, thereby notifying the result of the race (preliminary pre-reading notice). According to such an effect of the reservation pre-reading notice, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player of the success / failure result of the reservation pre-reading notice in an easily understandable manner.

[Modification 1 of the nineteenth embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the nineteenth embodiment notifies the user of the result of the success or failure of the effect by the player's participation by displaying the character and the mini-character. For example, screens 1260 and 1270 described in the seventeenth embodiment with reference to FIG. 244 can be changed to screens 1260a and 1270a.

  The gaming machine 10, after guiding the player to participate in the game effect, detects the pressing operation of the push button 25, and determines whether the effect is successful. If the effect is successful, the effect flow F34 (FIG. 241). (See FIG. 241), and if the effect fails, the screen 1270a is displayed in the effect flow F36 (see FIG. 241).

  Screen 1260a shows a state of notifying the success of the effect. The screen 1260a notifies the success of the effect by the player's participation in the display mode of the character display 1261 and the display mode of the mini-character 1262. At this time, the screen 1260a notifies the success of the effect by setting the mini-character display 1262 in the same display mode as the character display 1261. Also, screen 1270a shows a state of notifying the failure of the effect. The screen 1270a notifies the player of the failure of the effect due to the player's participation in the display mode of the character display 1271 and the display mode of the mini-character 1272. At this time, the screen 1270a notifies the success of the effect by setting the mini-character display 1272 in the same display mode as the character display 1271.

  Note that the mini-characters 1262, 1272 can observe the entire image even when the entire image of the character display 1261, 1271 cannot be observed. For example, in screen 1270a, the lower half of character display 1271 is outside the display area, but the entire mini-character 1262 is inside the display area. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can increase the degree of freedom of the effect display of the character displays 1261 and 1271 by ensuring the guidance of the success or failure of the effect by the mini-characters 1262 and 1272. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the display mode of the character displays 1261 and 1271 changes in the course of guiding the success / failure result, or the display mode cannot be directly felt, or a part or the whole is hidden. Also in this case, the guidance of the success or failure result can be clearly indicated to the player by the mini characters 1262 and 1272.

[Twentieth embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the twentieth embodiment is continuously executed by notifying the contents of the effect of the variable display executed earlier in the variable display executed later in the variable display executed continuously. Specify the relevance of the production of the variable display.

  FIG. 253 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect flow of the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 254 is a diagram illustrating an example (1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 255 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the twentieth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 performs a symbol stop effect when notifying the progress of the game (notifying the advance reading notice) over a plurality of variable displays.
[Effect Flow F71] The gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols from the state where the three symbols are stopped, and starts displaying the number of changes “N-th”. A screen display example of the symbol variation is shown on a screen 1600 of FIG. 254 (F71). The screen 1600 shows a state in which three symbols (decorative symbols) are changing. When the gaming machine 10 starts changing the symbols, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F72.

  [Effect Flow F72] The gaming machine 10 performs a symbol stop effect immediately before the symbol stops. A screen display example of the symbol stop effect is shown on a screen 1610 in FIG. 254 (F72). Screen 1610 shows a state where three symbols are about to stop in the same color. Gaming machine 10 is thus a three symbols the same color, yet predetermined game progress (for example, the possibility of Reach generation, Reach generation, super reach occurrence) performing symbol stop effect when notifying.

  At this time, the gaming machine 10 applies a predetermined effect (for example, brightness enhancement) to each of the symbols on the screen 1610, thereby clearly indicating (appealing) that the three symbols immediately before the stop are the same color, and also displaying the above-mentioned holding memory. Perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation by voice.

  The symbols are grouped for each symbol type, and the color corresponding to the group clearly indicates to which group the symbol belongs. For example, the symbols "1" and "5" are green, the symbols "2", "4", and "6" are blue, and the symbols "3" and "7" are red. For example, the symbol group shown in red is the most valuable symbol composed of probable symbols, and the symbol group shown in green is the second most valuable symbol composed of time saving symbols. There is a symbol group indicated by blue, which is a symbol that is usually composed of symbols and has a relatively low value.

  For example, the gaming machine 10 performs a symbol stop effect when all three symbols are red and there is a reserved memory of the first degree of expectation. In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs a symbol stop effect when all three symbols are green and there is a reserved memory of a second expected degree lower than the first expected degree. Further, the gaming machine 10 performs a symbol stop effect when all the three symbols are blue and there is a hold memory of a third expectation lower than the second expectation. After performing the symbol stop effect, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F73.

  [Production Flow F73] The gaming machine 10 stops changing symbols. A screen display example of the symbol stop is shown on a screen 1620 in FIG. 254 (F73). Screen 1620 shows the left symbol "2", a middle symbol "4", a state in which the right symbol "6" is stopped. Also, the screen 1620 indicates that the fluctuation display of the fluctuation number “N-th” has ended and the hold storage displayed on the hold consumption display has been used. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F74 after stopping the fluctuation of the symbols.

  [Effect Flow F74] The gaming machine 10 performs a start effect from a state where the three symbols are stopped, starts changing symbols, and starts a change display of the number of changes “N + 1 times”. The start effect is an effect that informs that the effect corresponding to the effect performed in the effect flow F72 is performed when the fluctuation display of the number of fluctuations “N + 1” is stopped. The start effect is an effect by a predetermined effect (for example, brightness enhancement) on a symbol, a message display, or the like. As described above, the gaming machine 10 performs a start effect at the start of a variable display executed later, thereby notifying in advance that there is a symbol stop effect at the time of stop. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly show the relevance between the effect of the variable display executed first and the effect of the variable display executed later.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 can perform a start effect by voice instead of the start effect by display or together with the start effect by display. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can also perform a start effect by using an accessory (the board effect device 44 or the like) instead of or together with the start effect by display. In this way, the gaming machine 10 performs a start effect other than the display, thereby giving a sense of incongruity to the player and more strongly notifying that the symbol stop effect is present when the player stops.

  A screen display example of the symbol variation is shown on a screen 1630 in FIG. 255 (F74). The screen 1630 shows a state where the three symbols have started to change. When the gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F75.

  [Effect Flow F75] The gaming machine 10 performs a symbol stop effect immediately before the symbol stops. A screen display example at the time of the symbol stop effect is shown on a screen 1640 in FIG. 255 (F75). Screen 1640 shows a state where three symbols are about to stop at the same color. The gaming machine 10 performs the symbol stop effect when the three symbols have the same color and there is a hold memory satisfying the predetermined degree of expectation. After performing the symbol stop effect, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F76.

  [Production Flow F76] The gaming machine 10 stops changing symbols. A screen display example of the symbol stop is shown on a screen 1650 of FIG. 255 (F76). The screen 1650 shows a state where the left symbol “1”, the middle symbol “5”, and the right symbol “1” are stopped. The screen 1650 also indicates that the fluctuation display of the number of fluctuations “N + 1” has ended, and the hold storage displayed on the hold release display has been consumed.

  In this way, by notifying that a continuous effect is performed at the start of the fluctuation, the gaming machine 10 can perform the symbol stop effect even if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed later is long (for example, 60 seconds). Can be grasped by the player that is a continuous effect from the preceding variable display. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate to the player that the continuous effect is being performed by the continuous variable display, and the interest of the player in the continuous effect can be improved.

[Twenty-first embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 of a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment draws the player's attention at the start of the symbol change, and performs an effect that can enhance the interest in the symbol change. FIG. 256 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by the display device according to the twenty-first embodiment.

  A screen 1700 shown in (1) of FIG. 256 is an action start screen for notifying the start of the change of the symbol, and shows a state where three symbols (decorative symbols) are stopped. The design shown on screen 1700 includes numbers and characters. Also, the screen 1700 displays a serif character “Ikuze!” To notify that the symbol change is started.

  The screen 1710 shown in (2) of FIG. 256 is an in-action screen that notifies the start of the change of the symbol, and indicates the start of the change of the three symbols. The screen 1710 shows the action of rotating each symbol clockwise around the center of the symbol, together with the serif character "Uo !!" By such an action, the gaming machine 10 can draw the player's attention to the symbol when the symbol starts to change. Further, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player that the symbol has been started to change by the action of the symbol even when the symbol change or the symbol switching is not immediately performed when the symbol change starts.

  The rotation of each symbol in the clockwise direction about the center of the symbol is an example of the movement of the symbol without considering the design of the symbol. In this way, the gaming machine 10 gives a sense of incongruity and impact by performing a movement that does not consider the design of the symbol, and can enhance interest.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 may be configured such that all the symbols (for example, characters) are different when performing the effect (the symbol rotation effect at the start of the change). That is, the gaming machine 10 sets the symbol combination at the start of the change as one of the start conditions of the symbol rotation effect at the start of the change. In this way, the gaming machine 10 sets the start condition and performs the effect, thereby giving a further impact to the player and obtaining more interest from the player.

  The screen 1720 shown in (3) of FIG. 256 has an action end screen for notifying the start of the change of the symbol, and indicates the scroll start of the three symbols. The screen 1720 shows an action to stop at a correct position together with the serif character “pita” indicating that the scrolling of the symbol is started. By such an action, the gaming machine 10 notifies the player that the symbol finally starts scrolling.

  Note that the action in which each symbol rotates clockwise around the center of the symbol is an example of an action that guides the start of symbol change, and the rotation axis is not limited to the center of the symbol but may be set anywhere in the symbol. Or may be set outside the design. The rotation direction of the symbol is not limited to clockwise, but may be counterclockwise. Further, the amount of rotation of the symbol may be set to an extent that the player can perceive (for example, 5 degrees), or may be set to a half turn, one turn, or more than one turn. Each symbol may be returned to the normal position by continuing to rotate in the rotation direction or by rotating in the opposite direction.

[Twenty-second embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-second embodiment improves interest by using a plurality of types of symbols for the same symbol in one stage.

First, the stage configuration will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 257 is a diagram illustrating an example of a stage configuration table and a stage configuration according to the twenty-second embodiment.
The stage configuration table shown in (1) is a table showing the configuration of the stage. The stage configuration table includes patterns of an item “stage” and an item “design”. The item “stage” indicates the type of stage. The item “symbol” indicates the type of symbol in each stage.

  For example, in the stage 1, the gaming machine 10 uses the symbol of the pattern 1 and the symbol of the pattern 2. In stage 2, the gaming machine 10 uses the pattern 3 pattern.

  The screen 1800 shown in (2) is an example of displaying the pattern 1 on the stage 1. Screen 1800 displays a pattern 1801 corresponding to pattern 1 consisting of characters and numbers, a background 1802 corresponding to stage 1, a mini-character display 1803 corresponding to stage 1, and a pedestal display 1804 corresponding to stage 1. I do.

  The screen 1810 shown in (3) is an example in which the pattern 2 is displayed on the stage 1. The screen 1810 displays a pattern 1811 corresponding to the pattern 2 composed of numbers, a background 1802 corresponding to the stage 1, a mini-character display 1803 corresponding to the stage 1, and a pedestal display 1804 corresponding to the stage 1.

  The screen 1820 shown in (4) is an example in which the pattern 3 is displayed on the stage 2. The screen 1820 displays a pattern 1821 corresponding to the pattern 3 composed of the encircled numerals, a background 1822 corresponding to the stage 2, a mini-character display 1823 corresponding to the stage 2, and a pedestal display 1824 corresponding to the stage 2. I do.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 prepares a plurality of symbol patterns for each stage, so that the player can feel as if the number of stages actually prepared is larger than the number prepared.

Next, the change timing of the symbol will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 258 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating a symbol change timing according to the twenty-second embodiment.
Prior to timing T10, the gaming machine 10 performs the variable display of the variable display counts “N”, “N + 1”, and “N + 2” in the special figure variable display game in the symbol pattern 1 of the stage 1. The gaming machine 10 performs a symbol change effect of switching the symbol pattern from the pattern 1 to the pattern 2 at the timing T10 during which the variable display of the variable display number “N + 2” is being executed.

  Then, after the timing T10, the gaming machine 10 performs the variable display from the variable display number “N + 2” to “N + M” in the special figure variable display game in the symbol pattern 2 of the stage 1. The gaming machine 10 performs a symbol change effect of switching the symbol pattern from the pattern 2 to the pattern 1 at the timing T11 during which the variable display of the variable display number “N + M” is being performed.

Then, after the timing T11, the gaming machine 10 performs the variable display after the variable display count “N + M” in the special figure variable display game in the symbol pattern 1 of the stage 1.
Note that the gaming machine 10 may perform a symbol change effect irrespective of the number of holds, or may perform a symbol change effect in relation to the number of holds. For example, the gaming machine 10 may perform a symbol change effect by detecting that the number of reservations has reached the upper limit value or that a predetermined time has elapsed since the number of reservations has reached the upper limit value.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can set a stage having a plurality of symbol patterns and switch symbols used for the variable display of the special figure variable display game independently of the stage change. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can provide a variation in display even with a small number of stages, and can enhance the interest of the game.

[Twenty-third embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 of a twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-third embodiment produces a sense of expectation for the progress of a game by displaying special symbols in stages. It should be noted that the special symbol is a symbol having a role of notifying the progress of the game, unlike a normal symbol. For example, the game progress notified by the special symbol includes a type of effect to be executed, a type of reach to be executed, a notice of a big hit, and a notification of a big hit type.

  FIG. 259 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect flow of the twenty-third embodiment. Figure 260 is a diagram showing an example (Part 1) of a screen display device of the twenty-third embodiment is displayed. FIG. 261 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the twenty-third embodiment.

  [Production Flow F81] The gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols from a state where three symbols (decorative symbols) are stopped. A screen display example of the symbol variation is shown on a screen 1900 in FIG. 260 (F81). The screen 1900 shows a state in which three symbols are changing. After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the symbol change, the flow proceeds to the effect flow F82.

  [Production Flow F82] The gaming machine 10 temporarily darkens the screen when displaying a special symbol. A screen display example of the dark state is shown on a screen 1910 in FIG. 260 (F82). The screen 1910 shows that the display is dark. By darkening the screen in this way, the gaming machine 10 implies a display of a special symbol, and gives a sense of expectation by giving an impact and a sense of incongruity to the player. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F83 after darkening the screen.

  [Production Flow F83] The gaming machine 10 displays a part of the special symbol 1971 (see FIG. 261 (F85)) a predetermined number of times. Screen display examples of the special symbol partial display are shown in a screen 1920 of FIG. 260 (F83a) and a screen 1930 of FIG. 260 (F83b). The screen 1920 displays a special symbol partial display 1921 which is a part of the special symbol 1971. The screen 1930 displays a special symbol partial display 1931 different from the special symbol partial display 1921. For example, the special symbol partial display 1921 is a first partial display of the special symbol 1971, and the special symbol partial display 1921 is a second partial display of the special symbol 1971.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the special symbol 1971 in a form that allows the player to grasp the special symbol 1971 in a stepwise manner by changing the displayed part when the special symbol 1971 is partially displayed a predetermined number of times. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can give the player a sense of expectation over a predetermined period by gradually revealing the identity of the special symbol 1971 without revealing the identity of the special symbol 1971 at once. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can further enhance the interest in the formation of special symbols.

When the gaming machine 10 has displayed a part of the special symbol a predetermined number of times, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F84. On the other hand, when ending the effect, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F86.
[Production Flow F84] The gaming machine 10 gradually displays the entire image of the special symbol. Screen display examples of the stepwise display of the whole image of the special symbol are shown in a screen 1940 of FIG. 261 (F84a), a screen 1950 of FIG. 261 (F84b), and a screen 1960 of FIG. 261 (F84c). The screen 1940 displays a special symbol partial display 1941 corresponding to the lower third of the special symbol 1971. The screen 1950 displays a special symbol partial display 1951 corresponding to the lower half of the special symbol 1971. The screen 1960 displays a special symbol partial display 1961 corresponding to the lower two-thirds of the special symbol 1971. The gaming machine 10 gradually displays the entire image of the special symbol 1971 by displaying the special symbol partial display 1941, the special symbol partial display 1951, and the special symbol partial display 1961 in this order.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10, when performing the entire display of the special symbols 1971, player display special symbols 1971 in step grasp form. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can give the player a sense of expectation over a predetermined period by gradually revealing the identity of the special symbol 1971 without revealing the identity of the special symbol 1971 at once. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can further enhance the interest in the formation of special symbols.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the entire special symbol 1971 in order from the bottom, but may display the special symbol 1971 from any direction. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform the entire display of the special symbol 1971 by performing predetermined image processing, such as performing the entire display of the special symbol 1971 through a fade-in or from a coarse mosaic display to a fine mosaic display.

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F85 after performing the step-by-step display of the entire image of the special symbol. On the other hand, when ending the effect, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F86.
[Production Flow F85] The gaming machine 10 ends the blackout and determines a special symbol. A screen display example of the special symbol determination is shown in a screen 1970 of FIG. 261 (F85). The screen 1970 shows a state where the darkening of the display is finished and the entire special symbol 1971 is displayed.

[Production Flow F86] The gaming machine 10 resumes the normal fluctuation of the symbol.
In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can further enhance the interest in the game effect by displaying the special symbols in stages to produce a sense of expectation for the game progress.

  Note that the above processing functions can be realized by a computer. In this case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the processing functions are realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Examples of the computer-readable recording medium include a magnetic storage device, an optical disk, a magneto-optical recording medium, and a semiconductor memory. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk device (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape, and the like. The optical disk includes a DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), a DVD-RAM, a CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. The magneto-optical recording medium includes an MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

  When distributing the program, for example, portable recording media such as DVDs and CD-ROMs on which the program is recorded are sold. Alternatively, the program may be stored in a storage device of a server computer, and the program may be transferred from the server computer to another computer via a network.

  The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. Note that the computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. Further, the computer can also execute processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network.

  Further, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device).

  The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, but may include, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. The present invention can be applied to all gaming machines that use a game ball, and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

  The disclosed embodiments are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and a modification. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Gaming machine 11 Outer frame 12 Front frame 15 Glass frame 25 Push button 30 Game board 41 Display device

Claims (2)

A display device comprising: a first display area for displaying a variable display game; and a second display area for displaying a first video independent of the progress of the variable display game;
A control unit that controls the display of the display device;
Including
The second display area includes a frame-shaped frame display area, and an image display area that displays the first image surrounded by the frame display area,
The control unit includes:
A first notification control unit that switches the first video displayed in the video display area to a second video in association with the progress of the variable display game, and notifies the progress of the variable display game;
A second notification control unit that changes a display mode of the frame display area in association with the progress of the variable display game, and notifies the degree of expectation for the result of the variable display game;
Gaming machines including. The control unit changes a display mode of the video display area when switching the first video displayed in the second display area to the second video,
The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images